O

P

E

R

A

T

I

N

G

M

A

N

U

HAPSITE Smart Plus®

Chemical Identification System
IPN 074-472-P1C

A

L

O

P

E

R

A

T

I

N

G

M

A

N

U

HAPSITE Smart Plus®

Chemical Identification System
IPN 074-472-P1C

www.inficon.com©2008 INFICON

reachus@inficon.com

A

LTrademarks
The trademarks of the products mentioned in this manual are held by the companies that
produce them.
ConFlat® is a registered trademark of Varian, Inc.
Dell™ is a trademark of Dell Inc.
INFICON® and HAPSITE® are registered trademarks of INFICON.
Loctite® is a registered trademark of Henkel Technologies.
LEMO® is a registered trademark of LEMO SA.
MicroDuster® is a registered trademark of Acctech LLC.
Microsoft®, Windows® and Excel® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries
PEEK™ is a trademarks of Victrex plc.
Swagelok® is a registered trademark of Swagelok Co.
Tedlar® and DuPont™ and Vespel® are trademarks of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company or its affiliate
Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Performance Elastomers
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
The HAPSITE Smart Plus runs a Linux® Operating System. The source code for the Operating System isavailable from INFICON by request for a nominal operating fee.
Linux® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

Disclaimer
The information contained in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, INFICON assumes
no responsibility for its use and shall not be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages related
to the use of this product.
Due to our continuing program of product improvements, specifications are subject to change without notice.

Copyright©2008 All rights reserved.
Reproduction or adaptation of any part of this document without permission is unlawful.

DECLARATIONOFCONFORMITYThis is to certify that this equipment, designed and manufactured by:

INFICON Inc.
Two Technology Place
East Syracuse, NY 13057
USA
meets the essential safety requirements of the European Union and is placed on the market accordingly. It has
been constructed in accordance with good engineering practice in safety matters in force in the Community anddoes not endanger the safety of persons, domestic animals or property when properly installed and maintained andused in applications for which it was made.
In addition, this is to certify that this equipment has also been designed and manufactured, having regard to thestate of the art, to ensure complies with the Protection Requirements of EMC directive 2004/108/EC.
A Technical Documentation File is also available for review by competent authorities and will be maintained for aperiod of ten years after the date on which the equipment was last manufactured. In additional to this file technical,
safety, installation, maintenance and application related information concerning this equipment can also be found in
the Operating Manual(s) for this product or product family.
Equipment Description:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MS with or without wireless communications,
including the HAPSITE Service Module, NEG Pump, Battery and AC to DC
HAPSITE Adapter.

Applicable Directives:

2006/95/EC (LVD)
1999/5/EC (R&TTE / EMC)(The required compliance statement concerning this directive can be found in
Chapter 4 of this manual.)
2004/108/EC (General EMC)
2002/95/EC (RoHS)

Applicable Standards – Units with wireless communications:
Safety:EN 61010-1:2001

Emissions:ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.4.1: 2003 (R&TTE Emissions)(ERM for equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1: 2002 (Flicker & Harmonics)(ERM - Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz)
EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (Radiated & Conducted Emissions)Class A: Emissions per Table 3(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

Immunity:

ETSI EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1: 2002 (General EMI)
(ERM - EMC - Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz)RoHS:

Due to the classification of this product it is currently exempt from the RoHS
directive.

Wireless Restrictions:
Countries
France
Italy
Luxembourg
Romania
Austria, Denmark, Finland,
Germany, Greece, Iceland,
Ireland, Liechtenstein,
Luxembourg, The Netherlands,
Norway, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, The
United Kingdom

Restrictions
Outdoor use limited to 10mW e.i.r.p. within the band
2454 to 2483.5 MHz.
If used outside of own premises, generalauthorization is required.
General authorization is required for public service.
On a secondary basis. Individual license required.
None

Applicable Standards – Units without wireless communications:
Safety:EN 61010-1:2001

Emissions:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (Radiated & Conducted Emissions)Class A: Emissions per Table 3(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)
EN 61000-3-2: 2000 (Harmonics)
EN 61000-3-3: 1995/A1: 2001 (Flicker)

Immunity:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (General EMC)Class A: Immunity per Table A.1(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

RoHS:

Due to the classification of this product it is currently exempt from the RoHS
directive.

CE Implementation Date:

May 1, 2008

Authorized Representative:

Duane H. WrightOperations Quality Manager, ISS
INFICON Inc.
ANY QUESTIONS RELATIVE TO THIS DECLARATION OR TO THE SAFETY OF INFICON'S PRODUCTS SHOULD BE DIRECTED, IN
WRITING, TO THE VICE-PRESIDENT OF OPERATIONS AT THE ABOVE ADDRESS.
Revised 11/04/08 (Rev C)

DECLARATIONOFCONFORMITYThis is to certify that this equipment, designed and manufactured by:

INFICON Inc.
Two Technology Place
East Syracuse, NY 13057
USA
meets the essential safety requirements of the European Union and is placed on the market accordingly. It has
been constructed in accordance with good engineering practice in safety matters in force in the Community anddoes not endanger the safety of persons, domestic animals or property when properly installed and maintained andused in applications for which it was made.
In addition, this is to certify that this equipment has also been designed and manufactured, having regard to thestate of the art, to ensure complies with the Protection Requirements of EMC directive 2004/108/EC.
A Technical Documentation File is also available for review by competent authorities and will be maintained for aperiod of ten years after the date on which the equipment was last manufactured. In additional to this file,technical, installation, maintenance and application information concerning this equipment can also be found in the
Operating Manual(s) for this product or product family.
Equipment Description:

SituProbe(when used with the HAPSITE Smart Portable GC/MS System)

Applicable Directives:

2006/95/EC (LVD)
2004/108/EC (General EMC)
2002/95/EC (RoHS)

Applicable Standards:
Safety:EN 61010-1:2001

Emissions:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (Radiated & Conducted Emissions)Class A: Emissions per Table 3(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

Immunity:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (General EMC)Class A: Immunity per Table A.1(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

RoHS:

Due to the classification of this product it is currently exempt from the RoHS
directive.

CE Implementation Date:

March 31, 2006

Authorized Representative:

Duane H. WrightOperations Quality Manager, ISS
INFICON Inc.

ANY QUESTIONS RELATIVE TO THIS DECLARATION OR TO THE SAFETY OF INFICON'S PRODUCTS SHOULD BE DIRECTED, IN
WRITING, TO THE VICE-PRESIDENT OF OPERATIONS AT THE ABOVE ADDRESS.
Revised 11/04/08 (Rev C)

DECLARATIONOFCONFORMITYThis is to certify that this equipment, designed and manufactured by:

INFICON Inc.
Two Technology Place
East Syracuse, NY 13057
USA
meets the essential safety requirements of the European Union and is placed on the market accordingly. It has
been constructed in accordance with good engineering practice in safety matters in force in the Community anddoes not endanger the safety of persons, domestic animals or property when properly installed and maintained andused in applications for which it was made.
In addition, this is to certify that this equipment has also been designed and manufactured, having regard to thestate of the art, to ensure complies with the Protection Requirements of EMC directive 2004/108/EC.
A Technical Documentation File is also available for review by competent authorities and will be maintained for aperiod of ten years after the date on which the equipment was last manufactured. In additional to this file,technical, installation, maintenance and application information concerning this equipment can also be found in the
Operating Manual(s) for this product or product family.
Equipment Description:

Headspace(when used with the HAPSITE Smart Portable GC/MS System)

Applicable Directives:

2006/95/EC (LVD)
2004/108/EC (General EMC)
2002/95/EC (RoHS)

Applicable Standards:
Safety:EN 61010-1:2001

Emissions:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (Radiated & Conducted Emissions)Class A: Emissions per Table 3(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

Immunity:

EN 61326-1:1997/A1: 1998/A2: 2001 (General EMC)Class A: Immunity per Table A.1(EMC – Measurement, Control & Laboratory Equipment)

RoHS:

Due to the classification of this product it is currently exempt from the RoHS
directive.

CE Implementation Date:

October 2004

Authorized Representative:

Duane H. WrightOperations Quality Manager, ISS
INFICON Inc.

ANY QUESTIONS RELATIVE TO THIS DECLARATION OR TO THE SAFETY OF INFICON'S PRODUCTS SHOULD BE DIRECTED, IN
WRITING, TO THE VICE-PRESIDENT OF OPERATIONS AT THE ABOVE ADDRESS.
Revised 11/04/08 (Rev B)

Warranty
WARRANTY AND LIABILITY - LIMITATION: Seller warrants the products
manufactured by it, or by an affiliated company and sold by it, and described on
the reverse hereof, to be, for the period of warranty coverage specified below, freefrom defects of materials or workmanship under normal proper use and service.
The period of warranty coverage is specified for the respective products in therespective Seller instruction manuals for those products but shall not be less thantwo (2) years from the date of shipment thereof by Seller. Seller's liability under
this warranty is limited to such of the above products or parts thereof as are
returned, transportation prepaid, to Seller's plant, not later than thirty (30) days
after the expiration of the period of warranty coverage in respect thereof and arefound by Seller's examination to have failed to function properly because of
defective workmanship or materials and not because of improper installation or
misuse and is limited to, at Seller's election, either (a) repairing and returning the
product or part thereof, or (b) furnishing a replacement product or part thereof,transportation prepaid by Seller in either case. In the event Buyer discovers or
learns that a product does not conform to warranty, Buyer shall immediately notify
Seller in writing of such non-conformity, specifying in reasonable detail the natureof such non-conformity. If Seller is not provided with such written notification,
Seller shall not be liable for any further damages which could have been avoided if
Seller had been provided with immediate written notification.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AS BUYER'S
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCTS TO BE SOLDHEREUNDER. All other obligations and liabilities of Seller, whether in contract or
tort (including negligence) or otherwise, are expressly EXCLUDED. In no event
shall Seller be liable for any costs, expenses or damages, whether direct orindirect, special, incidental, consequential, or other, on any claim of any defective
product, in excess of the price paid by Buyer for the product plus returntransportation charges prepaid.
No warranty is made by Seller of any Seller product which has been installed,
used or operated contrary to Seller's written instruction manual or which has been
subjected to misuse, negligence or accident or has been repaired or altered byanyone other than Seller or which has been used in a manner or for a purpose forwhich the Seller product was not designed nor against any defects due to plans or
instructions supplied to Seller by or for Buyer.
This manual is intended for private use by INFICON® Inc. and its customers.
Contact INFICON before reproducing its contents.
NOTE: These instructions do not provide for every contingency that may arise inconnection with the installation, operation or maintenance of this equipment.
Should you require further assistance, please contact INFICON.

www. inficon.com

re achus@inficon.com

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Definition ofNote, Hint, Danger, Warning and Caution Paragraphs
NOTE: This is a note paragraph. Notes provide additional information about thecurrent topic.
HINT: This is a hint paragraph. Hints provide insight into product usage

DANGER
This is a Danger paragraph. Failure to heed thesemessages has a high likelihood of resulting in serious
personal injury or even death!

WARNING
This is a Warning paragraph. It warns of actions that may
cause physical injury.

WARNING - Risk Of Electric ShockIPN 074-472-P1C

This Warning paragraph warns of the presence ofelectrical voltages which may cause physical injury.

CAUTION
This is a Caution paragraph. It cautions against actions
which may damage the instrument or lead to the loss ofdata.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Operating Manual Style Conventions
The following information describes the conventions used throughout this manual.
When holding down a key and then pressing another key, this is expressed as (forexample) Press Ctrl+C
It is assumed that the hard drive used is drive c. If using another drive, substitutethe hard drive letter being used for “c:”.
Left-click means to press and release the left mouse button (LMB) and right-clickmeans to press and release the right mouse button (RMB).

IPN 074-472-P1C

The HAPSITE software operates in the Windows environment using the Windows®
Graphical User Interface (GUI). Actions in the HAPSITE software GUI that arecommon to the Windows GUI are not explained in detail in this manual. Refer tothe Windows documentation supplied by Microsoft®.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Table Of Contents
Trademarks
Definition of Note, Hint, Danger, Warning and Caution Paragraphs
Operating Manual Style Conventions
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.4.1
1.6.4.2
1.6.4.3
1.6.4.4
1.6.5

The HAPSITE Smart Plus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Instrument Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Description Of Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gas Chromatograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Membrane Isolation Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Mass Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Electronic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mass Spectrometer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Gas Chromatograph Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Main Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Software Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

IPN 074-472-P1C

Chapter 2
HAPSITE Components and Assemblies
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.3.1
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.6.1

Ship Kit Packing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Ship Kits Box 3 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Basic Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Attaching the Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Remove Exhaust (Vent) Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Installing the Gas Canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
How to Change or Remove a Gas Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Install Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Connect the AC To DC Power Converter Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Connect Laptop (if desired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Connect Laptop with Yellow Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

TOC - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

TOC - 2Connect Laptop with Wireless Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Helpful Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
HAPSITE Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Headspace Sampling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Headspace Sampling System - Components Received. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Installing the Headspace Sampling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Service Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Setting Up the Service Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Placing the HAPSITE on the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Detaching the HAPSITE from the Service Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Sample Collection Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Installing the Sample Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Removing the Sample Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Installing the Tri-Bed or Tenax Concentrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Removing the Concentrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Probe Sampling Options and Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Probe Nut Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Attaching a Bag Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
VX / R-33 Conversion Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
VX / R-33 Conversion Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
VX / R-33 Conversion Tube Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
How to Remove a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Battery Charger Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Battery Charger Connections and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Loading the Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Understanding the Battery Charger Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Portable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
HAPSITE Backpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Adjustment of the Backpack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Care of the Backpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Hot Swap Cable (IPN 930-246-G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Connecting the Hot Swap Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Storing the Hot Swap Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Use as an Additional Battery Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

IPN 074-472-P1C

2.4.6.2
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.9
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.22.10.32.10.42.11
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.32.11.3.1
2.11.3.2
2.12
2.12.12.12.22.12.2.1
2.12.2.2
2.12.2.3
2.12.2.4
2.13
2.13.12.13.22.13.2.1
2.13.2.2
2.14
2.14.12.14.22.14.3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 3

IPN 074-472-P1C

Operating HAPSITE in Portable Mode
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
3.1.2.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.6
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.1.3
3.7.1.4
3.7.1.4.1
3.7.1.4.2
3.7.1.4.3
3.7.1.5
3.7.1.5.1
3.7.1.6
3.7.1.7
3.7.1.7.1
3.7.1.7.2
3.7.1.7.3
3.7.1.7.4

Starting the HAPSITE in Portable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Emergency Mode (EMER MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Concentrator Options (CONC OPTIONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Concentrator Cleanout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Skip Cleanout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Concentrator Cleanout Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Quick Reference SOP — Heat-up and Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon. . . . . . . . 3-13
Changing the Default Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Show All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Survey Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Quick Reference SOP — Survey Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
ANALYZE (GC/MS) Mode with the Concentrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
The Tri- Bed Concentrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
The Tenax Concentrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Procedure for Running Concentrator Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Quick Reference SOP—Concentrator Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Detecting Hazardous Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
View Results/View Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
The Help Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
The Info Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Battery Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Carrier Gas Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Internal Standard Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
HEATERS Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
HEATERS Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
NEG Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
CONC Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
TUNE STATUS Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
TUNE REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GPS Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
HAPSITE SYSTEM Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
HAPS Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
FIRMWARE Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
DATE TIME Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
NET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

TOC - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.2
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.1.1
3.9
3.9.1
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
EXIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Extended Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
End Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Headspace Sampling System
in Portable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Quick Reference SOP —GC/MS Mode with HSS in Portable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Procedure for SituProbe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Quick Reference SOP —GC/MS Mode with SituProbe in Portable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

Chapter 4
Wireless and Touch Screen Options

TOC - 4

Wireless Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Regulatory Compliance Information for UNITED STATES Users . . . . . . . . 4-1
FCC Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
FCC RF Exposure Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Regulatory Compliance Information for CANADIAN Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Industry Canada (IC) Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Regulatory Compliance Information for EUROPEAN Users . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
European Usage Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
European EMC Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
European Safety Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wireless Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Turning On the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Establishing Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Setting the User Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Setting Up Plus IQ for Communication with the HAPSITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Wireless Module Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Turning Off the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
The MAIN Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Smart Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Adjust Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Touch Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Calibrating The Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Enabling/ Disabling the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Disabling the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Enabling the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

IPN 074-472-P1C

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
4.1.4
4.1.4.1
4.1.4.2
4.1.4.3
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.7.1
4.1.7.2
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4

The USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Copying Files to the USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Copying Files From the USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Updating the Front Panel Software from the USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Retrieving Files from the USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Chapter 5
Operating HAPSITE in Laptop Mode
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
5.6.1
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2

Starting the HAPSITE in Laptop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Survey Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Quick Reference SOP — Running Survey Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Selecting a New Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Quick Reference SOP — Running Analyze (GC/MS) Loop Method . . . . . 5-14
Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Concentrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Tri- Bed Concentrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
The Tenax Concentrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Quick Reference SOP — Tri-Bed Concentrator Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Headspace Sampling System . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Quick Reference SOP — GC/MS Mode with HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
SituProbe Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Procedure for SituProbe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Quick Reference SOP — Analyze Mode with SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Chapter 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

Methods
6.1
6.1.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.1.1
6.2.1.2
6.3
6.3.1

Introduction to Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Survey Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Building a Survey Method Library File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Creating Survey Methods for Target Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Building a Survey Target Compound Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Analyze (GC/MS) Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Building an Analyze (GC/MS) Method andTarget Compound Library File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Chapter 7
Tune
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.3

Introduction to AutoTune and Manual Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
AutoTune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Starting AutoTune from the Manual Tune Screenon the Laptop Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Viewing a Tune Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

TOC - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
7.5.3
7.5.3.1
7.5.4
7.5.4.1
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.8
7.5.8.1
7.5.8.2
7.5.8.3
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3

AutoTune Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Manual Tune Settings and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Tune Drop Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Tune Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Tune Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Tune Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Peak Scan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Peak Scan Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Full Scan Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Tune and Mass Calibration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Mass Calibration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Right Mouse Button (RMB) Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
RMB in Scan Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
RMB in Tune Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
RMB on Y Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Performing Manual Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Adjusting Base Peak Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Adjusting Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Adjusting the Ion Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Chapter 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.4
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.7
8.8
8.9
TOC - 6

The HAPSITE Software - Plus IQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Computer System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Installing and Updating the HAPSITE Smart Plusand Plus IQ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Updating the HAPSITE Smart Plus Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Installing/Updating NIST and AMDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Reloading Default HAPSITE Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Locating Default Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Loading a Default Method to the HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Establishing Communications between the HAPSITE and
Laptop Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Setting Up Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Configuring the HAPSITE for Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Establishing Communication with the Service Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Establishing Communications between the HAPSITE and
Laptop Computer Using the Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Setting the HAPSITE Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

IPN 074-472-P1C

Plus IQ SoftwareHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.9.1
8.9.2
8.10
8.10.18.10.1.1
8.10.1.2
8.10.1.3
8.10.1.4
8.10.1.5
8.10.1.6
8.10.1.7
8.11
8.12

Changing Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Setting or Changing the Access Level Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Plus IQ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
System Setup Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Window Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Software Versions for the HAPSITE and Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
HAPSITE Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Chapter 9

IPN 074-472-P1C

Data Review
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.2.1
9.5.2.2
9.5.2.3
9.5.3
9.5.3.1
9.5.3.2
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.7
9.7.1
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3

Introduction to Data Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Accessing the Data Review Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Review Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
RMB (Right Mouse Button) Menus within Data Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
RMB in the TIC/RIC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
RMB in the Spectrum Display Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
The TIC/RIC Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
How to Access the Scan Cursor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
How to Use Background Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Steps Required to Perform a One Point Background Subtraction . . . . . . . 9-12
Background Subtraction Using a Range of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Additional Features of the Background Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Utilizing the Range Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Steps Required to Range Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Additional Features of the Range Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Using the Zoom Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Using the Zoom Function in the TIC/RIC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Using The Zoom Spectrum Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Displaying Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms (RIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
RIC Plot to Locate Specific Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
NIST Library Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Searching Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Analyzing Data Using AMDIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
How To Access AMDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

TOC - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.8.3.1
9.8.4
9.8.5
9.9
9.9.1
9.10

Accessing NIST from AMDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Analyzing Data Using NIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
How to Grab Spectra/Utilize the Full NIST Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Reporting and Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Method Generated Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Plus IQ Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Chapter 10
Saving and Managing Files
10.1
10.1.110.1.210.1.310.1.410.1.510.2
10.2.110.2.210.2.310.2.410.2.5
10.3

Saving Files on the HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Method Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Event Log Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Tune Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Data Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Saving Files to the Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Method Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Event Log Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Tune Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Report Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Transferring Files Between the HAPSITE and Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Chapter 11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.5
11.5.1
11.5.2
11.5.311.5.411.5.511.5.611.5.7

TOC - 8The Method Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Accessing Method Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Description Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Full Scan Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
SIM Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Startup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Headspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Inlet Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Inlet States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
GC Temperature Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Use Internal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Scan Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Concentrator Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Headspace Flow Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
SituProbe Flow Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25

IPN 074-472-P1C

Method Editor

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.6
11.6.1
11.6.2
11.7
11.8
11.8.1
11.8.211.9
11.9.1
11.9.2
11.10
11.11
11.12
11.12.1
11.13

Tune Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Param Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Full Scan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
SIM Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
SIM for Analyze (GC/MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
SIM for Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Search Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Setting Up a Qualitative Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Setting Up a Quantitative Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Data Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Summary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
How to Create a Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
Creating a New Custom Method from an Existing Method. . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
How to Sequence Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53

Chapter 12

IPN 074-472-P1C

Target Compound Methods
12.1
12.2
12.2.112.2.212.2.312.2.412.2.512.2.612.2.712.3
12.3.112.3.212.3.312.3.412.3.512.3.612.3.7
12.4
12.5
12.6

Introduction To Quantitative Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Definition of Terms in the Calibrate Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Peak Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Analytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Extracted Mass Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Definition of Terms in the ID Unknowns Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Peak Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Analytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Extracted Mass Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Using the Calibrate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Using the ID Unknown Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

TOC - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 13
Headspace Sampling System
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
How the HSS Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
HSS Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Consumables Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Connecting the HSS to the HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Providing Power to the HSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
If AC Power is Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
If AC Power is Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Using the HAPSITE with HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Powering on the HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Loading the Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Loading the Wells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Cycling the Vials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Making the Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Maintenance of HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Clean Out after a High Concentration Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Purge Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Cleaning Up a High Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Flush Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Cleaning the HSS Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Decontaminating the HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Replacing The HSS Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Replacing The HSS Nitrogen Canister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Shipping the HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Charging the HAPSITE Battery using the HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Chapter 14
SituProbe
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.5.1
14.6
14.7
14.7.1

TOC - 10

SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Compressed Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Heated Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Valves and Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Headspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

13.1
13.1.113.1.213.1.313.1.413.1.513.1.613.1.6.1
13.1.6.2
13.2
13.2.113.2.213.2.313.2.413.2.513.3
13.3.113.3.1.1
13.3.213.3.2.1
13.3.313.3.413.3.513.3.613.4
13.5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.7.214.7.314.8
14.8.1
14.8.214.8.314.9
14.9.1
14.9.214.9.2.1
14.9.2.2
14.9.2.3
14.10
14.10.1
14.10.1.1
14.10.1.2
14.10.2
14.11
14.11.1
14.11.2
14.11.3
14.12
14.13
14.13.1

Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Dry Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
SituProbe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Headspace Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Purge Rate Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Method Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Background Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Cleanup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Probe Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
SituProbe FLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Reducing Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Sampling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Expected Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Nitrogen Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Calibration Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Standard Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Calibration Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Surface Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14

Chapter 15
IPN 074-472-P1C

Service Module
15.1
15.2
15.2.115.2.215.3
15.3.1
15.3.215.3.315.3.415.3.515.3.615.3.715.3.8Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Service Module Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Service Module 110/220 V(ac) Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Service Module 24 V(dc) Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Components of the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Backup Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
MDP/Turbo Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Manifold Vent Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Foreline Vent Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Roughing Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Vacuum Interconnect Valve Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

TOC - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.3.915.4
15.5
15.5.1
15.6
15.7
15.7.1
15.7.215.8
15.8.1
15.8.2
15.9
15.10
15.11

Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
When to Use the Service Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Plus IQ Software for the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
The Service Module Tab in Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Starting Up HAPSITE on the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module using thePlus IQ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module using the
HAPSITE Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Detaching the HAPSITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Using Plus IQ Software to Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Using the Front Panel Display to Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Physically Removing the HAPSITE from the Service Module . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Storing the Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
When Power to the Service Module is Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23

Chapter 16
Maintenance

TOC - 12Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
HAPSITE Symptom - Cause - Remedy Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Required Environment for General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Contamination of the Mass Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Contamination of the Gas Chromatograph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Contamination of the Probe and Probe Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Decontaminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Decontaminating the Outside of the Analytical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
NEG Pump Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
NEG Pump Bakeout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Bakeout Using the Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Bakeout From Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Reactivating the NEG Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Reactivation Using the Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19

IPN 074-472-P1C

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.5.1
16.5.1.1
16.5.1.2
16.5.2
16.5.2.1
16.5.2.2
16.5.316.5.3.1
16.5.3.2
16.5.416.6
16.6.1
16.6.1.1
16.6.1.2
16.6.2
16.6.2.1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.6.2.2
16.7
16.7.1
16.7.2
16.7.316.7.416.7.516.7.616.8
16.8.1
16.9
16.10
16.10.1
16.10.2
16.10.2.1
16.10.2.2
16.10.2.3

Reactivation Using the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
NEG Pump Removal, Installation and Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Part 1: NEG Pump Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Part 2: Service Module Vacuum Interconnect (VI) Valve Cleaning . . . . . 16-26
Part 3: Install the New NEG Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Part 4: Leak Check of the Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Part 5: Activation of the NEG Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Replacing the Ionizer of the Mass Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
Replacing the Headspace Sampling System Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-47
Battery Charger Maintenance and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
Cleaning The Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
Troubleshooting The Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-50
If No Indicators are Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-50
If the Red Indicator is Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-50
If a Battery Does Not Accept a Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-50

Chapter 17
Glossary
17.1

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter 18
Customer Support
18.1
18.2

How To Contact Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Returning Your Instrument to INFICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

IPN 074-472-P1C

Chapter 19
Part Numbers
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7

HAPSITE Smart Plus System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
HAPSITE Smart Plus Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
HAPSITE Smart Plus Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
HAPSITE Smart Plus Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Headspace Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Service Module Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
HAPSITE SituProbe Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

Appendix A
HAPSITE Target Compounds
A.1

Compounds In Order Of Elution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Appendix B
Calibrating Gas Mixtures
B.1

Acquisition, Preparation, and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

TOC - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

B.1.1
B.1.1.1
B.1.1.2
B.1.2
B.1.2.1
B.1.2.2
B.1.3

How to Establish the Desired Concentrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Using Cylinders Charged with Each Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Diluting the Gas On SIte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Correct Delivery of the Mix to the Inlet of the HAPSITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Free Flow of Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Inert Sample Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Gas Cylinder Safety, Contamination Checks, and Corrective Steps . . . . . .B-6

Appendix C
Shipping the HAPSITE and Consumables
C.1
C.2
C.3

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Shipping the Canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Empty Canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

IPN 074-472-P1C

Index

TOC - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 The HAPSITE Smart Plus System
The HAPSITE® Smart Plus Portable Gas Chromatograph and Mass Spectrometer(GC/MS) is designed to measure volatile organic hazardous air pollutants atparts-per-trillion (PPT) levels, using pre-programmed sets of instructions known as"methods". By operating on battery power using self-contained Carrier Gas andInternal Standard Gas supplies, the HAPSITE Smart Plus is specifically designed
to collect and analyze samples while in the field. Results can be viewed on-site, as
they are displayed on the front panel and saved on the system’s hard drive.
Through the use of a USB drive, crossover cable or wireless connection, results
can also be downloaded to a separate Laptop (PC) for analysis.
NOTE: This manual is specifically for the HAPSITE Smart Plus. The terms"HAPSITE" and "HAPSITE Smart Plus" are used throughout this manual
to refer to the HAPSITE Smart Plus.
Several hardware modules comprise the HAPSITE Smart Plus system:

IPN 074-472-P1C

HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Often referred to as the Analytical Module(AM). The AM contains the Gas
Chromatograph, Mass Spectrometer,
cylinders of Carrier Gas and InternalStandard Gas, High-vacuum Chemical Pump
(for portable operation), control electronics,
Battery, Keypad, Display, and a Battery
Charger.
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Also known as the Hand Control Unit, thisconsists of a hand piece and a heated inlet
line. The hand piece contains a small display
and buttons. The inlet line connects to the
HAPSITE and provides a flexible heatedsample flow path to the HAPSITE.
Service Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Also known as the SM, the Service Module
contains the turbo-molecular high-vacuum
pump, the roughing pump, the mechanism
for operating the interconnecting valve, abattery-charger and a power supply.

1-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Headspace Sampling System . . . Also known as the HSS, the HSS is anaccessory to the HAPSITE that allows testingfor volatile compounds in solids and liquids,
including soil and water.
SituProbe™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The SituProbe accessory is a water purging
device that provides continuous testing ofwater samples in the field.

1.2 Performance Specifications
The performance specifications for the HAPSITE are shown below:
Mass range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-300 AMU
Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as much as 1000 AMU/sec @10 points per AMU
Ionization Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 eV electron impact
Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 l/sec NEG pump;
0.2 l/sec sputter-ion pump
Operating temperature range . . . . . . . . . . 0oC to 45oC (32oF to 113oF)
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions (LxWxH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 x 43 x 18 (cm); 18 x 17x 7 (in)Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Kg (35 lb) without the battery
Internal Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . 30 watts average, 24 V(dc)Carrier Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nitrogen

Maximum Sample Moisture Content. . . . . 8% by weight
pH Range of Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Boiling Point of Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <250oC
Chemical Composition of Sample . . . . . . 1 - 12 Carbon atoms
GC Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% methyl silicone phase,
30 m x 0.32 mm ID x 1.0  film
SIM Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10External Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Port, Wireless
Carrier Gas Use-Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 canister per 8 hours of operation(This depends on the details of themethod being used.)

1-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Column Temperature Range . . . . . . . . . . 60oC to 180oC

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Internal Standards Gas Use-Rate . . . . . . . 1 canister per 24 hours of operation(This depends on the details of themethod being used.)Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approximately 2 to 3 hours.

1.3 Serial Number Location
The serial number of the HAPSITE is located on the inside of the front panel andon the touchscreen. Touch the HAPSITE icon, followed by the HAPSITE System
icon, and then touch HAPS to locate it.

1.4 Theory of Operation

IPN 074-472-P1C

The HAPSITE combines two analytical techniques, Gas Chromatography and
Mass Spectrometry, to separate, identify, and measure the organic components ina gas phase sample. Using a flow of inert Nitrogen Carrier Gas, the Gas
Chromatograph (GC) performs a time separation (Retention Time) of the sample
compounds. The separation order is primarily based on increasing compoundboiling point. The Mass Spectrometer (MS) detects and identifies the eluting
compounds by breaking the molecules apart and detecting the fragments. The
resulting mass spectrum is compared to a library of mass spectra to identify thecompound.
The Gas Chromatography technique cannot always separate compound mixtures
into individually eluting compounds. Some of the eluting responses or peaks may
contain two, three, or more compounds which have taken the same time toprogress (elute) through the Gas Chromatograph. GC identification of compounds
is limited to matching the retention time of the unknown compound to that of aknown standard. See section 1.6.1, Gas Chromatograph, on page 1-5 for more
information on how the GC works. In order to further identify and measure theindividual components of such mixtures, the gas stream is directed into the Mass
Spectrometer.
In the Mass Spectrometer, the gas stream of eluting compounds is bombarded withelectrons. The electrons fracture the molecules into a characteristic combination ofsmaller molecules or mass fragments. The Mass Spectrometer (MS) measuresand plots the response of these mass fragments to display a mass spectrum. See
section 1.6.2, Mass Spectrometer, on page 1-7 for more information on how the
MS works.
The introduction of a mixture of many compounds directly to the MS would producea very complex and uncharacteristic mass spectrum. However, because the GC
has largely separated the gases, the MS can usually differentiate between the few
co-eluting compounds. This differentiation provides very precise identification andmeasurement of the quantity of each compound. Qualitative identification can bemade by comparing the unknown compound spectrum to the NIST mass spectral

1-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

library (included with the Plus IQ software). See section 9.8, NIST Library
Searches, on page 9-24 for more information. Quantitative identifications can bemade by analyzing standards of known concentration and creating a target
compound library of concentration response curves. See Chapter 12, Target
Compound Methods for more information.
In summary, the GC first separates the gaseous compounds by time. Then the MS
identifies and measures the gases contained in each of the time-separated peaks.
This enables the GC/MS system to report the specific identity and concentration ofeach of the compounds present in the initial pulse of gas analyzed.

1.5 Instrument Overview
The HAPSITE system is comprised of two modules:the HAPSITE, also known as the Analytical Module, and

the Service Module.

The HAPSITE is comprised of many systems and subsystems. Figure 1-1 showsa diagram of the major subsystems. These subsystems include the several pumps
used to provide flow and vacuum.
The Service Module components are identified in Figure 1-1, everything else ishoused in the HAPSITE. The Service Module and the HAPSITE module contain a
Vacuum Interconnect Valve and electrical connectors through which their vacuum
systems join. The modules communicate when the two modules are coupled
together.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 1-1 Major HAPSITE Subsystems

1-4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1.6 Description Of Subsystems
The HAPSITE is comprised of the following subsystems:

Gas Chromatograph

Mass SpectrometerVacuum SystemElectronic Systems

Software Systems

1.6.1 Gas Chromatograph
The HAPSITE’s GC system utilizes Nitrogen as the Carrier Gas to transport
analytes through a column, a narrow-bore fused silica tube 30 meters in length,
and then on to the detector. The Nitrogen is referred to as the mobile phase.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The inside of the column is coated with a thin layer of a material known as thestationary phase. The stationary phase is a chemical which can selectively attract
components in a sample mixture. The mixture of sample compounds in the mobile
phase interact with the chemicals of the stationary phase. The chemicals whichhave the fastest interactions will elute (exit) off the column first. The HAPSITE alsoutilizes a temperature programmable GC. The oven is programmed to increase thetemperature gradually (called ramping) to improve compound separation while
decreasing analysis time. As the temperature increases, the compounds with thelowest boiling points will elute first with the standard non-polar phase coatedcolumn installed. More selective columns may be ordered for specific applications.
The time taken by an individual compound to travel from injection into the system
until the compound elutes from the column is referred to as the Retention Time
(RT). If the GC conditions remain constant, the same compound will elute from thecolumn at nearly the same retention time for each injection.
An important part of the operation of the HAPSITE is the use of Internal Standards.
They verify the performance of the Gas Chromatograph, as well as, the tuning andsensitivity of the mass spectrometer. The Internal Standards are two volatileorganic gases at low concentrations which are added to the sample inlet flow. The
Internal Standards’ Retention Times and responses are used as references for
instrument performance.
Figure 1-2 is a graph of eluting organic gases from the Gas Chromatograph that isplotted as a function of time from the injection of a pulse of mixed compounds. The
graph demonstrates the separation of the various compounds from each other by
the action of the Gas Chromatograph, as described above. This plot is called a
Total Ion Chromatogram (TIC).

1-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 1-2 Total Ion Chromatogram

The performance of the column is affected by temperature, therefore, the column
is housed in a temperature controlled oven.
The gas chromatograph performs many operational functions, including injecting
the sample, analyzing the sample, flushing the system, and tuning the system.

When the analytes have passed through the pre-column, the Carrier Gas is
directed to the junction of the two columns where the Carrier Gas continues totransport the analytes through the analytical column while back-flushing thepre-column to prepare the pre-column for the next analysis sequence. Thisback-flush continues throughout the next filling of the Sample Loop.
1.6.1.1 Membrane Isolation ValveGas exiting the analytical column crosses the face of a membrane mounted in themembrane isolation valve. This membrane has the special characteristic oftransmitting the flow of organic compounds to the Mass Spectrometer, while
effectively blocking the flow of inorganic gases (such as the Nitrogen Carrier Gas).
When the membrane isolation valve is opened, the appropriate gases are
permitted to enter the Mass Spectrometer for analysis while the Mass
Spectrometer remains under vacuum. The membrane’s performance is affected bytemperature fluctuations and requires housing in a temperature-controlled zone.

1-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

GC/MS measurement begins with the Sample Pump drawing the gas to beanalyzed into the Sample Loop. It then uses the pressure of the Carrier Gas to flush
the sample from the Sample Loop on to the pre-column and the analytical column.
This step is termed injection.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

In the Survey mode of operation, in which air samples are passed directly to themass spectrometer, the sample pump draws the air sample directly across themembrane with the isolation valve in the open position.

1.6.2 Mass Spectrometer
The Mass Spectrometer is comprised of three basic physical systems: the Ionizer,
the Mass Selector, and the Ion Detector. These are mounted together in a vacuum
manifold which also includes an inlet, two vacuum pumps, and a portion of the
Vacuum Interconnect Valve, as shown in Figure 1-1 on page 1-4. Figure 1-3 is a
representation of the three sub-systems of the mass spectrometer.
Figure 1-3 Three Subsystems of the Mass Spectrometer

IPN 074-472-P1C

The inlet flow from the membrane isolation valve is brought directly to the Ionizer.
Within the ionizer, the component introduced from the inlet flow is subjected to abombardment of electrons which are boiled off the hot filament. Collisions with theenergetic electrons remove one electron from some of the gas molecules, leaving
them with a net positive charge. This process is termed ionization. Other gas
molecules are fractured into smaller molecules, some of which are also ionized.
The remaining stream of gas continues out the far side of the ion volume and ispumped away by the vacuum pump system.
The ionized molecules, or ions, are driven from the ionizer toward the mass
selector by the different voltages on the ion volume and the focusing plates. As theions move through the holes in these plates, the ions are formed into a nearlyparallel beam of mixed ions of nearly the same energy.
The Mass Selector (or mass filter) is a quadrupole analyzer. The quadrupole
analyzer is comprised of four parallel rods, mounted with precise alignment andspacing. Opposite rods are electrically connected together. The two pairs of rods
are connected to a radio frequency (RF) voltage 180o out of phase with each other.
In addition, the two pairs of rods have a direct current (DC) voltage applied to them;positive on one pair, negative on the other.
The Ion Beam is directed down the center of the array of rods. At any specificcombination of RF and DC fields, some ions are light enough to oscillate
harmonically with the RF field. This oscillation causes them to pick up energy andincrease speed until the ions impact one of the rods and are neutralized. The DC
field acts upon the heavier ions resulting in their movement from the center towards

1-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

the rods. Once on the rod, the heavier ion is neutralized. At a specific combinationof RF and DC fields, ions of a specific mass will be able to transit the rod structureand emerge at the exit end to be detected.
When the ions emerge from the Mass Selector, the ions are directed to thedetector. The active element of the detector is an Electron Multiplier. The Electron
Multiplier responds to the arrival of each individual ion with a cascade of electrons,each of which generates more electrons. The result is a small burst of electricalcurrent in response to each ion emerging from the mass selector. The signal fromthe electron multiplier is connected to the electronic amplifier and data-handlingsystem outside the vacuum.
In order to determine the constituents of the gas mixture, the ratio of RF to DC fieldstrengths is varied (swept) to permit progressively heavier ions to transit the mass
selector. The sweep, or scan, over the full range of masses (from 1 to 300 AMU)
only takes about 100 milliseconds; the sweep is usually repeated many times tostatistically improve the quality of the data. This produces the mass spectrum, aplot of the partial pressure (or population or intensity or amplitude) of each mass.
The mass spectrum is compared with a library of mass spectra characteristic ofmany individual compounds, and the HAPSITE reports the compounds whichmatch the observed spectrum.
Alternatively, the Mass Spectrometer can remain tuned to a specific mass or set of
masses. The instrument measures the partial pressure of only those masses as afunction of time. Operation in this mode, termed selected ion monitoring (SIM),
permits very sensitive measurement of the presence of one or a few compounds
which have already been identified.

1.6.3 Vacuum SystemThe ions must travel nearly a foot from the ionizer through the quadrupole to
the Electron Multiplier without colliding with another molecule. (A collision
would modify their trajectory, and possibly their charge.)The gas to be analyzed must be free from interference from other unknown
gases.

The hot filament which generates the electrons would be destroyed if operated
at atmospheric pressure in the presence of oxygen.

The vacuum is initially provided by the Turbo-Molecular and Diaphragm Pumps in
the Service Module. When a good vacuum level is achieved and the pumps in the
HAPSITE are turned on, the Vacuum Interconnect Valve is closed. At this point, theService Module can be disconnected. The Service Module is not needed again
until the NEG Pump in the HAPSITE must be changed.

1-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Mass Spectrometer is operated in a vacuum for several reasons.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The two vacuum pumps of the HAPSITE continue to provide the pumping
necessary for operation. These two pumps are the non-evaporate getter (NEG)
Pump and the smaller Sputter-ion Pump. The NEG Pump incorporates a special
zirconium alloy, arranged in sintered disks, which when heated adsorb gas
molecules very aggressively.
Over time, the sintered disks gradually become fully saturated with gas molecules
and the pumping speed drops. The instrument detects the resultant rise inoperating pressure (loss of vacuum) and the software signals that the pump must
be replaced.
The NEG Pump is very effective in removing the active gases, but the NEG Pump
does not remove noble gases. The sputter-ion pump is provided to remove argon,
neon, helium, krypton, and xenon which would otherwise accumulate in the mass
spectrometer. The accumulation would raise the mass spectrometer pressure andinterfere with operation.
The Turbo Molecular Pump in the Service Module is actually a compound pump,incorporating turbo molecular stages for high pumping speeds at low pressure, andmolecular drag stages to provide good compression of the gas at higher pressures.
Even with the drag stages, this pump is unable to compress the gas enough toexhaust the gas into atmospheric pressure. An additional Diaphragm Roughing
Pump is provided.
The Diaphragm Pump consists of four stages, in series. The Diaphragm Pump
draws the gas from the exhaust of the compound pump and compresses theexhaust gas sufficiently to discharge the exhaust into the atmosphere.

1.6.4 Electronic Systems

IPN 074-472-P1C

The electronic systems in the HAPSITE are considered in four groups:


Mass Spectrometer Control



Gas Chromatograph Control



Main ProcessorInterfaces

1.6.4.1 Mass Spectrometer Control
The Mass Spectrometer control electronics include the programmable DC and RF
power supplies for the Mass Selector, the DC power supplies for the filament, theElectron Multiplier, the Sputter-ion Pump, and the A/D converter for the signal fromthe Electron Multiplier.

1-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1.6.4.2 Gas Chromatograph Control
The Gas Chromatograph control circuitry includes the power supplies for thesolenoid valves, the ovens and the heated inlet line. It also contains the control
logic for all the valves and heaters of the GC system.
1.6.4.3 Main Processor
The main processor is supported by solid state memory and is located in the central
electronics assembly. The main processor accepts data from many points within
the system. It controls all the other electronic sub-assemblies, both in routine
operation and in managing the data-taking methods.
1.6.4.4 Interfaces
There are several input/output devices within the HAPSITE. These include the front
panel touchscreen, keypad and display, the USB drive, the crossover cableconnection, the wireless connection, the hand control unit, the power and logic
connections to the Service Module, Headspace Sampling System, SituProbe andthe pins which read the details of the gas mixture from the gas canisters.

1.6.5 Software Systems

The HAPSITE Application software, Plus IQ, is a Windows® XP and Windows®
2000 based system for use in the accessory Laptop. The Plus IQ software is used
to design and modify the methods under which the HAPSITE can operate, view thedata, analyze the results, and generate and print reports. The Laptop is linked to
the HAPSITE by a crossover cable or wireless connection, which permits
uploading of data from the HAPSITE and downloading new or modified methods tothe HAPSITE.

1 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

The HAPSITE operates with two separate software systems. The instrument itself
incorporates control and analysis software. This control software accepts inputs
from the touchscreen, keypad, and other interfaces, and commands the operationand sequencing of all the systems and subsystems. The analysis software
analyzes the data from the mass spectrometer, accesses the libraries as required,and displays the results of the analyses on the front panel. The control software
allows a method to be started with minor modifications from the front panel. Design
or substantive modifications of the method require the use of the HAPSITE
Application software on an external PC.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 2
HAPSITE Components and Assemblies
2.1 Ship Kit Packing Lists
2.2 930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Contents
The following items are provided in a typical HAPSITE Smart Plus 930-850-G9,
G12 Ship Kit.
Figure 2-1 930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Contents Box 1 Contents

Box 1 Contents
 . 036-0015 . . . . . Shoulder Strap
 . 074-290 . . . . . . Instruction Sheet(Shoulder Strap)
 . 059-0329 . . . . . Quick Disconnect Stem . 070-0972 . . . . . Plunger Contact (Bag of 4)
 . 074-490-P1 . . . . Quick Start Guide . 074-5010-G1. . . Manual CD
 . 074-5012-G1. . . Basic Front Panel Operation Training CD
 . 600-1319-P2 . . . Ethernet Cable . 930-021-G1. . . . Gasket Kit
 . 930-022-G1. . . . Tool Kit
 . 930-249-G2. . . . Concentrator Cover
IPN 074-472-P1C

 . 930-251-G1. . . . Concentrator Tube (Tenax®-TA)
 . 930-716-G1. . . . Concentrator Tube
(Tri-Bed) . 930-0221-G1. . . Concentrator Nut and Ferrule . 930-0231-G1. . . Probe Nut and Ferrule . 930-2020-G1. . . Cap Kit
 . 930-4652-P1 . . . Permanent Marker
 . 930-612-P1 . . . . USB Flash Drive
Special Cords for International Ship Kits
Extra Cords for SM and Battery Charger (Qty. 2)
Ship Kit . . . . . . . Location . . Cord
 . 930-850-G9. . . . USA . . . . . N/A
 . 930-850-G12. . . Australia . . 068-0393

2-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-2 930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Box 2 Contents

Box 2 Contents
 . . . . 930-470-G1 Battery Charger

Figure 2-3 930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Box 3 Contents

Box 3 Contents
 . . . . 24 V Power Supply (see table)
Power Supply

Ship Kit

Usage930-469-P1

930-850-G9

110 V USA930-469-G3

930-850-G12

230 V UK

Figure 2-4 930-850-G9, G12 Ship Kit Box 4 and 5 Contents

. . . . . In two separate boxes,
Battery Pack NiMH (930-4061-G1)

2-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Box 4 and 5 Contents

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.3 930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Contents
The following items are provided in a typical HAPSITE Smart Plus 930-850-G10,
G11 Ship Kit. See Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-5 930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Box 1 Contents

Box 1 Contents
. . 036-0015 . . . . . Shoulder Strap
. . 074-290 . . . . . . Instruction Sheet(Shoulder Strap)
. . 059-0329 . . . . . Quick Disconnect Stem
. . 070-0972 . . . . . Plunger Contact (Bag of 4)
. . 074-490-P1 . . . Quick Use Guide
. . 074-5010-G1 . . Manual CD
. . 600-1319-P2 . . Ethernet Cable
. . 930-021-G1 . . . Gasket Kit
. . 930-022-G1 . . . Tool Kit
. . 930-249-G2 . . . Concentrator Cover. . 930-251-G1 . . . Concentrator Tube (Tenax®-TA)
. . 930-716-G1 . . . Concentrator Tube
(Tri-Bed)
. . 930-0221-G1 . . Concentrator Nut and Ferrule
. . 930-0231-G1 . . Probe Nut and Ferrule
. . 930-2020-G1 . . Cap Kit
. . 930-4652-P1 . . Permanent Marker
IPN 074-472-P1C

. . 930-612-P1 . . . USB Flash Drive
Special Cords for International Ship Kits
Extra Cords for SM and Battery Charger (Qty. 2)
Ship Kit . . . . . . Location. . . Cord
. . 930-850-G10 . . Europe. . . . 068-0151
. . 930-850-G11 . . UK . . . . . . . 068-0388

2-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-6 930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Box 2 Contents

Box 2 Contents
 . . . . 930-470-G1 Battery Charger

Figure 2-7 930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Box 3 Contents

Box 3 Contents
 . . . . 24 V Power Supply (see table)
Power Supply

Ship Kit

Usage930-469-P2

930-850-G10

230 V European

930-469-G3

930-850-G11

230 V UK

Figure 2-8 930-850-G10, G11 Ship Kit Box 4 and 5 Contents

. . . . . In two separate boxes,
Battery Pack NiMH (930-4061-G1)

2-4

IPN 074-472-P1C

Box 4 and 5 Contents

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.3.1 Ship Kits Box 3 and 4
Figure 2-9 USA 24V Power Supply (AC To DC Power Converter) - Box 3
and Battery (2 Shipped) - Boxes 4 and 5

AC to DC Power Converter

Batteries

In addition, a Laptop computer and accessories are shipped. The ship kits varydepending on the type of Laptop ordered. The Laptop kits will include the Plus IQ
Software CD and NIST Library Install CD.

2.4 Basic Assembly
CAUTIONThe HAPSITE should be operated a minimum of every 3
weeks. Recommended storage is in Extended Standby.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-10 HAPSITE Parts for Basic Assembly

The basic assembly of the HAPSITE can be accomplished in six easy steps.

2-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.1 Attaching the Probe
To attach the Probe line, plug the LEMO® connector into the port on the top of the
HAPSITE as illustrated in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Attaching the LEMO Connector on the Probe Line to the HAPSITE

HINT: Save all of the caps to cover ports in the event the instrument needs to be
decontaminated. Spare caps are provided in the Ship Kit. See Figure 2-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-12 Spare Cap Kit

2-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.2 Remove Exhaust (Vent) Cap
The red exhaust (vent) cap is located on the right side of the HAPSITE near the
back. This exhaust (vent) cap must be removed for the HAPSITE to function
properly. The HAPSITE is shipped with the cap removed. See Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Exhaust Cap Removed

CAUTION
The exhaust cap must be removed for proper HAPSITE
operation.

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNING
Samples will vent to breathing area through the exhaust.
To avoid inhalation, attach tubing and vent to a hood or
attach an activated charcoal filter if sample is hazardous.

2-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.3 Installing the Gas Canisters
CAUTION
Only open the front panel in a dry, uncontaminated area.
The gas canisters must be installed inside the front panel. Open the panel byplacing thumbs on the top of panel and pulling down. This technique avoids
damaging the sealing gasket with fingernails.
The purple banded Nitrogen (also known as Carrier Gas) canister must be inserted
into the top round opening of the HAPSITE. The yellow banded Internal Standard
canister must be inserted into the bottom round opening.
To insert the canisters, place them into the opening with the top facing into the
HAPSITE. Depress the "PUSH" lever while inserting. The canister will slide further
into the HAPSITE. Release the "PUSH" lever and remove hands from canister.
Gently pull on the cans to ensure the cans are locked into place. See Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Canister Placement

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-15 Installing A Gas Canister

Press
Lever

NOTE: The position of the gas canisters should not be interchanged. To prevent
improper placement, the Internal Standard canister has a Teflon® ring thatsurrounds the inner stem on the top of the can. Do not force the canisters
into the wrong location as this would result in contamination of the
HAPSITE.

2-8

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.3.1 How to Change or Remove a Gas Canister
Push the lever located on the right of the canister. The canister will release. (Aslight twist of the canister may be required.) Remove the canister. Refer to Figure
2-16 on page 2-9.
NOTE: The Nitrogen canister will need to be replaced after roughly 8 hours of use.
The Internal Standard canister will need to be replaced after 3 to 4 days ofcontinuous use. These numbers are guidelines and will vary.

WARNING
Do not refill the canisters. Bodily injury may result.
Canisters are designed to be disposable and may fail if
filling is attempted.

CAUTION
Closing the front panel when the canisters are notproperly installed may damage the HAPSITE and/or
canisters.
Figure 2-16 Canister Removal

IPN 074-472-P1C

Carrier Gas
Canister

Press
Lever

Internal
Standard
Canister

2-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.4 Install Battery
Insert the battery by sliding it into the rectangular opening to the left of the gas
canisters. Push firmly and listen for the battery to click into place. Once the battery
is installed, gently pull on the battery to make sure the battery is locked into place.
See Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Battery Insertion

Battery

2.4.5 Connect the AC To DC Power Converter Power Supply
The AC to DC power converter plugs into the four prong plug on the left side of the
HAPSITE (when facing the front of the HAPSITE). A red dot on the connectoraligns with the corresponding red line on the receptor of the HAPSITE (if the red
dot is not visible on the HAPSITE, the red dot on the power supply should be facing
forward.) Plug the AC to DC power converter into an outlet. See Figure 2-18.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-18 The AC To DC Power Converter Power Supply

2.4.6 Connect Laptop (if desired)
The HAPSITE Plus has two possible configurations for connecting to a Laptop
computer. The standard connection is via a crossover cable. All instruments
manufactured after December 2006 will have a wireless communication
connection option. Older instruments may also have the wireless option if awireless upgrade was installed.

2 - 10HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.4.6.1 Connect Laptop with Yellow Crossover Cable
Unscrew the cap on the port next to the probe connection. Plug in the yellow
crossover cable into this port. The opposite end plugs into the COM1 port on the
Laptop computer. Once connected, the crossover cable provides thecommunication connection between the HAPSITE and Laptop computer. See
Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-19 Crossover Connection to HAPSITE

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-20 Crossover Connection to Laptop

2.4.6.2 Connect Laptop with Wireless Connection
See Chapter 4, Wireless and Touch Screen Options for information on enabling thewireless connection.

2 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.5 Helpful Guidelines
A set of helpful guidelines to keep the HAPSITE safe and operational.

2 - 12

Ship with a battery installed.

Start up on battery power, if possible.



Draw liquid into the instrument.



Go into a potentially explosive
environment without safety checks(the HAPSITE is not intrinsically safe).



DO…


Leave a battery installed when
operating even when AC is connected.

Run a background blank once per
week or more.



Use Extended Standby instead of
Shutdown whenever possible.

Pressure wash the HAPSITE or
immerse in water.

Place appropriate caps over openings
before decontaminating.

Linearize DACS without the help of an
INFICON representative.

Sample strong acids (below pH 2) orstrong bases (above pH 11).

Use 5% or 10% bleach solution orsoap-and-water to decontaminate
according to local SOP.



Use force when assembling any
HAPSITE system components.

Only use thumbs to open the front
panel.

Modify default methods withoutchanging their name.

Attempt to reboot as a first step tocorrect operational discrepancies.

Sample for Sulfur Mustard (HD) with
the VX conversion tube installed.

Screen potentially high concentration
sample with Survey method to reduce
the risk of saturation.



Abort an Analyze (GC/MS) method
during a sample run.



Use the VX conversion tube for
identification (and quantification) of VX
and R-33.

Over-tighten concentrator tube nuts.



Block the exhaust vent on the
HAPSITE.

Use crossover cable between Laptop
and HAPSITE.



Use the NEG Pump and Service
Module pumps together.

Take a training course or refresher
training.

Use expired Internal Standard gas.

Use a LAN or Ethernet cable between
Laptop and HAPSITE.

Contact INFICON at
HAPSITE.Support@INFICON.com,
800.223.0633 for help.



Attach a bag sample without firstchecking the ferrules in the probe nut.

IPN 074-472-P1C

DON’T…

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.6 HAPSITE Configurations
There are 6 basic configurations for the HAPSITE. The first three can either be inportable mode or connected to AC power. Each configuration can be run with orwithout the Laptop computer connected.
Configuration 1 - HAPSITE with Probe and Sample Loop or Concentrator
Configuration 2 - HAPSITE with Headspace Sampling System and Sample Loopor Concentrator
Configuration 3 - HAPSITE with SituProbe and Sample Loop or Concentrator
Configuration 4 - HAPSITE mounted on Service Module with Probe and Sample
Loop or Concentrator
Configuration 5 - HAPSITE mounted on Service Module with Headspace
Sampling System and Sample Loop or Concentrator
Configuration 6 - HAPSITE mounted on Service Module with SituProbe andSample Loop or Concentrator

2.7 Headspace Sampling System
The Headspace Sampling System is an accessory used to test water and solid
samples. Samples are heated to release any VOC’s into the sample vialheadspace. The needle, which is inserted into the vial, samples the headspace.
The sample is then transferred into the HAPSITE via the transfer line.
For additional information on the Headspace Sampling System see Chapter 13,
Headspace Sampling System.

IPN 074-472-P1C

2.7.1 Headspace Sampling System - Components Received
Headspace Sampling System (HSS) — The main module includes the following:

Headspace sampling needle assembly

Heater block with four sample wells

Compartment for loading an INFICON Nitrogen Carrier Gas canisterCompartment for loading an INFICON rechargeable battery, INFICON partnumber 930-4061-G1

Swagelok® connection for use with an external supply of pressurized NitrogenPower supply connectionTransfer Line connection

2 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Transfer Line (INFICON part number 931-401-P2) — A directional heated line
which connects the HSS to the HAPSITE. The line transfers the sample from the
HSS to HAPSITE and provides communication between the two instruments. Eachend is labeled to ensure proper orientation.
Transfer Line Insulation (INFICON part number 931-405-P1) — This foam sleeve
is used as insulation for the Transfer Line. The insulation extends battery life by
reducing the energy required to heat the line. Once heated, it helps to maintain thetemperature.
Replacement Needle Kit (INFICON part number 931-402-P1)— A new needle
assembly for when the original needle is worn, plugged, or broken.
HSS Carrying Shoulder Strap (INFICON part number 036-015)— A strap whichconnects to the mounts on the sides of the HSS. It facilitates carrying the
instrument between the office and the field.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Y-Cable (INFICON part number 600-1131-P30)— A power cable to split the powerfrom the AC to DC power converter to both the HAPSITE and the HSS or
SituProbe.

2 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.7.2 Installing the Headspace Sampling System
Required Parts
The following items are needed to install the HSS:Headspace instrument

Y-cable power splitterTransfer lineCarrier Gas

Charged Battery

Procedure

1 Install a fully charged battery into the HAPSITE.
2 Unplug the AC to DC power converter power supply from the HAPSITE. See
Figure 2-21.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-21 Power Supply to HAPSITE from AC To DC Power Converter

3 Connect the single end of the Y-cable (see Figure 2-22) to the power supply
connector removed in step 2.

4 Plug one end of the Y-cable into the HAPSITE 24 V(dc) connector.
5 Plug the other end of the Y-cable into the back of the HSS. See Figure 2-22.

2 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-22 Power Supply Y-cable and Back of HSS

Y-Connector
and
24 V(dc) Supply
Cable

Plug into
HAPSITEandHSS
HSS Connection

6 Properly align the labels on the foam insulation and Transfer Line. The end of

Figure 2-23 HAPSITE End of Transfer Line2 - 16

IPN 074-472-P1C

the insulation labeled in yellow THIS END TO HAPSITE should coincide withthe end of the Transfer Line labeled in yellow THIS END TO HAPSITE. See
Figure 2-23.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 The white label THIS END TO ACCESSORY on the insulation should coincidewith the white label THIS END TO ACCESSORY on the Transfer Line. See
Figure 2-24. When alignment is correct, slide the insulation into place.
Figure 2-24 Accessory End of the Transfer Line

8 Install the Transfer Line between the HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling
System. First, disconnect the Probe from the HAPSITE. Install the LEMO
connector, which is labeled, THIS END TO HAPSITE, in the HAPSITE
connector. The opposite end labeled, THIS END TO ACCESSORY, willconnect to the rear of the Headspace Sampling System. See Figure 2-26. Make
sure the red dots on the Transfer Line connectors align with the marks on the
HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System connectors.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-25 Attaching the Transfer Line to the HAPSITE

2 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-26 This End to HAPSITE

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-27 This End to Headspace

9 Connect a pressurized Nitrogen cylinder or install a Nitrogen can into the
Headspace instrument.

WARNING
Nitrogen canisters and cylinders are under pressure.

2 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 If using the HSS in portable mode, a battery will need to be installed. Open thefront door of the HSS and insert a charged battery into the rectangular slot
below the round carrier gas slot. Make sure when inserting the battery that thelettering is right-side up to insure proper orientation. When inserted correctly, it
will click into place and remain snug. After battery has been properly installed,
disconnect the AC/DC power supply. See Figure 2-28. (For further instructions
on battery installation see section 2.4.4 on page 2-10)

CAUTION
Do not open in a contaminated area. The HSS is notsealed against moisture, debris or contamination withthe front door open.
Figure 2-28 Inserting the Battery into the HSS

IPN 074-472-P1C

2.8 Service Module
The Service Module is used to create a vacuum in the HAPSITE. It cannot be used
in a portable application.
For additional information on the Service Module, refer to Chapter 15, Service
Module.

2.8.1 Setting Up the Service Module
Required Components
RS-232 communication cable.

Power cord for Service Module.



Laptop with Plus IQ software installed.

When stored, the Service Module should have an aluminum plug placed on the top
opening. This plug is used to keep the Service Module free of moisture and debris.

2 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: The aluminum storage plug is supplied with the Service Module. See
Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 Aluminum Storage Plug on Service Module

Covering the aluminum plug is a yellow plastic cover, which aids in protecting the
opening from foreign debris. See Figure 2-30. Remove the yellow cover before
proceeding, and store it in a safe location.

The Service Module requires a power cable and a RS-232 communications cable
to allow communication with the Laptop. Figure 2-31 shows the power cableconnected at the left back corner of the Service Module.

2 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-30 Yellow Plastic Protective Cover on Service Module

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-31 Power Cable Attached at Back Left of the Service Module

The RS-232 communication cable is shown in Figure 2-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-32 RS-232 Communication Cable

To prepare the Service Module for use with the HAPSITE, the aluminum plug must
be removed. If the plug is not under vacuum, the plug can easily be removed. If
under vacuum, the plug will need to be removed using the following procedure:
NOTE: The Service Module is shipped under vacuum from the factory with thisplug in place.
Attach the RS-232 communications cable to the Service Module, as shown in
Figure 2-33.

2 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-33 RS-232 Communication Cable Attached to Back Right Side of Service Module

Attach the RS-232 cable to the Laptop computer, as shown in Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 RS-232 Communication Cable Attached to Laptop

Turn on the Laptop and open the Plus IQ program.

2 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

Turn on the Power switch for the Service Module, located at the back right cornerof the Service Module (refer to Figure 2-31).

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-35 System Setup Screen with Service Module

NOTE: If the Service Module icon does not appear, the communications may need
to be configured. See section 8.6.3, Establishing Communication with theService Module, on page 8-20, for information on how to set up a COM port
for communicating with the Service Module.
Click on the Vent icon. The dialog shown in Figure 2-36 will appear to confirm theventing of the Service Module.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-36 Vent Service Module Confirm Window

Select Yes to vent the Service Module. A window will appear counting down afifteen-second delay while the vent procedure completes. Once completed, remove
the aluminum plug.
Next, clean any debris or dust from the Viton® o-ring using a lint-free wipe withmethanol. Wipe the top of the o-ring, following the contour to clean the entire top
exposed section. Avoid pushing dust or debris into the middle opening. Cleaning
will ensure a tight seal to the HAPSITE, allowing the system to maintain vacuum.
See Figure 2-37, which shows the o-ring being cleaned.

WARNING
Wear gloves and safety glasses when handling methanol.

2 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-37 Cleaning the Service Module Rubber O-ring using a Lint-free Wipe

After cleaning the rubber o-ring, make sure there are no cuts on it. Also look for any
visible cracking of the o-ring. If the o-ring is damaged, the o-ring may need to be
replaced. Ensure the o-ring is completely seated in the grove.

2.8.2 Placing the HAPSITE on the Service Module
CAUTION
Never operate the HAPSITE on the Service Module in amoving vehicle.

NOTE: Store the yellow cover in a clean, dry place, where it will be easily
accessible for later use. This protective cover keeps dust and debris out of
the HAPSITE manifold connection.

CAUTION
During decontamination of the HAPSITE, the yellow
protective cover must be installed.

2 - 24

IPN 074-472-P1C

Remove the yellow plastic protective cover from the bottom of the HAPSITE. The
yellow cover is shown in Figure 2-38.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-38 Remove the Yellow Plastic Protective Cover on the Bottom of the HAPSITE

Figure 2-39 shows the yellow protective cover removed from the bottom of the
HAPSITE.
Figure 2-39 Yellow Plastic Protective Cover Removed from the Bottom of the HAPSITE

IPN 074-472-P1C

Carefully place the HAPSITE on top of the Service Module. The opening at thebottom of the HAPSITE should be placed onto the opening on the Service Module.
Attach the Service Module to the HAPSITE using the black latch at each side of theService Module. Figure 2-40 shows the right side Service Module latch.
Figure 2-40 Service Module - Showing Latch on Right Side

Figure 2-41 shows the HAPSITE attached to the Service Module using the Service
Module latches.

2 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: Black latches can be adjusted with the thumb screw to ensure propertension.
Figure 2-41 HAPSITE Attached to Service Module using Service Module Latches Left Side View

Continue by following the instructions in section 15.6, Starting Up HAPSITE on theService Module, on page 15-11.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the Service Module when theturbo pump is spinning. The Turbo Pump must be at 0 Hz
before moving or detaching the HAPSITE. Damage canresult if the HAPSITE is not properly detached.

Carefully follow the procedures starting with section 15.8, Detaching the HAPSITE,
on page 15-17 to detach the HAPSITE from the Service Module.

2 - 26

IPN 074-472-P1C

2.8.3 Detaching the HAPSITE from the Service Module

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.9 SituProbe
Use the following procedure to set up the SituProbe. For more SituProbe
information, see Chapter 14.

1 After verifying that the battery in the HAPSITE is charged, disconnect the AC
to DC HAPSITE Adapter power supply.

2 Remove the Probe.
3 Using a Y-Cable Power Splitter, connect the single connector end of the cableto the AC to DC HAPSITE Adapter. Connect one of the split ends of the cableto the left side of the HAPSITE and the other to the back of the SituProbe
accessory (IPN 932-220-G1). See Figure 2-42, Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-44.
Figure 2-42 Y- Cable for SituProbe

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-43 Plugging Y-Cable Into HAPSITE

Figure 2-44 Plugging Y-Cable Into SituProbe

4 Properly align the labels on the foam insulation and Transfer Line. The end of
the insulation labeled in yellow THIS END TO HAPSITE should coincide withthe end of the Transfer Line labeled in yellow THIS END TO HAPSITE. See
Figure 2-23.

2 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 The white label THIS END TO ACCESSORY on the insulation should coincidewith the white label THIS END TO ACCESSORY on the Transfer Line. See
Figure 2-24. When alignment is correct, slide the insulation into place.
Figure 2-45 Accessory End of the Transfer Line

6 Install the Transfer Line between the HAPSITE and the SituProbe. First,
disconnect the Probe from the HAPSITE. Install the LEMO connector, which islabeled, THIS END TO HAPSITE, in the HAPSITE connector. The opposite endlabeled, THIS END TO ACCESSORY, will connect to the rear of the SituProbe.
See Figure 2-46. Make sure the red dots on the Transfer Line connectors alignwith the marks on the HAPSITE and SituProbe connectors.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-46 Attaching the Transfer Line to the HAPSITE

2 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-47 Plugging Transfer Line Into HAPSITE and SituProbe

7 Open the front panel door of the SituProbe accessory and insert a Nitrogencanister into the canister opening.

CAUTION
Do not open in a contaminated area. The SituProbe is notsealed against moisture, debris and contamination withthe front door open.

WARNING
Nitrogen canisters and cylinders are under pressure.

8 OPTIONAL: Insert a charged battery into the SituProbe accessory battery slot.
The battery is not required when using the external AC to DC HAPSITE
Adapter.

9 Connect the Nitrogen purge and sample lines on the SituProbe purge head
(IPN 932-200-G1) onto the side of the SituProbe accessory. See Figure 2-48.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-48 Connecting Purge Head

10 Power on the SituProbe accessory by using the toggle switch located inside thefront panel door. Close the front panel door before using the SituProbe.

11 If using a purge vessel, fill the vessel with 1L of water. Place the SituProbepurge head into vessel. Sample will flow inward through the side bottom
opening and outward through the top side opening. See Figure 2-49.

2 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-49 Purge Vessel Water Flow Direction Shown

12 The purge vessel can also be used with the openings capped. In this option, fill
the vessel to the 1L mark with the water to be sampled. Place the purge head
into the vessel.

13 Alternately, place the SituProbe purge head into the water supply to sample.
NOTE: Minimum submersion depth is 5.5 inches (14 cm) and the maximum is
18 inches (45.7 cm).The depth should be measured from the bottom of
the purge head towards the electrodes.

CAUTION
Submersion greater than 18 inches (45.7 cm) could cause
liquid to enter the HAPSITE.

the purge head. Green signifies that the water level is in operating range. Red
signifies that the water level is too low. Red and green together signify that thewater level is too high. See Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 Water Level Indicator2 - 30

IPN 074-472-P1C

14 The SituProbe accessory (IPN 932-220-G1) displays water level conditions inHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.10 Sample Collection Modes
The Sample Loop is used to detect chemicals in the low ppm to high ppb
concentration range. The Concentrators are used to detect chemicals in the low
ppb to high ppt concentration range. The following procedures are used to installand remove the Sample Loop and the Concentrator.

2.10.1 Installing the Sample Loop
The Sample Loop is a hollow stainless steel tube. The sample volume isapproximately 200 µL. Black insulation covers the center of the Sample Loop. Eachend has a nut and a black, Vespel® ferrule assembly. See Figure 2-51.
Figure 2-51 Sample Loop

Procedure

1 See section 2.10.2, Removing the Sample Loop, on page 2-34 to remove thecurrently installed Sample Loop or see section 2.10.4, Removing theConcentrator, on page 2-41 to remove the Concentrator.
NOTE: There is not a specific orientation for the Sample Loop.

2 Make sure a ferrule is installed in each metal nut with the wide end of the cone
facing toward the center of the Sample Loop, as shown in Figure 2-51. The
ferrules are inserted into the threaded end of the nut.

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGThe elbow fittings may be hot. Allow for thesecomponents to cool before continuing.

3 While holding the ferrule and nut in place, insert one end of the Sample Loop
into the bottom elbow fitting.

4 Lift the top elbow fitting slightly, so that the top of the Sample Loop will fit
between the two fittings.

5 Press down on the top elbow. With your fingers, tighten the bottom nut until thenut is finger tight. See Figure 2-52.

2 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-52 Tightening the Bottom Nut

6 Continue pressing on the top elbow and tighten the top nut finger tight. See
Figure 2-53.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-53 Tightening the Top Nut

7 Using the 7/16" open end wrench supplied with the HAPSITE, tighten both the
top and bottom nut approximately 1/8-1/4 of a turn. When pressure is released
from the top fitting, the elbow should not move. When gentle upward pressure

2 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manualis applied to the top elbow, the elbow should not slip on the Sample Loop. If theelbow moves, the Loop is not properly seated. Reseat Loop and tighten slightly
more. See Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Wrench tighten

8 Snap on the black cover labeled SAMPLE LOOP. The cover will fit snugly over
the Sample Loop. See Figure 2-55.
NOTE: If the cover does not easily fit over the Sample Loop, do not force it. Checkto ensure the Loop is correctly installed with the Loop fully seated into both
elbows and the nuts properly tightened for a secure fitting.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-55 Sample Loop Cover Installed

2 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.10.2 Removing the Sample Loop
CAUTIONTo prevent contamination, only open front panel in a dry,
uncontaminated area.

1 Open the front panel of the HAPSITE and remove the black cover labeled
SAMPLE LOOP.

WARNINGThe elbow fittings, nuts and Sample Loop may be hot.
Allow for these components to cool before continuing.

2 Using the 7/16" open end wrench suppled by INFICON, loosen the nuts on the
top and bottom of the Sample Loop until it becomes free.

3 Remove the Sample Loop, being careful not to lose the ferrules on the top andbottom. Store the Sample Loop in a safe place for future use.

2.10.3 Installing the Tri-Bed or Tenax Concentrator
CAUTION

1 Refer to section 2.10.2, Removing the Sample Loop, on page 2-34 to remove
the Sample Loop or see section 2.10.4, Removing the Concentrator, on page2-41 to remove the currently installed concentrator.

2 Remove the Concentrator from the storage vial and unwrap. Make sure a
Teflon® ferrule is installed in each plastic nut with the wide end of the cone
facing toward the center of the Concentrator, as shown in Figure 2-56. The
ferrules are inserted into the threaded end of the nut.
NOTE: The Tri-Bed Concentrator is directional. The Tri-Bed Concentrator
must be installed with the smooth metal sleeve pointing down and thegrooved metal sleeve pointing up. See Figure 2-56.

2 - 34

IPN 074-472-P1C

To prevent contamination, only open front panel in a dry,
uncontaminated area.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-56 Proper Tri-Bed Concentrator Orientation

Grooved End
Pointing Up

NOTE: The Tenax Concentrator does not have a specific orientation. See
Figure 2-57.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-57 Tenax Concentrator

WARNINGThe elbow fittings may be hot. Allow for thesecomponents to cool before continuing.

3 For the Tri-Bed Concentrator: While holding the nut and ferrule in place,carefully place the smooth metal sleeve end of the Tri-Bed Concentrator into
the lower elbow fitting.

2 - 35

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3a For the Tenax Concentrator: While holding the nut and ferrule in place, carefully
place either end of the Concentrator into the lower elbow fitting. See Figure
2-58.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-58 Placing Concentrator in Bottom Elbow

2 - 36

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 For the Tri-Bed Concentrator: Carefully lift up on the top elbow fitting and insert
the end of the Concentrator with the grooved metal sleeve into this fitting. See
Figure 2-59.

4a For the Tenax Concentrator: Carefully lift up on the top elbow fitting and insert
either end of the Concentrator into this fitting. See Figure 2-59.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-59 Inserting the Top of the Concentrator

2 - 37

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Keep the Concentrator aligned between the two elbow fittings while gently
pressing down on the top elbow fitting. See Figure 2-60.
Figure 2-60 Pressing Down on Elbow Assembly

6 While maintaining gentle pressure on the top elbow fitting, first finger-tighten
the bottom nut of the Concentrator. Then, proceed to finger-tighten the top nut.
See Figure 2-61.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-61 Tightening the Top and Bottom Nut

2 - 38HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

WARNING
Excessive force and/or tightening can cause the fragile
glass to break!

7 When pressure is released from the top fitting, the elbow should not move.
When gentle upward pressure is applied to the top elbow, the elbow should notslip on the Concentrator. See Figure 2-62. If the elbow moves, the Concentrator
is not properly seated, loosen the Concentrator and repeat Step 3 on page 35
through Step 6 on page 38.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-62 Checking for Movement

8 Place the black Concentrator Cover (see Figure 2-63) over the Concentrator
and elbow assembly. The cover should fit easily, excessive force is not required
if the Concentrator is properly installed.

2 - 39

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-63 Installed Concentrator CoverNOTE: If the cover does not easily fit over the Concentrator, do not force it on.
Check to ensure the Concentrator is correctly installed with theConcentrator fully seated into both elbows and the nuts properly
tightened for a secure fitting.
NOTE: The Concentrator Cover contains two metal contacts that aresupported by Fiberglass. Inspect the contacts, prior to assembly, to be
sure the contacts are not bent or crimped. See Figure 2-64.

Use the proper Concentrator cover, which contains anElectronic Circuit board, for the Smart Plus. Do not use
the old Concentrator cover from the HAPSITE Smart
Plus. If the old cover is used, the cover will overheat andmay become damaged.
Figure 2-64 Back of the New Concentrator Cover2 - 40

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-65 Back of the Old Concentrator Cover

9 Close the front panel.

2.10.4 Removing the Concentrator
1 Open the front panel of the HAPSITE and remove the black cover labeled
CONCENTRATOR.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

The elbow fittings, nuts and Concentrator may be hot.
Allow these components to cool before continuing.

WARNING
Excessive force and/or tightening can cause the fragile
glass to break!

2 With fingers, loosen the nuts on the top and bottom of the Concentrator until theit becomes free.

3 Lift the top elbow. Gently lift and angle the Concentrator out of the fixture.
4 Remove the Concentrator from the bottom elbow, being careful not to lose theferrules inside the nuts.

5 Store the Concentrator wrapped in tissue in its storage vial for future use.

2 - 41

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.11 Probe Sampling Options and Attachments
To expand the sampling range of the HAPSITE, sample collecting bags can beused and special VX / R-33 Conversion Tubes can be attached.

2.11.1 Probe Nut Assembly
The orientation of the ferrules in the probe nut is critical for attaching a bag sample
or VX / R-33 Conversion Tube.

1 Using a guide (golf tee, small screwdriver, plastic pen cap with pocket clip
extension), place the metal probe nut over the guide’s narrow end. The threads
on the nut should be facing up.

CAUTIONBe sure the guide is clean to prevent the introduction ofcontaminants into the HAPSITE.

2 Place the small, back ferrule over the narrow end of the guide with the beveledside facing up.

3 The cone-shaped ferrule should be placed over the bevel with the narrow end
facing up. See Figure 2-66.

4 Carefully remove the nut assembly from the narrow end of the guide. Gently tap
the nut so that the ferrules seat properly into the nut.

5 Thread the nut-ferrule assembly onto the probe.

WARNING
Correct ferrule orientation is critical to avoid leaks ofhazardous or toxic material

2 - 42

IPN 074-472-P1C

6 Finger-tighten the nut-ferrule assembly into place.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 2-66 Diagram of Proper Ferrule Orientation in the Probe Nut

Narrow end of conepointed upwards

Beveled side of backferrule pointed upwards

Body of the probe nut

NOTE: Use a guide (such as a pen cap or sharpened
pencil) inside the opening of the nut to ensure correct
back ferrule orientation.

2.11.2 Attaching a Bag Sample
When samples are collected to be run later, various sampling bags can be used.
This procedure outlines the steps used to attach a Tedlar® Bag.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Be sure the bag valve remains closed when it is not
attached to the probe. Make sure there is an exhaust tube
attached to the exhaust port on the HAPSITE. Be sure theexhaust vents to a safe area.

1 Before attaching a Tedlar Bag to the Probe, refer to section 2.11.1, Probe NutAssembly, on page 2-42 to ensure proper ferrule orientation in the probe nut.

2 Prepare the Tedlar Bag sample. Avoid filling bag more than 80% full. Be surethe white valve is closed on the Tedlar bag.

3 Loosen the nut on the probe by turning the nut counter-clockwise up to twocomplete revolutions.

4 Guide the white cylindrical stem of the bag valve assembly into the opening of
the probe nut. Firmly push the stem into the probe nut. Two cylinder "clicks" areusually felt before the bag is properly seated into the probe nut.

5 Finger tighten the probe nut by turning the nut clockwise.
6 When it is time for the HAPSITE to collect the sample, open the Tedlar Bag byturning the valve one complete counter-clockwise revolution.

2 - 43

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.11.3 VX / R-33 Conversion Tube
This procedure describes the steps required to prepare the HAPSITE to sample for
VX or R-33 using the Conversion Tube. To detect VX or R-33, you must insert theConversion tube following the guidelines below.
The process of detecting VX or R-33 on the HAPSITE requires the conversion of
VX or R-33 (high boiling point chemicals) to the G analog. The VX or R-33 moleculeis broken at the sulfur bond when it comes in contact with a silver fluoride pad. The
result is the formation of a volatile chemical ethyl methyl phospho no fluoridate in
the case of VX, or isobutyl methyl phospho no fluoridate in the case of R-33. These
compounds are detected by the HAPSITE as VX-G or R-33-G.
NOTE: Theoretically, other G agents can be detected with the VX conversion padin place. However, if other G agents are suspected, the sample should also
be run without the conversion tube in place.

WARNING
Sulfur mustard cannot be detected with the conversion
tube in place.
2.11.3.1 VX / R-33 Conversion Tube Installation

1 Refer to section 2.11.1, Probe Nut Assembly, on page 2-42 to ensure proper
ferrule orientation in the probe nut.

WARNING

2 Loosen the nut on the end of the probe approximately 1/4 to 1/2 of a turn. See
Figure 2-67.
Figure 2-67 Loosening the Nut

2 - 44

IPN 074-472-P1C

Correct ferrule placement is critical to ensure a leak-free
fit around the conversion tube.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Insert either end of the VX / R-33 Conversion Tube into the nut. Make sure thetube is firmly seated into the front ferrule. See Figure 2-68.
Figure 2-68 Inserting the Tube

4 Finger tighten the nut. Pull gently on the conversion tube, it should be held
firmly in place. See Figure 2-69.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-69 Tightening the Nut

2 - 45

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.11.3.2 VX / R-33 Conversion Tube Removal

WARNING
If conversion tube has been exposed take proper
precautions and wear appropriate Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE). PPE guidelines can be found in thechemical’s MSDS. Dispose of the conversion tube
according to local regulations if it has been exposed.

1 Loosen the nut 1/4 to 1/2 of a turn.
2 Gently pull the VX / R-33 Conversion Tube out of the probe.

IPN 074-472-P1C

3 Finger tighten the nut.

2 - 46

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.12 Batteries
The battery provides power to the HAPSITE to allow portability. Under optimum
conditions, the battery has a 2 to 3 hour life.
NOTE: To test a battery, push on the TEST button on the end of the battery. In theelongated triangle, green lighted numbers will appear. The highest
illuminated number indicates the percentage of battery power left. The
percentage of remaining battery charge is reported in 20% increments.
See Figure 2-70.
NOTE: If OVER is illuminated, the battery is fully charged.
Figure 2-70 Battery Test Button and Charger Indicator

2.12.1 How to Remove a Battery
The black round button to the right of the battery is the battery release button. Twoclips hold the battery in the battery compartment. See Figure 2-71. Firmly push inon the battery while simultaneously pressing and holding the battery releasebutton. As the clips release, pull the battery out.

CAUTION

IPN 074-472-P1C

Do not expose the battery compartment to rain or otherforeign material. Do not open the compartment in acontaminated or wet area.
Figure 2-71 Battery Release Button

Battery
Release
ButtonBattery2 - 47

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.12.2 Battery Charger
The auxiliary Battery Charger (part number 930-470-G1—see Figure 2-72)
charges up to three HAPSITE batteries in 15 hours or less. It operates using AC
power.

CAUTIONThe battery charger is not sealed against moisture,debris, or contamination.
Figure 2-72 Battery Charger

The AC power connects to the Battery Charger through a Type IEC 320 male plug,a two-wire grounded connector rated for the full range of voltages. The connector
is recessed at the rear right-hand side of the Battery Charger and incorporates apair of fuses.
The Battery Charger is designed for indoor use at ambient temperatures from 5 °C
to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F). The Battery Charger is not designed for exposure tocontaminants since decontamination is not possible.

2 - 48IPN 074-472-P1C

The Battery Charger operates from a range of nominal AC voltages from 100 to
230 V. It will continue to operate without internal damage at a voltage as low as
90 V and as high as 253 V. The frequency can be from 50 to 60 Hz. The Battery
Charger draws 120 W when fully loaded.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.12.2.1 Battery Charger Components
The Battery Charger is shipped with a power cord and spare fuses.
2.12.2.2 Battery Charger Connections and Startup
Plug the power cord into the connector at the right rear of the Battery Charger. Thenplug into a grounded outlet. The ON light will illuminate. (The Battery Charger does
not have a power switch.)
As the Battery Charger performs a self-test, all the indicators will first turn amber.
Secondly, all receptacles that do not contain batteries will turn green. If a receptacle
contains a battery, it will turn red. Finally, all lights except for the ON indicator will
extinguish. No further warm-up is required; it is ready to charge batteries.
2.12.2.3 Loading the Battery Charger
The Battery Charger receptacles are identical and batteries in any state of charge
can be connected. Place Battery to be charged in one of the charging receptacles.
The respective indicator will illuminate green and charging will commence
immediately.

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when placing the battery inthe battery charger.

CAUTION

IPN 074-472-P1C

Do not charge batteries in a moving vehicle.

2 - 49

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.12.2.4 Understanding the Battery Charger Indicators
Each battery receptacle is associated with an indicator light which can beilluminated in any of three colors.
Green. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The battery is being charged. This willcontinue for 15 hours or less. If a battery witha severely depleted charge is inserted, thegreen light will flash. If it flashes for more than
10 minutes, the battery will not accept acharge and should be replaced. The actual
state of the battery charge can be assessedby using the TEST button on the battery.
Amber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The battery is fully charged. The rate ofcharge has been reduced to a maintenancelevel. The battery can be left this way
indefinitely.
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The receptacle (or the battery, if one isinstalled) has a problem. A flashing red lightindicates that communication with the battery
is unsuccessful.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The receptacle is ready to charge a battery. If
the indicator remains extinguished when abattery is inserted, the battery is severely
depleted. In this case, leave the battery in thereceptacle and unplug the power cord.
Reconnect the power cord and the battery
will start to charge.

2 - 50HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.13 Portable Accessories
Portability is an important HAPSITE feature. The following accessories facilitateusing the HAPSITE in the field.

2.13.1 HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System Strap
Attach the HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System straps as illustrated below
in Figure 2-73.
Figure 2-73 Attaching the HAPSITE Strap

HAPSITEOr Sampling Accessory

Strap Eyelet

IPN 074-472-P1C

Strap

Strap must be attached
to HAPSITE or Sampling
Accessory as shown.

WARNING
Improper connection of the strap increases the risk ofdropping the HAPSITE and/or bodily injury

2 - 51

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.13.2 HAPSITE Backpack
The backpack is a light weight, high quality hiker’s backpack. It has been modified
to securely mount the HAPSITE.
2.13.2.1 Adjustment of the Backpack
To adjust the backpack, proceed as follows.

1 Put on the empty backpack.
2 Tighten the hip belt.
3 Arrange the backpack so that:The frame’s S-curve matches the curve of your back.
The hip belt rests on your hip bones.
The shoulder straps come from the frame at a slight downward angle overyour shoulders.

4 Note the height and shoulder strap adjustments that need to be made toachieve a proper fit.
NOTE: Use a mirror to visually check the fit.

5 Take off the backpack.
6 If a height adjustment is needed, use the straps and plastic connectors on theback of the backpack to move the hip belt up or down.

7 If the spacing between the shoulder straps needs adjustment, loosen or tighten
the straps located on the back of the backpack.

8 Try on the empty pack again. Repeat as necessary to achieve a proper fit.
10 Mount the HAPSITE on the backpack.
11 Correct adjustment of the tension of the buckles permits them to slide slightly
on the HAPSITE attachment points.

WARNING
If the HAPSITE is not properly secured to the backpack,the HAPSITE may fall or move unexpectedly which may
result in bodily injury to the user.

12 With the HAPSITE securely clipped to the backpack, put on the backpack.
13 Tighten the hip belt and shoulder straps.
14 The weight should be carried by your hips, with the shoulder straps steadying
the load.

2 - 52

IPN 074-472-P1C

9 Release the locks on the two stainless steel buckles.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.13.2.2 Care of the Backpack

Avoid exposing the backpack to solvents and other active chemicals.



Avoid storing the backpack in direct sunlight.



Wash the backpack as necessary with water and mild soap.

CAUTION
Do not store the backpack with the fabric in contact withconcrete. The moisture and chemicals in concrete canweaken nylon.

2.14 Hot Swap Cable (IPN 930-246-G1)
The Hot Swap Cable is used to provide an external power source for the HAPSITE.
When connected between an external battery and the 24 V(dc) power port on the
HAPSITE, the Hot Swap Cable permits changing the internal battery without theloss of power to the HAPSITE.

2.14.1 Connecting the Hot Swap CableWARNING
Do not use the hot swap cable in the rain.

1 Plug the "L" connector into the back of a charged battery. See Figure 2-74.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-74 Hot Swap Cable Components

BatteryPower
Connector“L”
Connector

2 - 53

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

WARNING - Risk Of Electric Shock
Do not use if the "L" connector is broken.

WARNING - Risk Of Electric ShockConnect the Hot Swap Cable "L" connector to the battery
first. Then, plug the power connector into the HAPSITE
24 V(dc) power port.

2 Plug the power connector into the 24 V(dc) power port on the HAPSITE. The
depleted internal battery can now be replaced. After replacing the internal
battery, disconnect the Hot Swap Cable. See Figure 2-75.

CAUTION
Do not open the HAPSITE front panel in a contaminatedor wet environment.

HAPSITE
24 V(dc)
Power
Port

2 - 54

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 2-75 Power Connector

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2.14.2 Storing the Hot Swap Cable
The Hot Swap Cable and Battery have exposed electrical connections. Protect theconnections from moisture or contaminated environments by storing the battery
and cable connection in a protective plastic bag. See Figure 2-76.
Figure 2-76 Storing

2.14.3 Use as an Additional Battery Source

IPN 074-472-P1C

Attach the Battery to the HAPSITE via the Hot Swap Cable when the front panel
shows the level of charge on the internal battery is  20%. This will provide an
additional battery source.

2 - 55

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

2 - 56

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 3
Operating HAPSITE in Portable Mode
3.1 Starting the HAPSITE in Portable Mode
Portable Mode refers to using the HAPSITE without the Laptop computer.
Required Materials


HAPSITE (Analytical Module)Internal Standard Gas CanisterCarrier Gas CanisterCharged BatteryAC to DC Power Converter Power Supply



Probe

Procedure

1 Assemble the HAPSITE as shown in Section 2.2, Basic Assembly, on page 2-5.
2 Press the POWER button on the front panel. The word POWER will illuminate.
Powering on the HAPSITE takes one (1) to two (2) minutes. See Figure 3-1.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-1 The Power Switch

NOTE: Power on the HAPSITE while connected to AC power. Using battery
power to turn on and heat the HAPSITE will consume over 40% of thebattery’s charge.
3 The HAPSITE will boot in approximately one minute and will sense whichsample configuration (i.e., concentrator) has been installed. It will begin toprepare the default method for this sample configuration.
4 The HAPSITE will begin to prepare various components. These components
include heating the HAPSITE and accessory heaters, running AutoTune (seeStep 8 on page 3-3), powering the NEG, and if necessary, running concentrator
cleanout.

3-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 During the preparation period, the front panel will display the PREPARINGSYSTEM message. Depending upon the chosen default method, this screen
may show PREPARING ANALYZE or PREPARING SURVEY. This message
will occur when the methods have different temperature setpoints. See Figure
3-2.
Figure 3-2 Front Panel Preparing System

6 To view the preparation details’ progress, touch the Details button. See Figure
3-3.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-3 Details Button

3-2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 The progress of the preparation is shown by a bar graph. If a component is in
the process of being prepared, it will be shown in blue. When a component isready, it will be shown in green. If a component is going to be prepared, but the
preparation process has not started, it will be shown in yellow. If the system is
not ready, the items that need to be prepared will be shown in red. Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Preparation Bar Graph

8 When the heating sequence is completed, the software will check the mass
spectrometer tune and automatically make any necessary adjustments. The
automatic tune adjustment is called AutoTune. If AutoTune fails, see Section
6.4, Manual Tune Settings and Controls, on page 6-7.

9 As part of the preparation, a concentrator cleanout will be run when the

IPN 074-472-P1C

concentrator is installed. This cleanout will heat the concentrator to 180°C toremove residue. The cleanout will occur when the unit has been turned on,
taken out of Extended Standby, the concentrator has been changed or theconcentrator has been saturated.
NOTE: If a concentrator cleanout is not desired due to an emergency, see for
Emergency Mode (EMER MODE) instructions. See Section 3.1.1,
Emergency Mode (EMER MODE), on page 3-6.
NOTE: A concentrator cleanout can also be skipped, although skipping theconcentrator cleanout is not recommended and may lead to poor
results. See Section 3.1.2, Concentrator Options (CONC OPTIONS),
on page 3-8.

10 Hold the probe in a clean environment for the duration of the cleanout. If theconcentrator cleanout is not successful, see Section 3.1.3, Concentrator
Cleanout Failure, on page 3-11.

3-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11 When the HAPSITE is ready to run samples, a green SYSTEM READY,SURVEY READY or ANALYZE READY message will be displayed. See Figure
3-5.
NOTE: The HAPSITE takes about twenty minutes to complete the preparation
sequence from a cold start.
Figure 3-5 System Ready

NOTE: If the methods are at different temperature setpoints, the method thatis ready to run will have a green READY message next to the method
name. See Figure 3-6.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-6 Ready Message

3-4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 If SURVEY READY is displayed, touch RUN SURVEY or push SURVEY RUN.
See Figure 3-7
Figure 3-7 Survey Ready

13 If ANALYZE READY is displayed, touch RUN ANALYZE or push ANALYZE
RUN. See Figure 3-8.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-8 Analyze Ready

NOTE: If the system is preparing a SURVEY run and an ANALYZE method isdesired, touch the STOP PREPARE button. Then, touch the
PREPARE ANALYZE button. Likewise, if an ANALYZE method isbeing prepared and a SURVEY is desired, touch STOP PREPARE,
followed by the PREPARE SURVEY button.

3-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.1.1 Emergency Mode (EMER MODE)
In an emergency, the concentrator cleanout can be bypassed to allow for fasterstartup. This is not recommended for everyday use. To place the system into
Emergency Mode:

1 Touch EMER MODE while the PREPARING SYSTEM message is displayed.
See Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9 Emergency Mode

2 Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight the EMER MODE button and push
OK SEL. See Figure 3-10.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-10 Arrow Keys

3-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 A confirmation message will be displayed. Touch Yes or push OK SEL tocontinue. See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Emergency Mode Confirmation

4 The EMER MODE button will turn red when Emergency mode is activated. See
Figure 3-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-12 Emergency Mode Active

3-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 To take the system out of Emergency Mode, touch the EMER MODE button.
Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight the EMER MODE button and push
OK SEL. The EMER MODE button will turn gray. See Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 EMER Mode Inactive

6 The HAPSITE ER will run a concentrator cleanout and prepare for general(non-emergency) use.

3.1.2 Concentrator Options (CONC OPTIONS)The CONC OPTIONS button has two selections: Concentrator Cleanout andSkip Conc Cleanout. When Concentrator Cleanout is selected, the HAPSITE
will run a manual cleanout. When Skip Conc Cleanout is selected, the HAPSITE
will bypass the concentrator cleanout while the HAPSITE is preparing.
3.1.2.1 Concentrator Cleanout
OPTIONS button and push OK SEL. See Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14 Concentrator Options

3-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

1 Touch CONC OPTIONS or use the arrow keys to highlight the CONC

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 Touch Concentrator Cleanout or highlight Concentrator Cleanout using thearrow keys. Push OK SEL. See Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 Concentrator Cleanout

3 The HAPSITE will run a concentrator cleanout. See Figure 3-16.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-16 Concentrator Cleanout

3-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 When the cleanout is successful, the Concentrator Cleanout Succeeded
message will be displayed along with the final TIC. Push OK to exit the screen.
See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17 Concentrator Cleanout Succeeded

3.1.2.2 Skip Cleanout

1 Touch CONC OPTIONS or use the arrow keys to highlight the CONCOPTIONS button and push OK SEL. See Figure 3-14.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-18 Conc Options

3 - 10HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 Touch Skip Cleanout or highlight Skip Cleanout using the arrow keys. Push
OK SEL. See Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-19 Skip Cleanout

3 The system will not run a cleanout as part of its preparation.

3.1.3 Concentrator Cleanout Failure
If the concentrator cleanout is successful, the screen will display the final TIC. See
Figure 3-20.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-20 Cleanout Successful

If the concentrator cleanout is unsuccessful, the screen will display a concentrator
cleanout failed message. See the instructions below for cleanout options.

1 Touch Retry to start another concentrator cleanout sequence.
2 Touch Skip to start running a concentrator Analyze method.
3 Touch Abort to return to the Main Screen.
NOTE: If Abort is touched, the HAPSITE will show that the SYSTEM IS NOTREADY.

3 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 The HAPSITE will re-run the cleanout as part of its preparation.
5 If the failure box appears again, check the concentrator to verify that it is notcracked or chipped. Also, try re-installing the concentrator to ensure that it isproperly seated.

3.1.4 Quick Reference SOP — Heat-up and Tune
CAUTION
Do not open the front panel in a wet or contaminated area.

1 Insert the internal standard and carrier gas canisters.
2 Insert a charged battery.
3 Connect the AC to DC power converter power supply.
4 Verify that the appropriate sample configuration (i.e., concentrator) is installed.
5 Press the POWER button on the front panel.
6 The HAPSITE will heat up the necessary components and perform AutoTune.
A prompt to run SURVEY or ANALYZE will appear when the HAPSITE is readyto run a sample. The process for heating and tuning takes approximately 20
minutes.

7 If the default method is not the desired method, touch STOP PREPARE.
8 Touch SELECT METHOD. Highlight the desired method. Touch Select.

NOTE: When the SYSTEM READY message is displayed, touch either RUN
SURVEY or RUN ANALYZE. If using the push buttons, push SURVEY
RUN or ANALYZE RUN.

3 - 12

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: If the wireless connection to the Laptop is to be used, see Chapter 4,
Communications and Touch Screen Options.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.2 Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon
If the default method is not the desired method, the method can be changed.
Changing the method can occur when the system is preparing or when anothermethod has finished preparing.

1 When the PREPARING SYSTEM screen is displayed, touch STOP PREPARE.
Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight STOP PREPARE and push OK
SEL. See Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21 Stop Prepare Screen

2 The screen will prompt, Are you sure you want to stop preparing this
instrument? Touch Yes or using the arrow keys, highlight Yes and push OK
SEL. See Figure 3-22.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-22 Stopping Preparation

3 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 The SYSTEM IS NOT READY screen will appear. To select a new method,
touch SELECT METHOD or using the arrow keys, highlight SELECTMETHOD and push OK SEL. See Figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23 Selecting a Method Screen

4 Scroll up or down using the scroll bar or with the arrow keys. When the desired
method is highlighted, touch Select or push OK SEL. See Figure 3-24.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-24 Method Selection

3 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 The PREPARING message will again be displayed. See Figure 3-25. Refer tosteps 4-9 of Section 3.2, Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECTMETHOD Icon, on page 3-13 for further instructions on system preparation.
Figure 3-25 Preparing System

6 If the SYSTEM READY, ANALYZE READY or SURVEY READY message isalready displayed and the prepared method is not the desired one, touch
SELECT METHOD. See Figure 3-26.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-26 Selecting New Method

7 Scroll up and down with the scroll bar or use the arrow keys to highlight thedesired method, as shown in Step 4 of section 3.2. Touch Select or highlight
Select using the arrow keys and push OK SEL.

8 The HAPSITE will begin preparing the new method. Refer to Steps 4-9 ofSection 3.2, Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon,on page 3-13 for further instructions on system preparation.

3 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.2.1 Changing the Default Method
The default method for the HAPSITE can be changed. By changing the default
method, the HAPSITE will prepare the newly selected method upon startup.

1 Touch SELECT METHOD.See Figure 3-27.
Figure 3-27 Select Method

2 Highlight the desired method. See Figure 3-28.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-28 Choosing Method

3 Touch the Set Default button. Upon the next startup, the HAPSITE will begin
preparing the new default method.

3 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.2.2 Show All
The HAPSITE will only show methods that are compatible with the current sample
and/or accessory configuration. By checking the Show All box, all loaded
HAPSITE methods will appear in the text box, regardless of configuration.
Non-compatible methods will be shown in a lighter gray. The non-compatible
methods are for reference only and cannot be selected to run. See Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29 Show All

3.3 Survey Mode
The Survey mode is used for quick analysis and tentative results. When sampling
unknown compounds, it is recommended that a Survey run be completed before
running Analyze.
Overview

IPN 074-472-P1C

Using the probe, sample the air away from the area of concern for one minute.
This establishes the background of VOC’s currently present in the area.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the probe. Do not allow
liquids to enter the probe.
When a background has been established, sample directly over the point ofconcern. Once the TIC begins to increase, slowly move the probe away fromthe sample. If a compound has been identified, it will be displayed on thescreen.

3 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Procedure

1 If an Analyze method is going to be run after Survey, verify that the appropriate
sample configuration (i.e., concentrator) is installed.

2 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby, the HAPSITE willautomatically start preparing an Survey and Analyze method if the probe is
attached. Refer to Section 3.1, Starting the HAPSITE in Portable Mode, on
page 3-1.

3 Verify that the desired Analyze method is listed under the Survey method. In
Figure 3-30, the Analyze method is Air_Tri-Bed_PPM_Standard.
Figure 3-30 Analyze Method

4 A SYSTEM READY message will appear with instructions to press Survey or
Analyze when the HAPSITE Smart Plus is ready to sample. See Figure 3-31.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-31 System Ready3 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Using the touch screen, touch RUN SURVEY. See Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Survey Ready

6 Alternately, push SURVEY RUN using the push buttons. See Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 SURVEY RUN Button

7 The front panel will momentarily display a Scanning Starts In message before
IPN 074-472-P1C

the Survey run will start.See Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Scanning Starts Screen

3 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8 Sample air away from the point of concern for one minute. Remember to notethe background TIC. See Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 Background Sampling

9 Hold the probe over the sample of interest for up to 1 minute. A peak may
appear if the compound present is greater than 1 ppm. A compound
identification may also be present on the HAPSITE screen. See Figure 3-36.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-36 Survey

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the probe.
Do not allow liquids to enter the probe.

3 - 20HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 By touching CMPD ID, a list of identified compounds will appear. See Figure3-37. The CAS number, the Fit and the elapsed time for each compound will
also be displayed. This screen will also display the TIC (Total Ion Count, ameasure of response) Max, the current TIC and the time the method has beenrunning.
NOTE: Touching a compound on the list will display its NIOSH database
information. See Step 8 on page 3-28.
Figure 3-37 Sample Compound ID List in Survey

11 The CMPD ID screen can also be accessed by using the arrow keys tohighlight CMPD ID and pushing OK SEL. See Figure 3-38.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-38 Accessing the Compound ID Screen Using the Arrow Keys

3 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 To view the chromatogram while the method is running, touch GRAPH. See
Figure 3-39. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight GRAPH and push
OK SEL.
NOTE: This screen will also display the TIC Max, the current TIC and the timethe method has been running.
NOTE: Touching the blue compound identification above the chromatogram
will display its NIOSH database information. See Step 8 on page 3-35.
Figure 3-39 Sample GRAPH function

interest. Continue the run until the TIC level returns to the initial backgroundlevel that was noted in Step 8 on page 3-20. See Figure 3-40.
NOTE: Monitor the Probe distance indicator bar on the HAPSITE screen for
guidance. The bar rises as the TIC increases and green signifies thatthe proper sampling distance is being maintained. To avoid saturation,
remove the probe from the sample when the bar is high and turns
yellow. If saturation occurs, the side bar will turn red and the TIC will be
above 60 million. Remove the probe from the sample and continue torun Survey until the saturation is cleared from the sample pathway.
Figure 3-40 Returning to Baseline

3 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

13 When the TIC begins to increase, move the probe away from the sample of

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14 To confirm the Survey results with a GC/MS run, ANALYZE can be touched or
ANALYZE RUN can be pushed during the Survey run.
NOTE: It is advised to begin an Analyze run either while a peak is being
displayed or Survey has been run for the full two minutes without
detecting a compound.

15 If an Analyze method is not going to be run, touch STOP to stop the sampling
process and automatically save the data. See Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 ANALYZE and STOP

16 A METHOD FINISHED message will appear when the Survey method has
ended. See Figure 3-42.
NOTE: The total time required for a Survey analysis is typically less than 3minutes.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-42 Survey Method Finished3 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.3.1 Quick Reference SOP — Survey Method
1 If you are running an Analyze (GC/MS) method after Survey, verify that theappropriate configuration (i.e., concentrator) is installed and the proper Analyze
method is displayed on the screen.

2 If powering on HAPSITE or ending Extended Standby, the HAPSITE willautomatically begin preparing Survey.

2a If needed, touch PREPARE on the touch screen.
2b Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE. Push OK SEL.
3 When prompted by the SYSTEM READY message, touch RUN SURVEY or
push SURVEY RUN.

4 Monitor background for one minute.
5 Hold the probe over the sample.
6 Remove the probe from the sample when the TIC begins to increase and apeak begins to form.

6a If the TIC does not increase after a full minute of sampling, remove the probefrom the sample.

7 To confirm data with an Analyze (GC/MS) run, touch RUN ANALYZE or press
ANALYZE RUN while sample is being detected.

8 If an Analyze method is not desired, touch STOP or push SURVEY RUN.
9 A METHOD FINISHED message will be displayed when the method has

IPN 074-472-P1C

ended.

3 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.4 ANALYZE (GC/MS) Mode with the Concentrator
3.4.1 The Tri- Bed Concentrator
The Tri-Bed concentrator is used for analyzing samples with concentration levelsin the low part per million to high part per trillion range. Two default qualitative
methods are Air_Tri-Bed_PPM_Standard and Air_Tri-Bed_PPB Standard. Use the
Air_Tri-Bed_PPM_Standard method when a response is seen in Survey. If a
compound is suspected, but Survey does not show an increase in TIC (total ion
count, which is a measure of response), use the Air_Tri-Bed_PPB_Standard
method.

CAUTION
The concentrator feature has increased sensitivity. Use
the appropriate method to avoid saturating the HAPSITE.

3.4.2 The Tenax Concentrator
This method is also used for analyzing samples with concentration levels in the low
part per million to high part per trillion range. The Tenax concentrator’s use issimilar to that of the Tri-Bed concentrator. However, the Tenax concentrator will noteffectively concentrate compounds with boiling points below 80 °C.

WARNINGThe Tenax concentrator will not effectively concentratecompounds with boiling points below 80°C.

IPN 074-472-P1C

3.4.3 Procedure for Running Concentrator Methods
NOTE: Before an Analyze (GC/MS) can be run in concentrator mode, theconcentrator must be installed. Refer to Section 2.3.7, Replacing theConcentrator, on page 2-21 for instructions. Once installed, theconcentrator will be automatically cleaned before sampling begins.

1 Verify that the appropriate concentrator is installed.
2 The HAPSITE will automatically start preparing a concentrator method. If
HAPSITE does not prepare the desired concentrator method, refer to Section
3.2, Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon, on page
3-13.

3 When the HAPSITE has finished preparing and the concentrator cleanout issuccessful, a SYSTEM READY message will appear with a prompt to press
Survey or Analyze to begin sampling.
NOTE: A blank run is recommended before running a sample.

3 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Using the touch screen, touch RUN ANALYZE. See Figure 3-43.
Figure 3-43 Analyze Button

5 Alternately, if using the push buttons, push ANALYZE RUN. See Figure 3-44.
Figure 3-44 Analyze Run

sample. Continue to collect sample during both the Line Purge and ConcFill
screens. See Figure 3-45.
NOTE: The Line Purge is based on time while the ConcFill is based on volume.
During the Line Purge event, the sample is flowing through the systemand out through the exhaust to improve sampling accuracy. During the
ConcFill, the sample is being collected by the system for analysis.

3 - 26

IPN 074-472-P1C

6 When the screen prompts, Collect Sample Now hold the probe over theHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 3-45 Collecting Sample For Concentrator Run

CAUTION

IPN 074-472-P1C

Do not touch the sample with the probe.
Do not allow liquids to enter the probe.

7 Remove probe from the sample when the screen prompts, Sampling is Done.
See Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-46 Sampling Done on Concentrator Run

3 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8 By touching CMPD ID, a list of found compounds will appear. See Figure 3-47.
This page will display for each compound:

The CAS number

The Fit

The retention time

TIC (Total Ion Count) Max

The current TIC



The Run TimeThe Time Left which is the time remaining until the run is finished

NOTE: Touching a compound on the list will display its NIOSH database
information. See Step 8 on page 3-35.

8a The CMPD ID screen can also be accessed by using the arrow keys tohighlight CMPD ID and pushing OK SEL.See Figure 3-47.

9 To view the chromatogram while the method is running, touch GRAPH. See
Figure 3-48. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight GRAPH. Push OK
SEL. This screen will display:

The TIC MaxThe current TIC

The time remaining until the run is finishedThe Run TimeThe Time Left which is the time remaining until the run is finished

NOTE: Touching the blue compound identification above the chromatogram
will display its NIOSH database information. See Step 8 on page 3-28.

3 - 28IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-47 Sample Compound Identification for Concentrator

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 3-48 Sample Chromatogram View For Concentrator

10 A METHOD FINISHED message will appear when the Analyze method has
ended. See Figure 3-49.
NOTE: Another Analyze (GC/MS) run can be started immediately after one
has finished. Depending upon the temperature profile, the column may
need to cool before another run may begin.
NOTE: Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 formore information on reviewing the data.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-49 Sample Concentrator Method Finished3 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.4.4 Quick Reference SOP—Concentrator Methods
1 Verify that the concentrator is installed.
2 Refer to Section 3.1.4, Quick Reference SOP - Heat-up and Tune, on page
3-12 for startup instructions.

3 Verify that the desired method is displayed on the Analyze line.
4 Touch RUN ANALYZE or push ANALYZE RUN when the SYSTEM READY
screen is displayed.

5 When the screen prompts, Collect Sample Now, hold the probe over the
sample until the screen prompts, Sampling is Done.

6 When the run is complete, a Method Finished message will appear.
7 Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 for

IPN 074-472-P1C

information on data review.

3 - 30HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.5 Detecting Hazardous Chemicals
If the compound identification turns red, a chemical’s concentration is either
approaching the IDLH limit or the chemical is a Chemical Warfare Agent. In CMPD
ID mode, the compound will be highlighted in red and in GRAPH mode, the nameof the compound will be written in red. Red arrows will also appear in GRAPH mode
if there is more than one red compound. See Figure 3-50.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-50 IDLH Warnings

3 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.5.1 View Results/View Reports
Data files and reports can be viewed from the main front panel screen or from thesample analysis screen. Follow the instructions below to

1 To access data files and reports from the main screen, touch MAIN. See Figure
3-51.
Figure 3-51 MAIN

2 Touch View Results. See Figure 3-52.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-52 View Results

3 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 The most recent file for the selected method will appear on the screen. Use theblack, touch screen arrow keys to access other data files from the same
method. See Figure 3-55. If using the push buttons, use the front panel arrow
keys. The left arrow key will access earlier files. The right arrow will accesslater ones. See Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Arrow Keys

4 To view files from another method, use the SELECT RESULTS button. See
Figure 3-54.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-54 Select Results

3 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Scroll through the method files and highlight the desired method. Either touch
Select or push OK SEL. See Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-55 Selecting Results

6 The big blue arrows are used to scroll through the peaks in the chromatogram.
The identified compound and its retention time will appear in the area below thefile name. See Figure 3-56.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-56 Blue Arrows

3 - 34

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Touch the small blue triangles to display the compound identification andretention time for the compound directly above it. See Figure 3-57.
Figure 3-57 Small Blue Triangles

NOTE: Most functions can be accessed using the push buttons. However,accessing the blue triangles and blue arrows are only available on thetouch screen.

DANGERIf a RED TRIANGLE is displayed, the HAPSITE has
detected a compound with a concentration that is
approaching or above the IDLH level or it has detected a
Chemical Warfare Agent. Refer to Section 3.5, Detecting
Hazardous Chemicals, on page 3-31.

IPN 074-472-P1C

8 Touching a specific compound on the screen will display the NIOSH database
information for the identified.
Figure 3-58 Touching the Identification to Access Exposure Limits

3 - 35

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 A link to the NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards (NPG) will also be
displayed in blue. The link is entitled Pocket Guide. In the bottom left handcorner, there is a link to the Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
Concentrations (IDLH). The link is blue and entitled IDLH. See Figure 3-63. For
further instructions on using NIOSH and other info databases, see Section 3.7,
The Info Icon, on page 3-43.

10 Touch CLOSE to return to the data screen.
Figure 3-60 CLOSE

3 - 36

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-59 Links to NPG and IDLH

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11 Touching the CMPD ID (Compound Identification) button while in Review
Results, will show a list of the compounds found on the selected run. The CAS
number, the Net Fit and the retention time for each compound will also be
shown. See Figure 3-61.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-61 CMPD IDDANGERIf a RED TRIANGLE is displayed, the HAPSITE has
detected a compound with a concentration that is
approaching or above the IDLH or it has detected a
Chemical Warfare Agent. See Section 3.5, Detecting
Hazardous Chemicals, on page 3-31.

3 - 37

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 Touching a specific compound in the list will display that compound’s NIOSH
database information. See Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Synonym and Exposure Limits

13 A link to the NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards (NPG) will also be
displayed in blue. The link is entitled Pocket Guide. In the bottom left handcorner, there is a link to the Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
Concentrations (IDLH). The link is blue and entitled IDLH. See Figure 3-63. For
further instructions on using NIOSH and other info databases, see Section 3.7,
The Info Icon, on page 3-43.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-63 NIOSH Link

NOTE: The HAPSITE can detect more compounds than those contained in the
NIOSH databases. Therefore, if the screen displays N/A and does nothave links available, the compound is not included in these databases.

3 - 38HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14 To view the Summary, Qualitative and Quantitative Reports, touch the
REPORTS button. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight the REPORTS
button and pushing OK SEL. See Figure 3-64. REPORTS can be accessedfrom the GRAPH page or the CMPD ID from View Results.
Figure 3-64 Viewing REPORTS

15 The Summary Report can be found by touching the SUMM button. See Figure
3-65. Alternately, using the arrow keys highlight the SUMM button and push
OK SEL. For each compound found, information regarding the Net Fit and theretention time will be displayed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-65 Summary Report3 - 39

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16 The Qualitative Report can be found be touching the QUAL button. See Figure3-66. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight the QUAL button and push
OK SEL. For each compound found, information regarding the Net Fit, theretention time, the CAS number, the area and the number of hits will be
displayed.
Figure 3-66 Qualitative Report

17 The Quantitative Report can be found be touching the QUANT button. See
Figure 3-67. Alternately, arrow keys highlight the QUANT button and push OK
SEL. For each compound found, information regarding the target ion, theretention time, the Net Fit, the purity, the area and the concentration will be
displayed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-67 Quantitative Reports

NOTE: If the method is not quantitative, the message "No Quant Reports
Found" will be displayed on the QUANT report screen. To determine
if the method is quantitative, see the box in the bottom right handcorner of the main screen. See Figure 3-68.

3 - 40HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-68 Type of Method

3 - 41

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.6 The Help Icon
The Help icon is located on the upper right of the front panel. See Figure 3-69.
Figure 3-69 Help Icon

Help can be accessed by touching this button or pushing the HELP button that is
located on the front panel. See Figure 3-70.
Figure 3-70 Help Push Button

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Help screen displayed will have a Survey link, an Analyze link, a View
Results link, a Select Method link and a Go To Standby link. Touching a link will
give an overview of how to perform that specific function. Touching Simple Steps
at the bottom of the page will give a step-by-step outline of how to perform thedesired function. The Book icon will give a more detailed summary of the function.

3 - 42

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7 The Info Icon
The Info icon is located on the upper right of the front panel. See Figure 3-71. Infocan be accessed by touching this button or pushing the STAT key until the NIOSH
database is displayed. When the Info page is displayed, the Info icon will behighlighted in blue.
Figure 3-71 Info Icon

The NIOSH Database screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-72. This screen
provides links to Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health Concentrations (IDLHs),
International Chemical Safety Cards, NMAM, The NIOSH Pocket Guide to
Chemical Hazards (NPG), OSHA Sampling and Analytical Methods,
Recommendations for Chemical Protective Clothing, Specific Medical Tests
Published for OSHA Regulated Substances, and Toxicologic Review of Selected
Chemicals. These publications provide information on Exposure Limits, Synonyms
and Detection Limitations.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Scrolling to the bottom of the page will access additional links.


The Conversion Calculator provides help for determining the proper units inan equation.

Hazard ID’s accesses specific NIOSH studies about hazardous conditions.



PPE outlines the proper equipment needed for someone that is going to be
exposed to hazardous conditions.



Respiratory Protection connects to OSHA’s website so that the user can lookup the proper protection needed for a specific environment.



Hazard Controls provides access to specific studies that have identified ways
to reduce hazardous exposures.



Indoor Air Quality includes selected publications from the EPA about
improving air quality.



The Periodic Table can be accessed for determining the AMUs of a compound
to see if it can be detected by the HAPSITE.

RTECS User Guide was designed by NIOSH to give synonyms, skin and eye
irritation data, mutation data, and respiratory effects data for certain
compounds. It stands for The Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical
Substances.

3 - 43

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1 An important resource on this database is The NIOSH Pocket Guide to
Chemical Hazards (NPG). See Figure 3-72. To access, scroll to the fourth
option on the list and touch the The NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards(NPG) link.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-72 NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards

3 - 44

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 When the publication appears, touch INDEX with CHEMICAL NAMES andSYNONYMS. See Figure 3-73.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-73 NIOSH Pocket Guide3 - 45

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Scroll down to display an alphabet. Touch the first letter of the desired
compound. See Figure 3-74.
Figure 3-74 Pocket Guide Index

4 A list of the chemicals that start with the selected letter will be displayed.
See Figure 3-75.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-75 Index of Chemicals By Name

3 - 46

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Touch the desired chemical. The Pocket Guide for that specific chemical will be
displayed. See Figure 3-76.
NOTE: Not all compounds that can be detected by the HAPSITE are containedin the NIOSH library.
Figure 3-76 NIOSH Pocket Guide for a Specific Chemical

6 Scroll down to display information about the exposure limit and the boiling pointof the chemical. The boiling point is important in determining if the chemical canbe detected by the HAPSITE. See Figure 3-77.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-77 NIOSH Pocket Guide Exposure Limit and IDLH Information

3 - 47

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 To access information regarding Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
Concentrations (IDLHs), touch the first hyperlink on the info screen. See Figure
3-78.
Figure 3-78 IDLHs

8 Scroll down or touch DOWN until the IDLHs-Chemical Listing andDocumentation link is showing. Touch this link. See Figure 3-79.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-79 Chemical Listing and Documentation Link3 - 48HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 Scroll down, press DOWN or use the down arrow to find the desired compound.
Touch the link to view the compound’s information. See Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 Selecting IDLH of Compound

10 Information regarding the compound’s NIOSH REL, OSHA PEL and toxicity
data will be displayed. See Figure 3-81.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-81 IDLH Screen

3 - 49

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1 System Parameters
System Parameters provides information about the operation of the HAPSITE
and its consumables. Information regarding battery power, gas consumption,
heaters, tune status, and GPS can be accessed through this screen.

1 The System Parameters screen can be displayed by touching the HAPSITE
Smart Plus icon. See Figure 3-82.
Figure 3-82 HAPSITE Icon

2 Alternately, push the SYSTEM STAT button until the HAPSITE icon ishighlighted.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-83 SYSTEM STAT Push Button

3 - 50HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.1 Battery Icon
If a battery is installed, the Battery icon will display information about the battery’s
charge level. The charge level is found as a vertical bar graph inside the battery
icon. See Figure 3-84. If a battery is not installed, EXTPWR will be displayed under
the icon and the icon’s charge level bar graph will turn red.
Figure 3-84 Battery Icon

3.7.1.2 Carrier Gas Icon
The HAPSITE uses nitrogen as the carrier gas. Touching the Carrier Gas icon, will
provide information about the pressure of the carrier gas in the can. A vertical bar
graph in the icon will correlate the approximate percentage to the remaining
amount of gas in the can. See Figure 3-85.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-85 Carrier Gas Icon

3 - 51

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.3 Internal Standard Icon
The Internal Standard icon uses a vertical bar graph to correlate the approximate
percentage to the remaining amount of gas in the canister. Touching the icon will
display the canister’s fill date, the canister’s expiration date, and the actual PPM of
TRIS and BPFB concentrations in the canister. See Figure 3-86.
Figure 3-86 Internal Standard Icon

3.7.1.4 HEATERS Icon
The HEATERS Icon also has the following options at the bottom of the touch
screen: HEATERS, NEG and CONC. The bar graph located on the HEATERS icon
represents the progress of all of the Heaters. See Figure 3-87.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-87 Heaters Icon

3 - 52

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.4.1 HEATERS Button
Touching the HEATERS icon provides the current temperatures of the column, themembrane, the GCHL, the valve oven, the NEG, the probe, and the Concentrator
Elbow as the HAPSITE is heating. The number after the actual temperature is the
setpoint temperature. A green circle signifies that the temperature is in range, blue
signifies that the heater is reaching its setpoint, and black signifies that the heater
is off. See Figure 3-88.
Figure 3-88 Temperatures of Heaters

3.7.1.4.2 NEG Button

IPN 074-472-P1C

The NEG button provides information about the NEG. This includes the NEG’s
current and setpoint temperatures, the On Time which is the number of hours that
the NEG has been used, and the date the NEG was activated. There is also
information about the number of times the NEG has been activated and the date(s)of reactivation.
From this screen, there is a button to activate the NEG and also a button for NEG
bakeout. See Figure 3-89.
Figure 3-89 NEG Button

3 - 53

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.4.3 CONC Button
Information about the concentrator can be found through this button. After touching
the CONC button, another button, CONC CLEAN, will be displayed. If this buttonis active (black lettering), a concentrator cleanout can be run. Touch the CONC
CLEAN button if a concentrator cleanout is desired. If the CONC CLEAN button isgrayed out, a concentrator cleanout is in the process of running and a blue bar
graph, showing the progress of the cleanout, will be displayed. The CONC CLEAN
button will also be grayed out when a method is running or a sample loop is
installed. See Figure 3-90.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-90 CONC Button

3 - 54

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.5 TUNE STATUS Icon
This icon provides information about the state of the HAPSITE’s tune. If the TUNE
icon is green, the tune status is good. The TUNE icon will turn yellow when a tune
check will be run in the near future. The icon will turn blue when the HAPSITE is in
the process of tuning. If the TUNE icon is red, the AutoTune has failed. When
AutoTune fails, an AutoTune will need to be run again or the HAPSITE Smart PLUS
should be manually tuned. See Section Chapter 7, Tune, on page 7-1.
To run a tune check, press the RUN AUTOTUNE button, which is shown at thebottom of the screen. This button allows for an AutoTune to be run from the front
panel. The button will be grayed out when a tune is in progress. See Figure 3-91.
Figure 3-91 Run AutoTune

IPN 074-472-P1C

Touching the TUNE STATUS icon will also display the file name of the last tune
report, the time the instrument tuned, and the date the instrument tuned. It will also
show a countdown of the time to the next tune check.
The pressure of the MS at the last tune check will be displayed. If a method is notrunning and the last tune pressure was within range, an Acceptable message will
be displayed. If a method is being run or manual tune is open, the current MS
pressure will also appear.

3 - 55

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.5.1 TUNE REPORTS
When the TUNE STATUS icon has been touched, see Figure 3-92, a button, TUNEREPORT, will be shown at the bottom of the screen. This button accesses datafrom the last Tune Report. See Figure 3-93. For more information on Tune Reports,
see Chapter 6, Tune.
Figure 3-92 Tune Status Icon

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-93 Tune Report3 - 56

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.6 GPS Icon
The GPS icon will displays the latitude and longitude coordinates of the HAPSITE’s
position. It will also displays the number of satellites found on the GPS System. No
Signal will be displayed when a satellites are not detected. See Figure 3-94.
Figure 3-94 GPS Icon

3.7.1.7 HAPSITE SYSTEM Icon
This icon provides additional system information. This information includes theversion number of the software and firmware, the date and time, and the IP
address. It also provides the HAPSITE’s serial number. See Figure 3-95.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-95 HAPSITE SYSTEM Icon

3 - 57

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.7.1 HAPS Button
The HAPS button will provide the HAPSITE name, the HAPSITE’s Serial Number,and the current version number of the software. It also provides the date of thesoftware build. See Figure 3-96.
Figure 3-96 HAPS Button

3.7.1.7.2 FIRMWARE Button
The FIRMWARE button gives the version number of the GC board, the front panel,
the mass spectrometer and the probe. See Figure 3-97.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-97 FIRMWARE Button

3 - 58HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.1.7.3 DATE TIME Button
This button displays the present date and time. See Figure 3-98.
Figure 3-98 DATE TIME

3.7.1.7.4 NET Button
The NET button, see Figure 3-99, displays the IP address for the HAPSITE and theSubnet mask. This will be used when using the wireless connection on the Laptop.
See Chapter 4, Communications and Touch Screen Options.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-99 NET Button

3 - 59

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.7.2 Accessories
The Accessories icon will display information regarding the current configurationof the HAPSITE. If the Air Probe is installed, an icon of the probe will be displayed.
Touching the PROBE icon will display the installed version of the probe’s firmware.
The SKIP HEATER option allows for the HAPSITE to run when the probe is not attemperature. This is useful in cold climates, when it may be difficult for the probe
to heat to the set point temperature. See Figure 3-100.
Figure 3-100 Probe Icon

The Headspace Sampling System (HSS) icon will appear when it is attached to the
HAPSITE. Touching the HSS or SituProbe icon will display the information
regarding the firmware version and accessory’s heaters. See the Headspace
Sampling System and SituProbe Purge and Trap Sampling Systems’ manuals forfurther information.

3 - 60

IPN 074-472-P1C

If the Service Module is attached, the Service Module icon will be shown. Touching
the Service Module icon will display the installed version of the service module’s
firmware and the turbo speed of the service module’s pump. Options for attachingand detaching the service module can be found through this screen. For more
information on the service module, see the Service Module Operating Manual.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.8 EXIT Menu
The EXIT menu is located on the top row of the front panel. See Figure 3-101. This
option will access Turn Off, Reboot or Standby. Turn Off will shut down the
HAPSITE’s power. Reboot will reset the microprocessor in the HAPSITE andreload the drivers. It will also restart the operating system, the HAPSITE program
and the front panel program. The Standby option will put the system into Extended
Standby. Refer to section 3.8.1 on page 3-63 for Extended Standby instructions.

1 Touch EXIT. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight EXIT and push OK
SEL. See Figure 3-101.
Figure 3-101 Exit Menu

2 The three exit options will be displayed on the screen. There will also be a
Cancel button. Either touch or use the arrow keys to highlight the desired
choice on the screen. If using the push buttons, push OK SEL. See Figure3-102.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-102 EXIT Selections

3 A prompt will appear to confirm the selection. For example, if Turn Off isselected, a prompt Do you want to shutdown the HAPSITE? will appear on
the screen. Touch Yes or select Yes and push OK SEL to continue.

3 - 61

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 For Turn Off, the screen will become dark and the HAPSITE will turn off thepower.

4a For Reboot, the screen will become dark. In approximately one minute, thescreen will become active again and restart the preparation sequence.

4b For Standby, the Extended Standby screen will be displayed. See Section

IPN 074-472-P1C

3.8.1, Extended Standby, on page 3-63.

3 - 62

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.8.1 Extended Standby
Extended Standby is the preferred mode for storing the HAPSITE during periods ofinactivity. In this state, the NEG remains heated at 400 °C and the ion pumpcontinues pumping to maintain the vacuum in the Mass Spectrometer. The
HAPSITE turns off the heaters for all other components. When in Extended
Standby, remove the gas canisters to avoid consumption.
Extended Standby extends NEG pump life and makes start up faster. Proceed asfollows to place the system into Extended Standby.

1 Touch EXTENDED STANDBY. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight
EXTENDED STANDBY and push OK SEL.
Figure 3-103 Extended Standby

2 When the screen prompts, Do you want to go into Standby?, touch Yes.
Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight Yes and push OK SEL. See Figure3-104.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-104 Confirming Standby Option

3 - 63

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Alternately, touch EXIT or use the arrow keys to highlight EXIT. Push OK SEL.
See Figure 3-105.
Figure 3-105 Go To Standby Button

4 Touch Standby. See Figure 3-106.

5 When the screen prompts, Do you want to go into Standby?, touch Yes.
Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight Yes and push OK SEL. See Figure3-107.

3 - 64

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-106 Standby

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 3-107 Confirming Standby Option

6 The HAPSITE will go into Extended Standby. Remove the gas canisters. See
Figure 3-108.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-108 Extended Standby

3 - 65

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.8.1.1 End Standby

1 To End Standby, touch END STANDBY or using the arrow keys, highlight END
STANDBY and push OK SEL. See Figure 3-109.
Figure 3-109 END STANDBY

2 When the system prompts, Do you want to end standby?, touch Yes.
Alternately, highlight Yes using the arrow keys and push OK SEL. See Figure
3-110.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-110 Confirming End Standby

3 - 66

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.9 Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Headspace Sampling System in
Portable Mode
The Headspace Sampling System is used to test liquid and soil samples.
NOTE: See Chapter 13, Headspace Sampling System for more information on the
Headspace System. Refer to Section 2.7, Headspace Sampling System,on page 2-13 for assembly instructions.
The Concentrator method is used for analyzing samples with concentration levelsin the part per trillion range. See Chapter 6, Methods for additional information on
GC/MS methods.

1 Verify that the desired sampling configuration is installed (i.e., Concentrator).
2 Make sure that the Headspace Transfer Line is attached.
3 Place a 40 mL vial with either blank or sample into a Headspace well.
NOTE: Do not fill 40 mL vial more than 20 mL full. See Section 13.2.3, Loading
the Wells, on page 13-11 for detailed instructions and information on
loading the sample vials into the wells.

4 Place a clean, empty vial into a Headspace well.
WARNING
The Headspace needle is very sharp and the assembly
may be hot.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-111 Headspace Needle

3 - 67

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby, the HAPSITE willautomatically start preparing the default Headspace method. If the Headspacemethod that the HAPSITE begins preparing is not the desired one, refer to
Section 3.2, Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon,on page 3-13.

6 The HAPSITE will display the progress of its preparation. Refer to section 3.1
on page 3-1, Step 5 for more information.

6a If running a Headspace method that requires a Concentrator. The HAPSITE will
run a Concentrator Cleanout. Its progress will be shown by a bar graph. If theConcentrator Cleanout is not successful, refer to section Section 3.1.3,
Concentrator Cleanout Failure, on page 3-11.

7 When the HAPSITE has finished preparing, a SYSTEM READY message willappear with a prompt to press Survey or Analyze to begin sampling.
NOTE: A blank run is recommended before running a sample.

8 Using the touch screen, touch RUN ANALYZE. See Figure 3-112. If using thepush buttons, push ANALYZE RUN.

9 Gently insert the Headspace needle into the septum of the 40 mL vial
containing the blank/sample.

10 The screen will prompt Collecting Sample For. See Figure 3-113. The
Headspace is automatically collecting a sample. No action is required by theuser.

3 - 68IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-112 HSS Analyze

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 3-113 Collecting Sample

11 The next screen will prompt Sampling is Done. Again, no action is required by
the user. See Figure 3-114.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-114 Sampling Done HSS

12 By touching CMPD ID during the analysis, a list of detected compounds willappear. The CAS number, the Fit and the retention time for each compound will
also be displayed. This screen will also display the TIC (Total Ion Count) Max,the current TIC count and the time the method has been running.
NOTE: Touching a compound on the list will display its NIOSH database
information.

3 - 69

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12a The CMPD ID screen can also be accessed by using the arrow keys tohighlight CMPD ID and pushing OK SEL. See Figure 3-115.
Figure 3-115 Sample Compound ID View for HSS

13 To view the chromatogram while the method is running, touch GRAPH. See
Figure 3-116. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight GRAPH. Push OK
SEL.
NOTE: This screen will also display the TIC Max, the current TIC Count andthe time remaining.
NOTE: Touching the blue compound identification above the chromatogram
will display its Synonym and Exposure Limit information.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-116 Sample Chromatogram View for HSS

3 - 70HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14 At the end of the Headspace run, a prompt will appear. When prompted Insert
needle into a clean vial and press Continue to Purge, place the needle into
the empty vial. When finished, touch the Continue button or using the arrowkeys, highlight Continue. Push OK SEL.
Figure 3-117 Purge

NOTE: If purge is skipped, a full Headspace run must be completed to flush
the system. Once purge has been skipped, it is not possible tore-access it.

15 The METHOD FINISHED message will appear when the purge method has
ended. See Figure 3-118.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-118 Sample Method Finished for HSS

NOTE: Another Analyze (GC/MS) method can be started immediately after one
has completed. Depending on the temperature profile, the column may
need to cool before another run will begin.
NOTE: Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 for more
information on reviewing the data.

3 - 71

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.9.1 Quick Reference SOP —GC/MS Mode with HSS in Portable Mode
1 Verify that the desired sampling configuration (i.e., concentrator) is installed.
2 Attach the Transfer Line.
3 If the system is Shutdown or in Extended Standby, either power on the
HAPSITE or take the system out of Standby. If a Concentrator is installed, the
HAPSITE will begin preparing a Concentrator method. See Section 3.4.3,
Procedure for Running Concentrator Methods, on page 3-25.

3a If the SYSTEM IS NOT READY message is displayed, touch PREPAREANALYZE. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight PREPARE ANALYZEand push OK SEL.

4 Insert the sample/blank vial into a well and an empty vial into another empty
well. Place the needle into sample/ blank vial.

5 Touch RUN ANALYZE or push ANALYZE RUN when the SYSTEM READY
screen is displayed.

6 Remember: when the screen prompts, Collecting Sample Now For andSampling is Done, no action is required from the user.

7 When prompted, put the needle into the empty vial and press OK to purge.
8 When the run is complete, a METHOD FINISHED message is displayed.
9 Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 for
information on data review.

The Concentrator feature has increased sensitivity. Takecare to avoid saturating the HAPSITE.

3 - 72

IPN 074-472-P1C

CAUTION

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.10 SituProbe
For complete information on SituProbe methods, see Chapter 14, SituProbe. For
instructions on setting up the SituProbe, refer to Section 2.9, SituProbe, on page
2-27.

3.10.1 Procedure for SituProbe Operation
1 Verify that the desired sample configuration is installed (i.e., Concentrator).
2 Make sure that the Transfer Line is attached.
3 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby, the HAPSITE willautomatically start preparing a SituProbe method. If the SituProbe method thatthe HAPSITE begins preparing is not the desired one, refer to Section 3.2,
Selecting a Different Method Using the SELECT METHOD Icon, on page 3-13.

4 The HAPSITE will display the progress of its preparation. Refer to section 3.1,
Step 5 for more information.

5 If using the water vessel, fill the vessel to the top of the outlet connection. See
Figure 3-119.
Figure 3-119 SituProbe Vessel

IPN 074-472-P1C

Top Of Outlet
Connection

6 Insert probe into vessel or water source.
6a If running a SituProbe method that requires a Concentrator, the HAPSITE will
run a Concentrator Cleanout. Its progress will be shown by a bar graph. If theConcentrator Cleanout is not successful, refer to section on page 3-29.

7 When the HAPSITE has finished preparing, a SYSTEM READY message willappear with a prompt to press Survey or Analyze to begin sampling.
NOTE: A blank run is recommended before running a sample.

3 - 73

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8 Using the touch screen, touch RUN ANALYZE. If using the push buttons, push
ANALYZE RUN.
Figure 3-120 Running Analyze with SituProbe

9 The screen will prompt Collecting Sample For. The SituProbe is automaticallycollecting a sample. No action is required by the user.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-121 SituProbe Collecting Sample

3 - 74

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 The next screen will prompt Sampling is Done. See Figure 3-122. Again, no
action is required by the user.
Figure 3-122 SituProbe Sampling is Done

11 By touching the CMPD ID, a list of found compounds will appear. See Figure
3-123. The CAS number, the Fit and the retention time for each compound will
also be displayed. This screen will also display the TIC (Total Ion Count) Max,the current TIC count and the time remaining.
NOTE: Touching a compound on the list will display its NIOSH database
information.

11a The CMPD ID screen can also be accessed by using the arrow keys tohighlight CMPD ID and pushing OK SEL.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-123 Sample Compound ID View for SituProbe

3 - 75

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 To view the chromatogram while the method is running, touch GRAPH.
Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight GRAPH. Push OK SEL.
Figure 3-124 Graph View SituProbe

NOTE: This screen will also display the TIC Max, the current TIC Count andthe time remaining.

13 Touching the blue compound identification above the chromatogram will
display its NIOSH database information.

14 When finished, a METHOD FINISHED message will be displayed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 3-125 SituProbe Method Finished

NOTE: Another Analyze (GC/MS) method can be started immediately after
one has completed. Depending on the temperature profile, the column
may need to cool before another run will begin.
NOTE: Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 formore information on reviewing the data.

3 - 76

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3.10.2 Quick Reference SOP —GC/MS Mode with SituProbe in Portable Mode
1 Verify that the desired sampling configuration (i.e. concentrator) is installed.
2 Attach the Transfer Line.
3 If the system is Shutdown or in Extended Standby, either power on the
HAPSITE or take the system out of Standby. If a Concentrator is installed, the
HAPSITE will begin preparing a Concentrator method. See Section 3.4.3,
Procedure for Running Concentrator Methods, on page 3-25.

3a If the SYSTEM IS NOT READY message is displayed, touch PREPAREANALYZE. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight PREPARE ANALYZEand push OK SEL.

4 Optional: Fill vessel to the top of the outlet connection.
5 Place probe in vessel or water source.
6 Touch RUN ANALYZE or push ANALYZE RUN when the SYSTEM READY
screen is displayed.

7 Remember: when the screen prompts, Collecting Sample Now For andSampling Is Done, no action is required from the user.

8 When the run is complete, a METHOD FINISHED prompt will appear.
9 Refer to Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 for
information on data review.

IPN 074-472-P1C

CAUTION
The Concentrator feature has increased sensitivity. Takecare to avoid saturating the HAPSITE.

3 - 77

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

3 - 78HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 4
Wireless and Touch Screen Options
4.1 Wireless Option
4.1.1 Introduction
The HAPSITE Smart Plus has a wireless communication option.

DANGER
The HAPSITE contains a wireless transmitter/receiverthat emits electromagnetic radiation (EMR). This
radiation in a tactical or operational environment may
potentially be used to locate the HAPSITE and its
operators. This radiation also has the potential todetonate some types of unexploded ordnance (UXO), or
improvised explosive devices (IEDs), or both, if the
HAPSITE is transmitting in the safety exclusion areaaround the device(s). There is a hardware switch to turnoff the wireless radio so that the HAPSITE may still be
used in areas where these hazards are a concern.
Consult applicable regulations and policies when using
the HAPSITE with the wireless device active in suchenvironments.

4.1.2 Regulatory Compliance Information for UNITED STATES Users

IPN 074-472-P1C

This section of the Operating Manual lists FCC compliance information for the
Hapsite Smart Plus system that contains the wireless communication option.
NOTE: This equipment contains an OEM Embedded Wireless Bridge(Ethernet to Wireless LAN) Module from Quatech Inc.
FCC ID: F4AWLNG1This device compiles with Part15 of the FCC rules and is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

4-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTIONTo maintain compliance with FCC standards andregulations and to ensure the proper operation of thewireless communication system used within the Hapsite
Smart Plus instrument, ONLY use the antenna that was
originally supplied with the instrument. If you damage theoriginal antenna please contact INFICON’s service
department for a replacement antenna (see Chapter 18
for contact information).
4.1.2.1 FCC Statement

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which thereceiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for assistance.

4.1.2.2 FCC RF Exposure Statement

WARNINGTo satisfy RF exposure requirements, this device and its
antenna must operate with a separation distance of atleast 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

4-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed toprovide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following measures:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.1.3 Regulatory Compliance Information for CANADIAN Users
This section of the Operating Manual lists Industry Canada (IC) complianceinformation for the Hapsite Smart Plus system that contains the wirelesscommunication option.
NOTE: This equipment contains an OEM Embedded Wireless Bridge(Ethernet to Wireless LAN) Module from Quatech Inc.
IC: 3913A-WLNG1This device compiles with RSS-210 of Industry Canada (IC) and is subject tothe following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

4.1.3.1 Industry Canada (IC) Notices
This equipment complies with Canadian RSS-210.

CAUTION

IPN 074-472-P1C

This device has been designed to operate with anantenna having a maximum gain of 5.0 dB. An antenna
having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulationsof Industry Canada (IC). The required antenna impedanceis 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and gain
should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not
more than required for successful communications.

4.1.4 Regulatory Compliance Information for EUROPEAN Users
This section of the Operating Manual lists CE and R&TTE compliance information
for the Hapsite Smart Plus system that contains the wireless communication
option.
The Hapsite Smart Plus is marked with the following symbol:

4-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualThis symbol indicates compliance with the essential requirements of Directive
73/23/EEC and the essential requirements of articles 3.1(b), 3.2 and 3.3 of
Directive 1999/5/EC. Such marking is indicative that this equipment meets orexceeds the following technical standards:
EN 300 328-2 — Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters(ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; data transmission equipment
operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulations
techniques.



EN 301 489-17 — Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters(ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment andservices; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission
systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment.

EN 61010-1 — Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control and laboratory use.

4.1.4.1 European Usage Restrictions

CAUTION
European usage restrictions apply to this equipment!
The end user must comply with the usage restrictions
noted in the table below when operating this equipmentin the counties that have restrictions.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Hapsite Smart Plus is marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply to this equipment. Such
marking indicates that the end user must comply with the following statements
about usage restrictions:4-4To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country inwhich the access point is installed.

This instrument can be used as shown in Table 4-1:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 4-1 Country - Restriction

Countries

Restrictions

FranceOutdoor use limited to 10mW e.i.r.p. within theband 2454 to 2483.5 MHz.

Italy

If used outside of own premises, generalauthorization is required.

Luxembourg

General authorization is required for public
service.

Romania

On a secondary basis. Individual license required.

Austria, Denmark, Finland,
Germany, Greece, Iceland,
Ireland, Liechtenstein,
Luxembourg, The Netherlands,
Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, The United Kingdom

None

4.1.4.2 European EMC Compliance Statement

IPN 074-472-P1C

Table 4-2 European EMC Compliance Statements

EnglishHereby, INFICON Inc. declares that this HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MS
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisionsof Directive 1999/5/EC.

FinnishINFICON Inc. vakuuttaa täten että HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MS
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Dutch

Hierbij verklaart INFICON Inc. dat het toestel HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable
GC/MS in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante
bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Bij deze verklaart INFICON Inc. dat deze HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MS
voldoet aan de essentiële eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van
Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.

FrenchPar la présente INFICON Inc. déclare que l’appareil HAPSITE Smart Plus
Portable GC/MS est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

DanishUndertegnede INFICON Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr HAPSITE
Smart Plus Portable GC/MS overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

4-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 4-2 European EMC Compliance Statements (continued)

GermanHiermit erklärt INFICON Inc. dass sich dieser HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable
GC/MS in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den
anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet”. (BMWi)
Hiermit erklärt INFICON Inc. die Übereinstimmung des Gerätes HAPSITE
Smart Plus Portable GC/MS mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den
anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien)

SwedishHärmed intygar INFICON Inc. att denna HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MSstår I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

GreekΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ INFICON Inc. ΔΗΛΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ HAPSITE Smart Plus
Portable GC/MS ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕIΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ

Italian

Con la presente INFICON Inc. dichiara che questo HAPSITE Smart Plus
Portable GC/MS è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

SpanishPor medio de la presente INFICON Inc. declara que el HAPSITE Smart Plus
Portable GC/MS cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Portuguese

INFICON Inc. declara que este HAPSITE Smart Plus Portable GC/MS está
conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.

This device has been tested and certified according to the safety standard EN
61010-1: 2001 and is intended to be used in accordance with the information
provided in this manual. For additional information concerning the directives andstandards that this instrument complies with, please refer to the Declaration ofConformity that is located in the front of this manual.

4.1.5 Wireless Range
The HAPSITE Smart Plus is equipped with an 802.11b/g wireless adapter. The
typical range for a signal is 300 ft. (100 meters) line of sight with no obstructions.
The following may degrade the signal:
Metal buildingsConcrete structures

Electric devices in the area

Other possible obstructions may exist depending on location.

4-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

4.1.4.3 European Safety Compliance Statement

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.1.6 Turning On the RadioIf wireless communication is desired, the radio must be turned on. This procedure
gives instructions for turning on the radio.

DANGER
When the HAPSITE radio is on, even if wirelesscommunication is not being used, a radio signal is beingtransmitted. The only way to eliminate the radio signal is
to turn the radio off.

1 Open the front panel of the HAPSITE.
2 Remove the cover from the power switch (for the wireless radio). It is locatedon the far left hand side. To remove, unscrew the cover by turning it
counter-clockwise. See Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Unscrewing Wireless Cap

IPN 074-472-P1C

DANGER
The HAPSITE contains a wireless transmitter/receiver thatemits electromagnetic radiation (EMR). This radiation in atactical or operational environment may potentially be
used to locate the HAPSITE and its operators. This
radiation also has the potential to detonate some types of
unexploded ordnance (UXO), or improvised explosive
devices (IEDs), or both, if the HAPSITE is transmitting inthe safety exclusion area around the device(s). There is a
hardware switch to turn off the wireless radio so that the
HAPSITE may still be used in areas where these hazards
are a concern. Consult applicable regulations and policies
when using the HAPSITE with the wireless device active
in such environments.

4-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Press the button until a click is heard. The green lights adjacent to “Radio” and“WLAN” should illuminate. When the green lights are illuminated, the power tothe wireless radio is on. See Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Pushing Wireless Button

4 Replace the switch cover by placing it over the switch. Turn it clock-wise until
finger tight.

4.1.7 Establishing Communication
Wireless communication for the HAPSITE Smart Plus is set up at the factory. See
the following paragraphs to verify the set up or correct any communication issues.
HINT: Setting up communications in Plus IQ requires the user to be in Advanced
Mode. See section 8.9.1, Changing Access Levels, on page 8-24 fordirections to set up this mode.

The HAPSITE Smart Plus leaves the factory in Normal operating mode. Setting up
communication requires the user to be in Advanced Mode. For information on
setting the user level, see section 8.9.1, Changing Access Levels, on page 8-24.
To set up wireless communication between the HAPSITE and Laptop computer,
Plus IQ must be configured to communicate with the HAPSITE by setting up the IP
address. See section 8.6, Establishing Communications between the HAPSITE
and Laptop Computer, on page 8-13 for instructions.

4-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

4.1.7.1 Setting the User Access Level

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.1.7.2 Setting Up Plus IQ for Communication with the HAPSITE
The first step to communication between the HAPSITE and Laptop is to set up a
Sensor Icon in Plus IQ. This is the HAPSITE Icon seen on the bottom of the System
Setup window of Plus IQ. See section 8.6.1, Setting Up Communications, on page
8-13 for instructions.
The second step to setting up communications is to set the IP address of theLaptop computer for direct communication with the HAPSITE. Instructions for thisare found in section 8.6.2, Configuring the HAPSITE for Communications, on page
8-15.
In order for wireless communication between the Laptop and HAPSITE Plus to be
successful, the radio on the Laptop computer must be turned on. The basic steps
for configuring the Laptop for wireless communication are:

1 Enable the radio on the Laptop computer.
2 Scan for available Wireless Networks.
3 Choose HAPSITE Plus.
4 Create a profile for the Wireless Connection.
5 Connect to the HAPSITE Smart Plus wireless network.
6 Verify the connection protocol is 802.11b.
7 If the connection protocol is not 802.11b, modify the profile.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Due to differences in computer models and brands, refer to the User’s Guide of theLaptop for specific instructions on setting up the wireless radio. The Dell™ website
has a section on wireless communications called the Wireless Center. This section
can be accessed at http://support.dell.com by clicking the Technical Support tab,then selecting Wireless Center. The content applies to many manufacturer’s laptop
computers, in addition to Dell Laptop computers.

4-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.1.8 Wireless Module Indicator Lights
Located on the Wireless Module inside the HAPSITE front cover are four indicatorlights.
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When illuminated, the radio is enabled.
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When illuminated, the wireless connection islinked to the laptop computer. The LED blinks
when transmitting or receiving data.
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When illuminated, the HAPSITE isconnected via a crossover cable to the
Laptop computer. The LED blinks whentransmitting or receiving data. The LED will
be extinguished if the crossover cable isdisconnected.
586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When illuminated, the HAPSITE 586
processor is linked to a wired or wirelessconnection.

4.1.9 Turning Off the RadioIf wireless communication is not desired, the radio on the HAPSITE Smart Plus canbe turned off. See the following procedure for direction on how to turn off the radio.
NOTE: When the HAPSITE radio is on, even if the wireless communication is not
being used, a radio signal is being transmitted. The only way to eliminate
the radio signal is to turn off the radio.

The HAPSITE contains a wireless transmitter/receiver thatemits electromagnetic radiation (EMR). This radiation in atactical or operational environment may potentially be used tolocate the HAPSITE and its operators. This radiation also has
the potential to detonate some types of unexploded ordnance(UXO), or improvised explosive devices (IEDs), or both, if the
HAPSITE is transmitting in the safety exclusion area around thedevice(s). Discussed below is a hardware switch to turn off thewireless radio so that the HAPSITE may still be used in areas
where these hazards are a concern. Consult applicableregulations and policies when using the HAPSITE with thewireless device active in such environments.

4 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

DANGER

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1 Open the front panel of the HAPSITE.
2 Remove the cover from the power switch (for the wireless radio). It is locatedon the far left hand side. To remove, unscrew the cover by turning it
counter-clockwise. See Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Unscrewing Wireless Cap

3 Press the button until a click is heard. The green lights adjacent to “Radio” and“WLAN” should extinguish. When the green lights are extinguished, the power
to the wireless radio is off. See Figure 4-4.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-4 Pushing Wireless Button

4 Replace the switch cover by placing it over the switch. Turn it clock-wise until
finger tight.

4 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.2 The MAIN Menu
The MAIN menu contains the following options: View Results, Smart Interface,
Adjust Brightness and Touch Screen. See Figure 4-5. For information regarding
View Results, refer to section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32. The
Smart Interface option will run the HAPSITE Smart Plus using the HAPSITE
Smart software. This makes transitioning from the Smart Software to the Smart
Plus software easier. Adjust Brightness changes the level of lighting on the touch
screen. The Touch Screen option will enable or disable the touch screen. The
Touch Screen option also contains a touch screen calibration feature.

4.2.1 Smart Interface
To convert to the HAPSITE software, follow the procedure below.

1 Touch MAIN. See Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 MAIN Button

Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Arrow Keys

3 Touch Smart Interface or using the arrow keys, highlight Smart Interface andpush OK SEL. See Figure 4-7.

4 - 12

IPN 074-472-P1C

2 Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight MAIN and push OK SEL. See

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 4-7 Smart Interface

4 The HAPSITE Smart software will be displayed. See Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 HAPSITE Smart Screen

IPN 074-472-P1C

5 Touch CLOSE to exit the Smart Interface.
Figure 4-9 Closing the Smart Interface

4 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.2.2 Adjust Brightness
The brightness level of the Touch Screen can be adjusted to make viewing easier.

1 Touch MAIN or using the arrow keys, highlight MAIN and touch OK SEL. See
Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 MAIN Button

2 Touch Adjust Brightness. See Figure 4-11.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-11 Adjust Brightness

3 A scroll bar will appear in the middle of the screen. See Figure 4-12.

4 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 4-12 Scroll Bar

4 To darken the screen, slide the bar to the left. To brighten, slide to the right.
Touch OK to accept the changes.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-13 OK Button

5 To completely darken the screen, touch Black Screen.
Figure 4-14 Black Screen

4 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 To exit the Black Screen mode, push the SYSTEM and HELP Buttons together
at the same time. See Figure 4-15.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-15 Exiting the Black Screen

4 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.3 Touch Screen Options
NOTE: If the Touch Screen freezes, pushing the MENU and ESC keys at the sametime will turn off the system. Hold both keys until the systems powers
down. Turn system back on with the POWER button.

4.3.1 Calibrating The Touch Screen
If the touch point does not align with the icon pressed, a calibration may benecessary. For example, when directly pressing the info icon, the Help feature (theicon directly next to info) is accessed. When similar problems occur, it is necessary
to calibrate the touch screen. Proceed as follows to calibrate.

1 Touch MAIN or using the arrow keys, highlight MAIN and touch OK SEL. See
Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 MAIN Button

2 From the dropdown menu, touch Touch Screen. Alternately, use the arrow
IPN 074-472-P1C

keys to highlight Touch Screen and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Selecting Touch Screen

4 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Touch Calibrate or push OK SEL when Calibrate is highlighted. See Figure
4-18.
Figure 4-18 Calibrate Button

4 A prompt will appear to confirm that touch screen calibration is desired. To
continue, touch Yes or highlight OK with the arrow keys. Then push OK SEL.
See Figure 4-19.

CAUTION
Do not calibrate the front panel touch screen using thefront panel emulator on the laptop.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-19 Calibration Confirmation

4 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Instructions on screen calibration will appear. Touch OK or highlight OK andpush OK SEL. See Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20 Calibration Instructions

CAUTION
Ignore the cursor when calibrating. Touching the cursor
during calibration may improperly calibrate thetouchscreen.

6 Touch precisely in the center of each of the four circles when prompted Touchthe targets to Calibrate. See Figure 4-21.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-21 Calibration In Progress

NOTE: The circles will appear on the screen one at a time. After touching thecenter, the next circle will appear.

4 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Touch OK in the next ten seconds if the calibration was accurate for all fourtargets. Otherwise, the touch screen calibration will automatically restart after
the ten seconds have passed. See Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Restart Calibration

8 When calibration is complete, the HAPSITE will return to the main screen.

4.3.2 Enabling/ Disabling the Touch Screen
If desired, the touch screen can be disabled and the HAPSITE can be operated
completely by the push buttons. This will prevent the screen from being
inadvertently touched during usage. The next two procedures outline how todisable and enable the touch screen.
4.3.2.1 Disabling the Touch Screen

1 Touch MAIN or using the arrow keys, highlight MAIN and touch OK SEL. See
Figure 4-23 Display Button

4 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-23.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 From the drop-down menu, touch Touch Screen. Alternately, use the arrow
keys to highlight Touch Screen and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Touch Screen Option

3 Touch Disable or push OK SEL when Disable is highlighted. See Figure 4-25.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-25 Disable Button

4 The Touch Screen buttons will no longer function.

4 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.3.2.2 Enabling the Touch Screen

1 Using the arrow keys, highlight MAIN and touch OK SEL. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 MAIN Button

2 Use the arrow keys to highlight Touch Screen and push OK SEL.
See Figure 4-27.

3 Use the arrow keys to highlight Enable. Push OK SEL.
4 The Touch Screen buttons will now be functional.

4 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-27 Touch Screen Option

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.4 The USB Drive
4.4.1 Copying Files to the USB
Data files can be saved to the USB drive on the HAPSITE.
NOTE: Data is always saved to the hard drive of the HAPSITE. If the laptop isconnected, the data file will also be saved to the laptop. The USB drive isdesigned to be used when the laptop is not connected to the HAPSITE, but
the laptop will be used later for further analysis.

1 Insert the USB drive into the USB port which is located on the top left hand side.
See Figure 4-28.
NOTE: When inserting the USB drive, the solid portion should be on the right.
Figure 4-28 USB Drive

2 Close the front panel of the HAPSITE.
3 Touch the Accessories icon. Alternately, push the STAT button until the

IPN 074-472-P1C

Accessories icon is highlighted. See Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Accessories Icon

4 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Touch the USB icon.Touch Copy to USB or using the arrow keys, highlight
Copy to USB and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 USB Icon

5 When the system prompts, What type of files do you want to copy?, selectthe desired option. See Figure 4-31.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-31 Type of File4 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 Touch the desired file for copying and touch Select. Alternately, use the arrow
keys to highlight the desired file and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-32.
NOTE: If there is only one file on the drive, this option will not be available.
Figure 4-32 Select Files

7 Touch the desired copying option or use the arrow keys to highlight the desired
option and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-33.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-33 Copy Files

4 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8 A bar will be displayed on the screen to show the download’s progress. Touch
Close to return to the Accessories page and complete the download. If
another download is desired, touch the USB icon again.See Figure 4-34.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-34 Progress Bar

4 - 26

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.4.2 Copying Files From the USB
The Copying Files from the USB button can be used to transfer methods from thelaptop to the HAPSITE. To copy files to the USB, use the following procedure.

1 Insert the USB drive into the USB port which is located on the top left hand side.
See Figure 4-35.
NOTE: When inserting the USB drive, the solid portion should be on the right.
Figure 4-35 Inserting USB Drive

2 Close the front panel of the HAPSITE.
3 Touch the Accessories icon. Alternately, push the STAT button until theAccessories icon is highlighted. See Figure 4-36.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-36 Accessories Icon

4 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Touch the USB icon. Touch COPY FROM USB or using the arrow keys,
highlight COPY FROM USB and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 USB Icon

5 If only one file is available, then the download will start automatically. If multiple
methods reside on the USB, the following screen will appear. Touch the desired
method and touch Select. See Figure 4-38.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-38 Select File4 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 A progress bar will be shown on the screen. Touch Close to return to the USB
screen. If another download is desired, touch the USB icon again. See Figure
4-39.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-39 Progress Bar

4 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.4.3 Updating the Front Panel Software from the USB
Periodically, there may be updates to front panel software. The software can be
updated using a USB drive.

1 Insert the USB drive into the USB port which is located inside the front panelon the top left hand side.
NOTE: When inserting the USB drive, the solid portion should be on the right.

2 Close the front panel of the HAPSITE.
3 Touch the Accessories icon. Alternately, push the STAT button until theAccessories icon is highlighted. See Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 Accessories Icon

4 Touch the USB icon. Touch UPDATE FROM USB or using the arrow keys,
highlight UPDATE FROM USB and push OK SEL. See Figure 4-41.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-41 USB Icon

4 - 30HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Touch the desired update and touch Select. See Figure 4-42
NOTE: If there is not an update file on the USB drive, a message stating that
there is not an available update will appear.
Figure 4-42 Update From USB

6 A confirmation screen will appear. To continue, touch Yes. Otherwise, touch
No. Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight Yes and push OK SEL. See
Figure 4-43.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-43 Confirmation Screen

4 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 The following screen will be displayed while the system is updating. Touch
Done to exit this screen. See Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Updating HAPSITE

8 The screen will prompt, Do you want to install more updates? If anotherupdate is desired, touch More. To close out of this feature, touch Finish.
Alternately, use the arrow keys to highlight the desired option and push OK
SEL. See Figure 4-45.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 4-45 Installing Updates

4 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4.4.4 Retrieving Files from the USB
Once files have been saved to the USB drive, they can be transferred to the Laptop
for analysis.
NOTE: There are many ways to access files on the Laptop. These instructions
demonstrate only one way to retrieve Data Files.

1 Insert the USB drive into the USB port in the Laptop.
2 Right-click on the START button.
3 Left-click on Explore. This will open the Start Menu window.
4 Left-click to highlight the file to be transferred.
5 Right-click and select Copy.
6 Right-click in the destination directory and select Paste.
NOTE: The files need to be placed in the correct directory.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: Use the Safely Remove Hardware feature of Microsoft Windows
before unplugging the USB drive from the PC. Failure to do so can
corrupt the USB drive. The HAPSITE USB can be unplugged without
using this safety option.

4 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

4 - 34

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 5
Operating HAPSITE in Laptop Mode
5.1 Starting the HAPSITE in Laptop Mode
Starting the HAPSITE in Laptop Mode refers to using the HAPSITE in conjunction
with the Laptop computer.
NOTE: See Chapter 8, Plus IQ Software for additional information on the Plus IQ
Software installed on the Laptop computer.
Required Materials


HAPSITE (AM)Internal standard gas canisterCarrier gas canisterCharged battery



Probe



Crossover cable

Laptop computer

IPN 074-472-P1C



Mouse (optional)Power supply

AC To DC Power Converter power supply, unless powered by a Service
Module.

Procedure

1 Assemble the HAPSITE as shown in Section 2.4, Basic Assembly, on page 2-5.
2 Press the POWER button on the front panel to turn on the HAPSITE. The
HAPSITE takes 1-2 minutes to power on.
NOTE: If desired and equipped, the HAPSITE can be used with the Laptop
computer connected via the wireless connection. Refer to Chapter 4,
Wireless and Touch Screen Options for additional information on
set-up and usage.

3 The Laptop computer needs to be powered on. Locate the power cord andmouse (optional). Plug them into the appropriate places on the back of thecomputer. Open the Laptop and press the power button.

5-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.2 Survey Mode
The Survey Mode is used for quick analysis and tentative results. The run period isdetermined by the user, but it is generally two minutes long.
Overview:
Sample the air away from the area of concern for one minute to determine thebackground composition.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the probe. Do not allow
liquids to enter the Probe.
When the background has been determined, sample directly over the area ofconcern to see what additional chemicals are present.

NOTE: See Chapter 6, Methods, for additional information on the Survey method.

1 Open the Plus IQ software by double-clicking on the icon shownin Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 Plus IQ Icon

page 3-1 or section 3.8.1 on page 3-63), the HAPSITE will automatically start
preparing the start up method. If this method is not the desired method, see
Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page 5-7.

3 The following message will appear on the Laptop during the power onsequence. See Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 NEG Full Power

5-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

2 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby (refer to section 3.1 on

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 As part of the HAPSITE’s preparation, it will run AutoTune. If AutoTune
successfully runs and completes, the AutoTune OK message will appear. Click
OK. See Figure 5-3. If AutoTune fails, see Section 7.4, AutoTune Failure, on
page 7-6. When the final results message is displayed, click OK.
Figure 5-3 AutoTune Complete

5 The HAPSITE will check pressures and automatically heat all necessary zones
to the setpoint temperatures specific to the selected method. Progress will be
indicated by a bar graph.

6 Click the RUN METHOD icon. Click on the Survey folder. Click on the folder ofthe desired configuration, and then click on the method folder. See Steps 2-4 ofsection 5.3.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the Probe. Do not allow
liquids to enter the Probe.

7 Click the RUN button on the pop-up window or from the control panel on thescreen. See Figure 5-4.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-4 Run Button

8 Sample the background for one minute and note the TIC.
9 Hold the Probe over the sample of interest for up to 1 minute. If the TIC begins
to rise, slowly back the Probe away from the sample. If the TIC does not riseafter a full minute, move the probe away from the sample.

9a A peak may appear if the compound present is >10 ppm. A compound
identification may also be present on the HAPSITE screen.
NOTE: No response may indicate either the compound present is less than thedetection limit, or that no detectable compound is present.

5-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 Monitor the Probe distance indicator bar on the HAPSITE screen for guidance.
See Figure 5-5. The bar rises as the TIC increases. To avoid saturation, remove
the Probe from the sample when the bar is high and turns yellow.
Figure 5-5 Survey Probe Distance Indicator Bar

11 Move the probe away from the sample of interest. Monitor the TIC count until
the level returns to the initial background level that was noted in step 6.

12 Click on the STOP button (in the center of the control panel on the right side of
the screen) to stop the sampling process and save the data. See Figure 5-6 andFigure 5-7.

NOTE: Remember that this is a tentative identification. For a more positive
identification, run an Analyze (GC/MS) method for confirmation of theresults.

5-4

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-6 Stop Button

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-7 Sample Survey Run Complete

13 To view the data, note the data file name and click on the Data Review icon.

IPN 074-472-P1C

This icon is located in the Setup System window of the Plus IQ software. See
Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Data Review Icon

14 Select the Survey folder and locate the data file that was noted. Refer to Figure5-7. See also Chapter 9, Data Review.
NOTE: If the HAPSITE has been left unattended, the message SYSTEM IS NOTREADY may appear. To begin preparing the system again, either touch
PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE and push OK
SEL.

5-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.2.1 Quick Reference SOP — Running Survey Mode
1 Either power on the HAPSITE or take the HAPSITE out of Extended Standby.
2 Double-click the Plus IQ software icon.
3 Wait for heaters to reach the set temperatures.
4 Select the desired method. See Steps 2-4 of section 5.3 on page 5-7.
5 Click the RUN button in the pop-up window.
6 Sample background for one minute.
CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the Probe. Do not allow
liquids to enter the Probe.

7 Hold the Probe over the sample for one minute or until observing a response.
8 Press Stop to stop the sampling and save the data.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: This is a tentative identification. For more positive identification, run an
Analyze (GC/MS) method.

5-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.3 Selecting a New Method
1 Click the Abort button. See Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Aborting Method

2 Double-click on the Run Method icon. A dialog is displayed to choose the typeof method to run. This example is an Analyze (GC/MS) run, so double-click the
GCMS folder. See Figure 5-10.
NOTE: Use the buttons at the top of the dialog to choose the methods on the
HAPSITE.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-10 Choosing the Mode of Operation

5-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Choose a folder that matches the physical configuration of the HAPSITE. In thisexample the Sample Loop is installed; double-click the Loop folder. See Figure
5-11.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-11 Selecting the Physical Configuration

5-8

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Click the desired method and then click OK. See Figure 5-12
Figure 5-12 Selecting the Method

5 The software will check the pressure in the gas canisters, heat up all necessary

IPN 074-472-P1C

components, run an AutoTune (if required), and make tune adjustments asnecessary. A Concentrator Cleanout will also be run if needed. The process
may take up to 20 minutes.

6 When it is done heating, a prompt will appear to indicate the HAPSITE is readyto run a sample. Click RUN.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the Probe. Do not place thesample Probe in liquids while sampling.

5-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.4 Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Loop
This method is used for analyzing samples with concentration levels in the low partper million (ppm) to high part per billion (ppb) range. This can be used after Survey
to detect and/ or confirm unknowns in the environment. See Chapter 6, Methods
for additional information on (GC/MS) methods.

WARNING
Remember that the Survey method must be followed by
an Analyze (GC/MS) method in order to give a positive
identification of the unknown.
This section will describe the process required to run a sample with the Sample
Loop installed. Make sure that the Sample Loop is installed before turning on or
taking the HAPSITE out of Extended Standby. Refer to Section 2.4, Basic
Assembly, on page 2-5 and Section 2.10.1, Installing the Sample Loop, on page
2-31.

1 Double-click the Plus IQ icon to open the software. See Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Plus IQ Icon

2 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby (refer to section 3.1 on

3 As part of the preparation progress, it will heat all necessary components,
check pressures and run an AutoTune if necessary. Progress of the preparation
will be shown as a bar graph on the Laptop screen. If AutoTune fails, see
Section 7.4, AutoTune Failure, on page 7-6. When the final results message isdisplayed, see Figure 5-14, click OK.
Figure 5-14 AutoTune Complete

5 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

page 3-1 or section 3.8.1 on page 3-63), the HAPSITE will automatically start
preparing the start up Loop method. If this method is not the desired method,
see Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page 5-7.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 The HAPSITE will check pressures and automatically heat up all necessary
zones to the setpoint temperatures specific to the selected method. Progress
will be indicated by a bar graph.

5 If this method is not the desired method, see Section 5.3, Selecting a New
Method, on page 5-7.

6 Click the RUN METHOD icon. Click on the GC/MS folder. Click on the folder ofthe desired configuration and then click on the method folder. See Steps 2-4 ofsection 5.3.

7 Click RUN button on the pop-up window or from the control panel on the Laptop
screen. See Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 Run Button

8 When the HAPSITE screen prompts Collect Sample Now, place the probe
over sample for the specified amount of time.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample with the probe. Do not place thesample Probe in liquids while sampling.

9 Move the probe away from the sample when the screen prompts Sampling
IPN 074-472-P1C

Done.

10 As the method runs, the chromatogram will begin to appear on the screen. See
Figure 5-16 for an example of a chromatogram in progress.

5 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-16 Chromatogram in Progress

11 Wait for the method to run to completion. Figure 5-17 is an example of a

IPN 074-472-P1C

finished run. The HAPSITE screen will also display a METHOD FINISHED
message.

5 - 12

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-17 Sample Complete

12 Review results at the end of the run.
13 To view the data, note the data file name and click on the Data Review icon in
the Setup System window of the Plus IQ software. See Figure 5-18.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-18 Data Review Icon

14 Select the Loop folder and locate the data file that was just run. Full instructions
for data review are found in Chapter 9, Data Review.
NOTE: If the HAPSITE has been left unattended, the message SYSTEM IS NOTREADY may appear. To begin preparing the system again, either touch
PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE and push OK
SEL.

5 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.4.1 Quick Reference SOP — Running Analyze (GC/MS) Loop Method
1 Verify that the Sample Loop is installed.
2 Power on or take the HAPSITE out of Extended Standby.
3 The HAPSITE will begin to prepare the start up Loop method. See Section 5.3,
Selecting a New Method, on page 5-7 if the start up method is not the desired
method.

4 Double-click the Plus IQ icon to open the software.
5 If the HAPSITE runs an AutoTune, press OK when the screen prompts.
6 Click the RUN METHOD icon and choose the method that has been prepared.
Refer to Steps 2-4 of section 5.3 on page 5-7.

7 Click the Run button in the pop-up window of the software
8 When the screen prompts, Collect Sample Now, hold the probe over the
sample for the specified amount of time.

9 Remove the Probe from the sample when the screen prompts, Sampling Is
Done.

10 Let the method run to completion.

IPN 074-472-P1C

11 Review data when run is complete.

5 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.5 Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Concentrator
5.5.1 Tri- Bed Concentrator
This method is used for analyzing samples with concentration levels in the low partper billion to high part per trillion range. It is used when a compound is suspected,
but Survey does not show an increase in TIC count. See Chapter 6, Methods, foradditional information on Analyze (GC/MS) methods.

5.5.2 The Tenax Concentrator
This method is also used for analyzing samples with concentration levels in the low
part per billion to high part per trillion range. The Tenax’s use is similar to that of the
Tri-Bed. However, the Tenax concentrator will not effectively concentratecompounds with boiling points below 80 degrees Centigrade. See Chapter 6,
Methods, for additional information on Analyze (GC/MS) methods.

WARNINGThe Tenax Concentrator cannot detect compounds withboiling points below 80 degrees centigrade.
For help installing the Concentrator, refer to Section 2.10.3, Installing the Tri-Bed
or Tenax Concentrator, on page 2-34 for instructions. Once installed, theConcentrator must be cleaned before sampling begins.

1 Verify that the Concentrator is installed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

2 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby (refer to section 3.1 on
page 3-1 or section 3.8.1 on page 3-63), the HAPSITE will automatically start
preparing the start up Concentrator method. If the method that the HAPSITE
begins preparing is not the desired one, refer to Section 5.3, Selecting a New
Method, on page 5-7.

3 Power on the Laptop by pushing the Power button. Open Plus IQ Software by
double-clicking on the Plus IQ Icon. See Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Plus IQ Software Icon

4 During the preparation, the HAPSITE will heat all necessary components,
check pressures and run an AutoTune if necessary. Progress of the preparation
will be shown as a bar graph on the Laptop screen. If AutoTune fails, refer to
Section 7.4, AutoTune Failure, on page 7-6. When the final results message isdisplayed, click OK. See Figure 5-20.

5 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-20 AutoTune Complete

5 A Concentrator Cleanout will also be run as part of the HAPSITE’s preparation.
If the Cleanout is successful, a green SYSTEM READY message will be
displayed. If the Cleanout is unsuccessful, refer to Section 3.1.3, Concentrator
Cleanout Failure, on page 3-11. If this method is not the desired method, refer
to Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page 5-7.

6 Click the RUN METHOD icon. Click on the GC/MS folder. Click on the folder ofthe desired configuration and then click on the method folder. See Steps 2-4 ofsection 5.3 on page 5-7.

7 Once all temperature zones have reached their setpoints, a prompt will appear
Press RUN to start method.

8 Click RUN button on the pop-up window or from the control panel on thescreen.
Figure 5-21 Run Button

specified amount of time. See Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Collecting Sample for Concentrator

5 - 16

IPN 074-472-P1C

9 When the HAPSITE screen prompts Collect Sample Now, sample for theHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 When prompted Sampling is Done on the HAPSITE screen, remove the probefrom the sample source. See Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Sampling Done For Concentrator

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample to the Probe. Do not place thesample probe in liquids while sampling.

11 The message METHOD FINISHED will appear on the HAPSITE screen when
the run is complete. See Figure 5-24.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-24 Method Finished for Concentrator

CAUTION
The Concentrator feature has increased sensitivity. Takecare to avoid saturating the HAPSITE.

5 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: If the HAPSITE has been left unattended, the message SYSTEM IS NOTREADY may appear. To begin preparing the system again, either touch
PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE and push OK
SEL.

5.5.3 Quick Reference SOP — Tri-Bed Concentrator Method
1 Verify that the Concentrator is installed.
2 Power on or take the HAPSITE out of Extended Standby.
3 The HAPSITE will begin preparing a start up Concentrator method. Refer to
Section 3.1.2, Concentrator Options (CONC OPTIONS), on page 3-8 for further
information. See Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page 5-7 if the start
up method is not the desired method

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample to the Probe. Do not place thesample probe in liquids while sampling.

4 Click the RUN METHOD icon and choose the method that has been prepared.
Refer to Steps 2-4 of section 5.3 on page 5-7.

5 A prompt to press Run will be displayed on the Laptop screen.
6 When the screen prompts, Collect Sample Now, hold the probe over the
sample until the screen prompts, Sampling Is Done.

7 When the run is complete, a Method Finished prompt will appear.
Data Review for information on data review.

5 - 18IPN 074-472-P1C

8 See Section 3.5.1, View Results/View Reports, on page 3-32 or Chapter 9,

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.6 Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Headspace Sampling System
The Headspace Sampling System is used to test liquid and soil samples. See
Chapter 13, Headspace Sampling System for more information on the Headspace
System. Refer to Section 2.7, Headspace Sampling System, on page 2-13 forassembly instructions. See Chapter 6, Methods for additional information on
GC/MS methods.
When used with the Concentrator, the Headspace can analyze samples withconcentration levels in the low part per billion to high part per trillion range. It is used
when the Headspace Sampling System with the Sample Loop method fails to
detect a chemical. See Chapter 6, Methods for additional information on Analyze(GC/MS) methods.

CAUTION
The Concentrator feature has increased sensitivity. Takecare to avoid saturating the HAPSITE.

1 Verify that the desired sample configuration is installed (i.e., Sample Loop orConcentrator.)

2 Double-click the Plus IQ icon on the Laptop screen.
3 Make sure that the Headspace Transfer Line is installed.
4 Place a 40 mL vial with either blank or sample into a Headspace well.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: Do not fill 40 mL vial more than 20 mL full. See Section 13.2.3, Loading
the Wells, on page 13-11 for detailed instructions about loading thesample vials into the wells.

5 Place a clean, empty 40 mL vial into a Headspace well.
WARNING
The Headspace needle is very sharp!

5 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-25 Headspace Needle

6 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby (refer to section 3.1 on
page 3-1 or section 3.8.1 on page 3-63), the HAPSITE will automatically start
preparing the start up Headspace method. If the method that the HAPSITE
begins preparing is not the desired one, refer to Section 5.3, Selecting a New
Method, on page 5-7.

6a If running a Headspace method that requires a Concentrator, the HAPSITE will
run a Concentrator Cleanout. Its progress will be shown by a bar graph. If theConcentrator Cleanout is not successful, refer to Section 3.1.3, Concentrator
Cleanout Failure, on page 3-11.
check pressures and run an AutoTune if necessary. Progress of the preparation
will be shown as a bar graph on the Laptop screen. If AutoTune fails, refer to
Section 7.4, AutoTune Failure, on page 7-6. When the final results message isdisplayed, click OK. See Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 AutoTune Complete

8 Click the RUN METHOD icon. Click on the GCMS folder. Click on the folder ofthe desired configuration and then click on the method folder. See Steps 2-4 ofsection 5.3 on page 5-7.

9 Gently press the Headspace needle into the 40 mL vial that contains theblank/sample. See Figure 5-25.

5 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

7 As part of the preparation, the HAPSITE will heat all necessary components,

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 A prompt will appear Press RUN to start method.
NOTE: The sample must be heated for 20 minutes prior to sampling.

11 Click RUN button on the pop-up window or from the control panel on thescreen.
Figure 5-27 Run Button

12 The HAPSITE will prompt Collecting Sample Now. The Headspace willautomatically start sampling. No action is required by the user.

13 When the HAPSITE screen prompts Sampling Done, the Headspace has
finished sampling. Again, no action is required by the user.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-28 HSS Sampling Done

14 The chromatogram, showing the run’s progress, will appear on the Laptop
screen. See Figure 5-29.

5 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-29 Headspace Running a Concentrator Method

15 When prompted at the end of the run, place the Headspace needle into a clean,empty purge vial and click Select. See Figure 5-30.

16 A METHOD FINISHED prompt will appear on the HAPSITE screen when the
run is complete. See Figure 5-31 for an example of a completed chromatogram.

5 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-30 Purge Vial Prompt

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 5-31 HSS Concentrator Method Finished

17 To analyze the data, see Chapter 9, Data Review.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: If the HAPSITE has been left unattended, the message SYSTEM IS NOTREADY may appear. To begin preparing the system again, either touch
PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE and push OK
SEL.

5 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.6.1 Quick Reference SOP — GC/MS Mode with HSS
1 Double-click the Plus IQ software icon.
2 Verify that the desired sample configuration (i.e., Sample Loop orConcentrator) is installed.

3 Power on or take the HAPSITE out of Extended Standby.
4 Depending upon the method, the HAPSITE may initiate a Concentrator
cleanout. If needed, see Section 3.1.2, Concentrator Options (CONCOPTIONS), on page 3-8. See Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page5-7 if the start up method is not the desired method.

5 Following a 20 minute sample temperature equilibration in the HSS oven,gently press the Headspace needle into the 40 mL sample vial.

6 When the system has finished preparing, click the RUN METHOD icon andselect the desired method. Refer to Steps 2-4 of section 5.3 on page 5-7.

7 Click the Run button in the pop-up window.
8 When the screen prompts Collecting Sample Now and Sampling Is Done, noaction is required from the user.

9 When the run is complete, a METHOD FINISHED prompt will appear.
10 When prompted, place the Headspace needle in the purge vial and press OK.

IPN 074-472-P1C

11 To analyze the data, see Chapter 9, Data Review.

5 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.7 SituProbe Methods
See Chapter 14 for more information on running SituProbe methods.

5.7.1 Procedure for SituProbe Operation
1 Verify that the desired sample configuration is installed (i.e., Sample Loop orConcentrator.)

2 Make sure that the Transfer Line is installed.
3 When powered on or taken out of Extended Standby (refer to section 3.1 on
page 3-1 or section 3.8.1 on page 3-63), the HAPSITE will automatically start
preparing a SituProbe method. If the SituProbe method that the HAPSITE
begins preparing is not the desired one, refer to Section 5.3, Selecting a New
Method, on page 5-7.

3a When running a SituProbe method that requires a Concentrator, the HAPSITE
will run a Concentrator Cleanout. Its progress will be shown by a bar graph. If
the Concentrator Cleanout is not successful, refer to section Section 3.1.3,
Concentrator Cleanout Failure, on page 3-11.

4 The HAPSITE will begin preparing to run the SituProbe method. It will heat allnecessary components, check pressures and run an AutoTune if necessary.
Progress of the preparation will be shown by a bar graph on the Laptop screen.
If AutoTune fails, see Section 7.4, AutoTune Failure, on page 7-6. When the
final results message is displayed, click OK. See Figure 5-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-32 AutoTune Complete

5 Click the RUN METHOD icon. Click on the GC/MS folder. Click on the folder ofthe desired configuration and then click on the method folder. See Steps 2-4 ofsection 5.3 on page 5-7.

6 A prompt will appear Press RUN to start method.
7 Click RUN button on the pop-up window or from the control panel on thescreen.

8 The screen will prompt Collecting Sample Now. The SituProbe is
automatically collecting a sample. No action is required by the user.

5 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 The next screen will prompt Sampling is Done. See Figure 5-33. No action isrequired by the user.
Figure 5-33 Sampling Done on SituProbe

10 When the run is complete, a METHOD FINISHED message will appear on the
HAPSITE screen. See Figure 5-34.

11 See Chapter 9, Data Review.
NOTE: If the HAPSITE has been left unattended, the message SYSTEM IS NOTREADY may appear. To begin preparing the system again, either touch
PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight PREPARE and push OK
SEL.

5 - 26

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 5-34 SituProbe Method FinishedHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5.7.2 Quick Reference SOP — Analyze Mode with SituProbe
1 Double-click the Plus IQ software icon.
2 Verify that the desired sample configuration (i.e., Sample Loop orConcentrator) is installed.

3 Make sure the SituProbe is set-up properly. See Section 2.9, SituProbe, on
page 2-27 for assembly information.

4 If necessary, power on the HAPSITE or take the system out of Extended
Standby.

5 Depending upon the method, the HAPSITE will begin preparing theConcentrator. If needed, see Section 3.1.2, Concentrator Options (CONCOPTIONS), on page 3-8. See Section 5.3, Selecting a New Method, on page5-7 if the start up method is not the desired method

6 When the system has finished preparing, click the RUN METHOD icon. Selectthe desired method from the appropriate folder. Refer to Steps 2-4 of section
5.3 on page 5-7.

7 Click the Run button in the pop-up window.
8 When the screen prompts, Collect Sample Now and Sampling Is Done, noaction is required from the user.

9 When the run is complete, a Method Finished prompt will appear.

IPN 074-472-P1C

10 To analyze the data, see Chapter 9, Data Review.

5 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

5 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 6
Methods
6.1 Introduction to Methods
The versatility of the HAPSITE lies in the variety of methods available. The
HAPSITE can be run in Analyze (GC/MS) mode or Survey (MS only mode) anduses various sampling accessories to extend its capabilities. The accessories
include the Concentrator, the Headspace Sampling System and the SituProbe.
This chapter describes the various sampling methods.

6.1.1 Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the HAPSITE is dependent on the configuration and sampling
mode chosen. The Survey Mode is the least sensitive, requiring levels of greaterthan 10 ppm (parts per million) for detectability. The Sample Loop with the probe isable to detect levels in the low ppm to high ppb (parts per billion) ranges. With aConcentrator installed and using the probe, the HAPSITE can detect low ppb tohigh ppt (parts per trillion) levels. The Sample Loop with the Headspace Sampling
System detects down to 5 to 10 ppb and will detect even lower with theConcentrator installed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

6.2 Survey Method
Survey is used to quickly screen a location for volatile compounds. The sample isdrawn in through the probe and sent directly to the Mass Spectrometer. It bypasses
the GC to provide a quick response. The Survey mode of sample collection is also
referred to as MIMS (Membrane Interface Mass Spectrometry).
There are two ways the Survey Methods can provide tentative identification ofcompounds. They can either extract target mass spectra from the MS response or
search the total MS response against the AMDIS or NIST library. Survey Methods,
when run from the HAPSITE, also provide an indication of the concentrations of
VOCs based on the response of the TIC (Total Ion Count). The LCD of the
HAPSITE provides a real time plot of response vs. sampling time. Survey Methods
can be Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) or Full Scan methods. The sensitivity of a
Survey method in full scan will be approximately 10 ppm or greater. A Survey SIM
method gives an improved level of sensitivity compared to a Full Scan method.
NOTE: These sensitivity ranges should be viewed as general guidelines, as thesensitivity of individual compounds can vary.

6-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTIONAll unknown samples should first be collected with theSurvey Method to estimate the total VOC response. The
Survey Method allows the operator to gain knowledge of
how far away to hold the probe from the sample and if aconcentrator needs to be used.
For a Survey run, the probe is, at first, held away from the suspected VOC source.
This is to clear the Survey line and obtain a background signal level. The source
should be sampled for up to 1 minute, depending on the result. If the TIC countremains under 5,000,000, then continue to sample for up to 1 minute. If the TIC
count increases above 5,000,000, sample for 15 seconds. Then, allow the TIC
graph to return to the baseline level. If the TIC count increases above 10,000,000.
Move the probe back from the source or discontinue sampling. Allow the TIC toreturn to the background level before stopping the run. See Figure 6-1.

CAUTION
Do not touch the sample to the probe. Do not allow
liquids to enter the probe.
HINT: Refer to Chapter 3, Operating HAPSITE in Portable Mode for additional
information on running methods.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 6-1 Sample Running Survey Method from the Front Panel

MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Is the maximum signal count for the TIC in
the window. The TIC is an indication of thelevel of VOCs present at the source.
TIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Is the current TIC level.

6-2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6.2.1 Building a Survey Method Library File
Survey methods can be designed for data collection in three manners:without identification.

qualitative analysis and identification based on match with the AMDIS library.



Quantitative/Qualitative analysis, identification and quantification from a target
library and unknown identification using the AMDIS library.

In Survey, the GC does not separate VOC’s. Therefore, the process of building a
Survey method is best accomplished by preparing and running individual
standards for the target compounds at the desired concentration levels. Survey
methods can be calibrated at a single level or over a concentration range. The
accuracy of a Survey method is limited by the manner in which the data is collected
and the external calibration technique. Survey method target libraries can be built
by running multiple compounds in a single run. However, the user must edit the
combined spectrum, and select the appropriate mass fragments for eachcompound. Compounds that share mass fragments cannot be run in the same
standard.
6.2.1.1 Creating Survey Methods for Target Compounds
Collection of Survey data is controlled by the method. Survey methods, like
Analyze (GC/MS) methods, are generated or modified using the Method Editor.
The Method Editor is covered in detail in Chapter 11, Method Editor.
6.2.1.2 Building a Survey Target Compound Library

IPN 074-472-P1C

The library is built using the Calibrate Function. Calibrate is described in detail in
Chapter 12, Target Compound Methods. The special features of building a Target
compound Method for Survey are detailed in the following example.
Calibration samples must be collected prior to building the library. When collecting
the calibration runs, enter the concentration of the calibration standard and theunits in the Data File Info Header. The Data File Info Header is accessed by
selecting the Data File Info button from the toolbar in the Data Review Window. See
section 9.3, Data Review Toolbar, on page 9-5. See Figure 6-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Data File Info icon.

6-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 6-2 Data File Information Page

During the Calibration run, enter the concentration level of the calibration standard
and select the corresponding units.
A description can be entered to help identify the sample.
Open the Calibrate Function using the Toolbar Icon or the drop down menu. SelectSurvey as the file type and select OK. The File selection dialog box will be
displayed. Locate and select the method that was used to collect the calibration
runs.

Highlighting a data file and pressing the Display button will display the calibrationrun.
NOTE: The best way to work with the graphical data is to expand the plot to fullscreen.
Figure 6-3 Calibration Window

6-4

IPN 074-472-P1C

Use the Browse button in the Data Files section to select and open the data filecollected during the calibration run. The file(s) will be used to build the target library
template. See Figure 6-3.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The spectrum of the analyte must be recorded to the target compound library. The
spectrum is recorded by placing the scan cursor on the response curve (e.g., theTIC) at a location that represents the concentration of the calibration standard. See
Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Sample Placing Cursor on Response Curve at Location of Calibration Standard

IPN 074-472-P1C

The spectrum must be recorded to the library. Highlight the spectrum window andclick the right mouse button to bring up the spectrum menu. Highlight Grab
Spectrum for Template to record the spectrum. See Figure 6-5.

6-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The compound is displayed in the Analytes in Library list and the extracted mass
values are displayed. A compound name can be entered and the extracted mass
list can be "cleaned up" for low intensity masses and more than one VOC in theSurvey run. To edit the extracted mass list, all masses with intensity below 15%
should be deleted. To delete a mass, click once on the mass in the Extracted Mass
Peaks list and press the delete key. After adding all analytes to the template, thelibrary can now be calibrated by checking the Selection box for the data file,selecting Calibrate Library, and then pressing Start.
The library should be saved at this time, the Save Library button under Method will
display the dialog box to save the library. The library is linked to the method andcan be saved using any name.
Additional calibration points can be added to the curve by using the Browse button
to select additional data files. The selected files can then be processed as
described above, and saved to the library. See Figure 6-6.

6-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 6-5 Grab Spectrum for Template Window

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 6-6 Additional Calibration Points

Additional compounds are added by following the same steps.

CAUTIONThe Reset Library function is used to delete allcalibration curves for all compounds and should only bechecked when this action is necessary.

6.3 Analyze (GC/MS) Methods

IPN 074-472-P1C

GC/MS is a reliable means of identifying volatile organic compounds. The sample
is drawn in through the probe or other sampling accessory. It is then passed
through the GC, where the sample is separated by boiling point and sent to theMass Spectrometer. Compounds are positively identified by GC retention time andmass spectrum.
Analyze (GC/MS) Methods provide identification of compounds in two ways. By
extracting target mass ions from the MS response or as a result of searching thetotal MS response against the AMDIS and/or NIST libraries. GC/MS Methods canuse Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) or Full Scan MS modes. The sensitivity of an
Analyze (GC/MS) Loop method (full scan) will be in the approximate range of highppb to low ppm. The sensitivity of an Analyze (GC/MS) Concentrator method (fullscan) will be in the range from high ppt to low ppb. By comparison, a SIM method
will always give slightly improved sensitivity over a Sample Loop or Concentrator
method as these methods focus on a limited set of masses for detection. The
sensitivity is related to the compound and sampling system; the above are general
guidelines.

6-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTIONAll unknown samples should first be collected with theSurvey Method to avoid saturating the GC. The Survey
Method allows the operator to gain knowledge of how far
away to hold the probe from the sample and if a
Concentrator needs to be used.
The sampling procedure for an Analyze (GC/MS) method is dependent on the
HAPSITE configuration. For information on running Sample Loop, Concentrator,
HSS and/ or SituProbe samples, see either Chapter 3 for information on runningthem from the Front Panel or Chapter 5 for information on running them from the
Laptop.

6.3.1 Building an Analyze (GC/MS) Method andTarget Compound Library File

IPN 074-472-P1C

Collection of Analyze (GC/MS) data is controlled by the method. Analyze (GC/MS)
methods are generated or modified using the Method Editor. The Method Editor iscovered in detail in Chapter 11, Method Editor. The target compound library is built
using the Calibrate Function. The calibrate function is described in detail in Chapter
12, Target Compound Methods.

6-8

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 7Tune
7.1 Introduction to AutoTune and Manual Tune
Ensuring the mass spectrometer (MS) performance requires a functionality checkat start-up and after 12 hours of continuous operation. The process of verifying theMass Spectrometer functionality is called Tuning. Tuning can be accomplished by
the AutoTune program, where the system sets and adjust all parameters, or by a
Manual Tune where the user sets the parameters.
The tune of a MS determines the quality of the mass spectrum produced by thesystem. A good quality spectrum is one which matches either the reference
spectrum from the National Institutes of Standards and Technology (NIST) libraryto give high similarity indexes, or the Automated Mass Spectral De-convolution and
Identification Software (AMDIS) libraries to provide high NET matches. The tune
file contains the parameters that control the MS and is linked to a data acquisition
method. Multiple Tune files can be created for specific methods/requirements.
However, the default Tune is generally all that is required. The default Tune isstored on the HAPSITE as default.tun.
The parameters set in Tune that affect the quality of the spectrum include:
Base Peak Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets the sensitivity level of the MS.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Mass Axis Calibration . . . . . . . . . . Mass Spectrometers measure Atomic Mass
Units (AMU); Tune insures that the Mass
Axis is accurately calibrated.
Ratio of Mass Peaks. . . . . . . . . . . . The Mass Calibration status measures andrecords the ratio of mass fragments to preset
values. The ratio of the mass peaks controls
the quality of the mass spectrum generated
by the HAPSITE.
AutoTune and Manual Tune are performed using a calibration mixture in which themass fragments (AMU) and the ratios of the mass fragments are known. The
HAPSITE uses a mixture of two compounds that together provide mass fragments
across the mass range of interest. The compounds are:


1,3,5-Tris (trifluoromethyl) benzene

Bromopentafluorobenzene.

7-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.2 AutoTune
There are two versions of the AutoTune program: Short and Long. The Short
AutoTune program is the daily maintenance tune of the HAPSITE. It is
pre-configured to run automatically at startup, after the system has been powered
OFF and ON with a method selected, or after an twelve hour period of operation.
Short AutoTune can also be invoked from the Manual Tune function at anytime.
The Short AutoTune will check if all parameters are within specifications, record thedwell statistics (Baseline/Threshold), create a Tune report and proceed to the Run
Method function. If corrections are required, the program will automatically makethe correction, measure the dwell statistics, create the report, and then proceed to
the Run Method function.
Figure 7-1 show sample screens displayed during an AutoTune. The status
screens will vary depending on the corrections or adjustments required.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-1 Status Screen from Laptop During AutoTune

7-2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.2.1 Starting AutoTune from the Manual Tune Screen on the Laptop
Computer
1 Double-click on the Plus IQ icon. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Plus IQ Icon

2 Double-click on the Tune Icon. See Figure 7-3.
HINT: Only the Advanced Access level can run Manual Tune.
Figure 7-3 Manual Tune Icon

3 Wait until the EM and Emission buttons in the control panel turn green, thenclick the Tune icon. See Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 Tune Icon

IPN 074-472-P1C

CAUTION
Adjusting other parameters without proper training may
damage the instrument.

4 Allow the AutoTune to run to completion and click OK. Close the Manual Tune
after receiving the message Final Results are on the LCD. See Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 AutoTune Complete

7-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.3 Viewing a Tune Report
The Tune Report can be viewed from the front panel display or from the Laptop
computer. See Figure 7-6. Tune Reports are stored on the HAPSITE. Therefore, toaccess Tune Reports from the Laptop computer, the HAPSITE must be connectedto the Laptop.
To view the report from the Laptop computer select File. Then select View Tune
Reports from the drop down menu. Highlight the default.tun file and press OK.
The Tune Files and Tune Reports are displayed. Tune Reports can also beaccessed by highlighting the HAPSITE icon, or by pressing the right mouse buttonand selecting Tune Reports. Tune Reports are stored, by default, for the last 30
days. The Tune Reports display offers the following functions:Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deletes the selected report. NO
CONFIRMATION IS REQUESTED.
Remove Older Than . . . . . . . . . . . . Deletes files older than the number of days
specified. Confirmation is requested before
the files are deleted.
Export to Tune File . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converts a Tune Report into a valid Tune file.
This feature can be used to recover a good
Tune if the current Tune file has beencorrupted.
Export to text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates a text file copy of the Tune Report.
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prints a copy of the selected Tune Report.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-6 Tune Reports Screen from Laptop Computer

7-4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

To view the Tune Report from the front panel display, touch the HAPSITE icon andthen touch the TUNE icon. See Figure 7-7. Touching the TUNE REPORT key willthen display the last Tune Report. See Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-7 Status and Tune Data

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-8 Tune Report

7-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.4 AutoTune Failure
Occasionally, AutoTune may fail. Follow the procedures outlined below before
continuing.

1 When AutoTune fails, check IS canister pressure and expiration date. Replace
if necessary.

2 Check reservoir pressure to ensure the reservoir pressure is at least 400 kPa.
Replenish if necessary by inserting a full can of Nitrogen (>400 kPa).

3 Rerun AutoTune by rebooting the HAPSITE.
4 If AutoTune fails again, select File >> View Tune Reports on the Laptop. See
Figure 7-9.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-9 Selecting View Tune Reports

7-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Select default.tun file and press OK. See Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Select "default.tun" File

6 Highlight a "good" tune report. Select Export to Tune File. See Figure 7-11.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-11 Export Good Tune to Current Tune File

7-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Highlight default.tun. Click OK. See Figure 7-12.
NOTE: This will overwrite the default.tun file. See section 10.3 on page 10-12
for information on transferring files to the PC if saving a copy of this fileis desired prior to overwriting it.
Figure 7-12 Save "default.tun"

8 Replace the existing default.tun file when prompted.
9 Reboot HAPSITE from the front panel MAIN menu.
7.6, Performing Manual Tune, on page 7-25 for information on performing a
Manual Tune.

7-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

10 If the HAPSITE fails to tune after steps 1-9 have been performed, see section

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.5 Manual Tune Settings and Controls
Manual Tune is run from the Laptop computer. The Manual Tune screen can beaccessed by selecting the Tune icon from the System Setup screen, or byhighlighting the HAPSITE icon, clicking the Right Mouse Button and selecting
Tune. When the Manual Tune screen is selected the system will initialize all of thecontrols necessary to perform a Tune (e.g., turning on the filament, multiplier andcalibration/tune gas supply).
NOTE: Manual Tune is only available in Advanced user mode.
See Figure 7-13 for a typical Manual Tune screen.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-13 Manual Tune Screen

CAUTION
Adjusting parameters without proper training may
damage the instrument.

7-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.5.1 Tool Bar
Figure 7-14 Manual Tune Tool Bar

Filament On/Off . . . . . . . . . Turns the emission On or Off.
Multiplier On/Off . . . . . . . . . Turns the Electron Multiplier On or Off.
Full Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches between Full Scan display modeand Peak Scan display mode.
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a section of Full
Scan or Peak Scan and zoom to that section.
Mass Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a mass peakand drag the mass peak to a different
position on the mass axis.
Short AutoTune. . . . . . . . . . Starts the Short AutoTune function.

Mass Calibration. . . . . . . . . Checks and corrects the ten calibration
masses for correct location within the mass
range.
Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Scans a "quiet" mass range (no peaks) todetermine the electronic baseline andthreshold noise level.
Perform Tune Checkup . . . Runs a mass calibration and noise check.
Show Target . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the target bar for the mass peak
center and peak width at 10% peak height.
Displays the target high and low percentage
bars for each mass peak.

7 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

Long AutoTune . . . . . . . . . . Starts the Long AutoTune function.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualShow Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the peak centroid and the target
peak width at 10% peak height.
Save Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saves the Tune File.
Load Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loads a new Tune File and restarts tuning.

7.5.2 Tune Drop Down Menu
Figure 7-15 Tune Drop Down Menu

IPN 074-472-P1C

Mass Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checks and corrects the ten calibration
masses for correct location within the mass
range.
Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scans a "quiet" mass range (no peaks) todetermine the electronic baseline andthreshold noise level.
Perform Tune Checkup . . . . . . . . . Runs a mass calibration and noise check.
Save Tune Parameters... . . . . . . . . Saves the Tune File.
Load Tune Parameters... . . . . . . . . Loads a new Tune File and restarts tuning.
Load Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . Loads the default tune settings from a factory
tune file. This is intended to provide a starting
point for tuning.
Common Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets all of the Mass Peak windows to thesame common scale (Y-axis), based on
Mass 117.

7 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualShow Tune Status Panel . . . . . . . . Displays the Tune and Mass Calibration
Status panel.
Show Mass Calibration Status . . . Displays the Mass Calibration Status panel.
View Tune Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Tune Reports screen.
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Properties window, which isused to set the default screen display andstartup/exit conditions for Manual Tune. See
Figure 7-16.
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Advanced tune functions.
Linearize DACS. . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositions the tune gas mass peaks on themass axis by linear extrapolation of thedigital to analog control settings.
AutoTune Tolerances . . . . . . . . Sets the AutoTune tolerance for mass
resolution and mass axis position.
NOTE: The Advanced functions should only be used under the direction of
INFICON Support personnel.
7.5.2.1 Tune Properties Window

Show Tune Parameters . . . . . . . . . Displays the EM Voltage, Ionizer control,
Baseline, Threshold and Rod polarity
settings on the Control PanelShow Mass Tune Controls. . . . . . . Displays the Mass Tune Controls on theMass Peak Scan windows.
Show Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Control panel.
Common Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets the Mass Peak Scan windows to acommon scale based on mass 117.

7 - 12

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-16 Tune Properties Window

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualShow Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the target bar for the mass peak
center and peak width at 10% peak height.
Displays the target high and low percentage
bars for each mass peak.
Show Peak Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the peak centroid and the target
peak width at 10% peak height.
Leave emission on at exit . . . . . . . Leaves the filament and Electron multiplieron when exiting tune. This should not be
used except for special service procedures.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Turn Cal. Gas on at Tune start. . . . Turns ON the Calibration gas when the tune
program is started. This is checked fornormal operation.

7 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.5.3 Tune Control Panel

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-17 Tune Control Panel

The Tune Control Panel provides access to display individual mass peak scans byselecting the check box next to the Mass. The measured intensity and resolution
are displayed. The Target Resolution is also displayed and can be modified.
Changing the Target Resolution will force an Auto Resolve. Decreasing the Target
Resolution narrows the peak, increasing the resolution and lowering the peakpercentage. Increasing the Target Resolution will widen the peak, decreasing theresolution and increasing the peak percentage.

7 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The Emission button turns the filament ON or OFF, the EM button turns theElectron Multiplier ON or OFF. Green signifies ON and is the default condition when
the Tune window is opened.
7.5.3.1 Tune Parameters
EM Volt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to increase or decrease the gain of thesystem. EM voltage should be set to a valuethat achieves a Base Peak Gain of between
0.8 and 2.0.
Emission Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to optimize the ionization efficiency of
the ionizer. Emission Current is set toachieve maximum intensity for mass 117.
Range is 100 - 1000. (300 - 400 is typical.)
Extractor Volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to optimize the ionization efficiency of
the ionizer. Extractor Volt is set to achieve
maximum intensity for mass 117. Range is
0 - 100.
Focus Volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to optimize the ionization efficiency of
the ionizer. Focus Volt is set to achieve
maximum intensity for mass 117. Range is-12 to +12.
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One standard deviation of the Baseline.
Threshold determines if a measured point isused in the peak area integration. If the point
is used, the baseline is subtracted beforeuse.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Baseline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The mean value of the measured noise level.
Reverse Rod Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . Changes the Rod polarity on the Mass filter
and is selected for optimum performance atmass 117.
TP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The total MS pressure.
Running Tune Base Peak Gain . . . Current measured Base Peak Gain (BPG).
NOTE: The Base Peak Gain will switch to
Red when BPG is outside the target
range.
Auto Resolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusts the resolution of all Mass Peaks to
the target resolution.
Save Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save the Tune File

7 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Mass Cal.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checks and corrects the ten calibration
masses for correct location within the mass
range.
Full Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches between Full Scan display modeand Peak Scan display mode
Short AutoTune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starts the Short AutoTune function
Long AutoTune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starts the Long AutoTune function
Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scans a "quiet" mass range (no peaks) todetermine the electronic baseline andthreshold noise level.
Tune Checkup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Runs a mass calibration and noise check.
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a section of Fullscan or a peak scan and zoom to that
section.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Mass Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a mass peakand drag the mass peak to a different
position on the mass axis.

7 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.5.4 Peak Scan Window
The Peak Scan Window, see Figure 7-18, displays the mass peak and enables theuser to manually control/tune the mass peak.
Figure 7-18 The Peak Scan Window and Controls

IPN 074-472-P1C

7.5.4.1 Peak Scan Window Controls
Mass Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a mass peakand drag the mass peak to a different
position on the mass axis.

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a section of thepeak scan window and zoom to that section.
Zoom Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns the window to the original X axis andY axis scale.

Zoom Out Y axis . . . . . . . . . Returns the Y axis to original scale.

7 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Y Axis Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increase or decreases the Y axis scale.
NOTE: For the following controls, The Left Mouse Button (LMB) is used to changeby 1 increment, shift-LMB changes in increments of 10, and Ctrl-LMB
changes by increments of 100.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifts the mass peak left.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increases the peak resolution.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decreases the peak resolution.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifts the mass peak right.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decreases the Ion energy.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increases the Ion energy.

IPN 074-472-P1C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooms to a single peak scan display window.

7 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.5.5 Full Scan Window
The Full scan window (see Figure 7-19) is used for display purposes to evaluate
the performance of the MS. All tune adjustments should be made using the Peak
Scan windows.
Figure 7-19 Full Scan Window and Controls

IPN 074-472-P1C

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables the cursor to select a section of thepeak scan window and zoom to that section.
Zoom Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns the window to the original X axis andY axis scale.

Zoom Out Y Axis. . . . . . . . . Returns the Y axis to the original scale.
Placing the mouse cursor on the x axis of the full scan window and pressing theRight Mouse Button will display the Set Scan Range Window, see Figure 7-20. This
allows a custom scan range to be entered and viewed.

7 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 7-20 Setting the Full Scan Range

Default Scan ranges of 45 - 300 AMU or 1 - 45 AMU can be selected.
NOTE: The EM voltage will automatically be decreased by 500 volts (default)
anytime a range below mass 45 is scanned. Custom scan ranges can also
be viewed by selecting the custom button and entering a start and end
mass.

7.5.6 Tune and Mass Calibration Status
The Tune & Mass Calibration Status Panel is shown in Figure 7-21.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-21 Tune & Mass Calibration Status Panel

The Tune Status Panel displays information pertinent to tune and can be used tochange some of the Tune parameters. The Tune and Mass Calibration Status
Panel can be displayed with a Right Mouse Button click in the Peak Scan window.
It can also be displayed by using the Tune drop down menu and selecting the Tune
Status Panel. Columns can be displayed or hidden with a right mouse click on thecolumn headings. See Figure 7-22.

7 - 20HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 7-22 Tune and Mass Calibration Status Menu

Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The mass number of the peak. When a mass
is selected to display, the mass immediately
below and above are also displayed.
Target Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Target resolution at 10% peak height.
Actual Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured resolution at 10% peak height.
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution value; can be used to input achange in resolution value.
Ion Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ion energy value; can be used to input achange in Ion energy value.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Position (DAC Value) . . . . . . . . . . . Current DAC setting for mass position.
Scan Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the points measured per AMU.
Min OK Target Percentage . . . . . . Displays the minimum target percentage
required for the mass peak to meet the OK
LOW criteria.
Min Target Percentage . . . . . . . . . . Displays the minimum target percentage
required for the mass peak to meet OK
criteria. Will turn red if actual percentage isbelow the minimum percentage.
Actual Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the actual measured target
percentage.
Max Target Percentage . . . . . . . . . Displays the maximum target percentage
required for the Mass Peak to meet OK
criteria. Will turn red if actual percentage isabove the maximum percentage.

7 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Max OK Target Percentage . . . . . . Displays the maximum percentage required
for the mass peak to meet the OK High
criteria.
Base Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the base peak that the mass peakpercentage is measured against.

7.5.7 Mass Calibration Status
The dark gray Mass Calibration Status panel displays the status of the last Mass
Calibration. See Figure 7-23. The Mass Calibration Status panel can be displayedby Right Mouse Button (RMB) click in the Peak Scan window, or by using the Tune
drop down menu and selecting the Mass Calibration Status.
Figure 7-23 Mass Calibration Status

Columns can be displayed or hidden with a Right Mouse Button click on the column
headings. See Figure 7-24.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-24 Mass Calibration Menu

Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass number.
Low%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum percentage for peak status OK.
High% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum percentage for peak status OK.
Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference mass for peak percentage
calculations.

7 - 22

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Diff(mmu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provides an adjustment to DAC value formass peak alignment, if one is needed since
the last mass calibration check. 100 mmu =0.1 AMU.
Peak% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual peak percentage of reference mass.
Isotope% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percentage of the Carbon 13 isotope peak as
measured against the mass fragment.
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status of mass peak.
OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Within minimum and maximum values.
OK LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside of minimum value but within
acceptable tolerance.
OK HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside of maximum value but within
acceptable tolerance.
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below minimum value; needs adjustment.
HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above maximum value; needs adjustment.
FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot located mas peak within window.
AutoTune or Manual Tune is required.

7.5.8 Right Mouse Button (RMB) Menus
In addition to the functions described above, the following menu items are available
by pressing the Right Mouse Button (RMB).

IPN 074-472-P1C

7.5.8.1 RMB in Scan Window
Placing the Mouse Cursor in the Peak Scan or Full Scan Window and pressing the
RMB displays the menu shown in Figure 7-25.
Figure 7-25 Scan Window Options

Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undo last function.

7 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Mass Centered Width. . . . . . . . . . . Width in AMU that correctly aligns thecalibration peak with the correct position on
the mass axis.
Lock Cursor to Peak . . . . . . . . . . . Locks the cursor to the mass peak for
adjustment of mass position.
Manual Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allows the mass peak windows to be set to auser defined scale.
Common Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets the mass peak scan windows to acommon scale based on mass 117.
Show Tune Parameters . . . . . . . . . Displays the EM voltage, Ionizer Control,
Baseline, Threshold and Rod Polarity
settings on the Control Panel.
Show Mass Tune Controls . . . . . . Displays the mass tune controls on the mass
peak scan windows.
Show Tune Status Panel . . . . . . . . Displays the tune status panel.
Show Mass Calibration Status . . . Displays the mass calibration status control
panel.
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the control panel.
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the properties window.
7.5.8.2 RMB in Tune Status Window
Placing the Mouse Cursor in the Tune Status panel or the Mass Calibration Status
panel and pressing the Right Mouse Button will display the menu shown in Figure
7-26.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-26 RMB Menu in Tune Status Panel

7 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: The menu from the control panel is the same as above with the exceptionof no print function.
Print... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prints the Tune Status panel or the Mass
Calibration Status panel.
Show Tune Status Panel . . . . . . . . Displays the Tune Status panel.
Show Mass Calibration Status . . . Displays the Mass Calibration Status panel.
Tile Grids Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . Tiles the Status and Calibration Status panels
horizontally.
Tile Grids Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . Tiles the Status and Calibration Status panels
vertically.
Size Columns To Grid . . . . . . . . . . Resets the column size to the current grid.
Dock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locks the display position to a fixed position.
Properties.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Properties window.
7.5.8.3 RMB on Y Axis
Positioning the mouse cursor on the Y axis scale near the top and selecting theRight Mouse Button will bring up a Y axis scale scroll window.

7.6 Performing Manual Tune

IPN 074-472-P1C

CAUTION
Manual Tune is a procedure that should only be
attempted by experienced HAPSITE users who havepreferably taken the Advanced Training course provided
by INFICON.
Read section 7.5, Manual Tune Settings and Controls, on page 7-9 to learn about
the various controls and settings involved in manual tune. Remember, if after a few
cycles through the Manual Tune process and the HAPSITE is still not tuning, call
INFICON Support for additional guidance. Below are general guidelines for
performing a manual tune.
NOTE: Do not save a Tune file from a Manual Tune if it indicates the HAPSITE is
not tuned.

7 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.6.1 Adjusting Base Peak Gain
1 Double-click on the Plus IQ icon. See Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27 Plus IQ Icon

2 Double-click on the Tune icon. See Figure 7-28.
NOTE: Manual Tune can only be opened in Advanced User Mode.
Figure 7-28 Manual Tune Icon

3 Select default.tun file and press OK. See Figure 7-29.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-29 Select default.tun File

4 Wait for the automated process of opening the tune to complete.
5 Check the Base Peak Gain (BPG). Is the value between 0.8 and 2.0? See
Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-31.

7 - 26

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 7-30 Checking BPG and EM Voltage

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-31 BPG Low

7 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5a If yes, then the BPG does not need adjustment. Proceed to Step 8.
5b If no, the BPG will need to be adjusted. Proceed to Step 6.
6 To raise the Base Peak Gain, increase the value of the EM Voltage by 25
volts. To lower the BPG, decrease the value of the EM Voltage by 25 volts.

7 Check the Base Peak Gain value to see if the BPG is now in the range (0.8 to
2.0).

7a If the Base Peak Gain is still out of range, repeat Step 6 until the value comes
into range.

7b If the Base Peak Gain is in range, continue with Step 8.
8 Check the Tune and Mass Calibration Status panel to see if any of the masses
are highlighted in red. A red box indicates the mass is High or Low. See Figure
7-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-32 BPG Good with Mass 50 Low

8a If all mass percentages are within limits, then the instrument is tuned. Proceed
to section 7.6.2, Adjusting Resolution, on page 7-29.

8b If any mass percentages are High or Low (red boxes), then proceed to
Adjusting Resolution.

7 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.6.2 Adjusting Resolution
1 Before adjusting Resolution, Base Peak Gain must be adjusted. Refer tosection 7.6.1, Adjusting Base Peak Gain, on page 7-26.

2 Resolution needs to be adjusted for masses that read High or Low in the Tuneand Mass Calibration Status panel. Ideally, the tune report should have an OK
reading for all masses. (No red boxes.)
NOTE: Resolution can also be adjusted for masses that read OK High and OK
Low in the Mass Calibration Report. (Press F5 to update the report.)

3 On the Tune and Mass Calibration Status panel the resolution will appear in twocolumns as Target Resolution and Actual Resolution. Actual Resolution is theactual reading and Target Resolution is the resolution setting. The range for theTarget Resolution is between 0.85 and 1.10.
Figure 7-33 Actual Resolution and Target Resolution

3a If the red box is in the Min Target Percentage column, the Target Resolution

IPN 074-472-P1C

will need to be increased. Use increments of 0.05 to change the Target
Resolution. If the Target Resolution reaches 1.10, proceed to Step 4 and follow
with Step 4c, if needed.

7 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 7-34 Target Percentage Low

3b If the red box is in the Max Target Percentage, the Target Resolution needs
to be decreased. Use increments of 0.05 to make changes to the Resolution. If
the Target Resolution reaches 0.85, proceed to Step 4 and follow with Step4c, if needed.

4 Check to see if the mass percentage is in range. (Red box has disappeared.)
Energy, on page 7-31.

4b If the Min or Max Target Percentage is red and the Target Resolution is within
0.85 and 1.10, repeat Step 3 and Step 4 until the masses all no longer show
red.

4c If the Min or Max Target Percentage is red, more adjustments need to be
made. If the Target Resolution is at the low end of the range (0.85) and masspercentage still needs to be lowered, the Ion Energy will need to be adjusted.
If the Target Resolution is at the high end (1.10) and the mass percentage is
not OK, an Ion Energy adjustment is also needed. Proceed to section 7.6.3.

7 - 30

IPN 074-472-P1C

4a If the Resolution is in range, proceed to Step 4, section 7.6.3, Adjusting the Ion

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7.6.3 Adjusting the Ion Energy
1 Prior to performing this procedure, follow the steps outlined in section 7.6.1,
Adjusting Base Peak Gain, on page 7-26 and section 7.6.2, Adjusting
Resolution, on page 7-29.

2 Check the Actual Percentage column:
2a If the Actual Percentage is above the acceptable range, (red box appears to
the right of the column, indicating the mass response is too high) the ion energy
needs to be reduced. Lower the ion energy by increments of 5 at a time.

2b If the Actual Percentage is below the acceptable range, (red box appears to
the left of the column, indicating the mass response is too low) the ion energy
needs to be increased. Raise the ion energy by increments of 5 at a time.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-35 Ion Energy Needs to be Increased

NOTE: When adjusting ion energy, there are low and high limits for each mass.
Make sure manual adjustments stay within the limits shown in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Manual Adjustments Guidelines

MASS

IE low

IE high

50

90

170

55

90

170

69

90

170

7 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 7-1 Manual Adjustments Guidelines (continued)

MASS

IE low

IE high

93

90

170

117

140

170

167

140

220

213

175

230

246

180

230

263

185

250

282

190

255

3 After making Ion Energy adjustments:
3a If the red boxes no longer appear, indicating the Actual Resolution is within
range, proceed to Step 4. See Figure 7-36.

3b If the HAPSITE is failing to Tune, then repeat the Manual Tune procedure.
Proceed to section 7.6.1, Adjusting Base Peak Gain, on page 7-26. If thisprocedure is repeated more than 2 times, contact INFICON.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 7-36 Good Manual Tune

4 Save the Tune file. Click Save Tune button on the upper Toolbar. See Figure
7-37 and Figure 7-38.

7 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 7-37 Save Tune Button

Figure 7-38 Tune Saved

5 Exit Manual Tune by closing the Tune window. The HAPSITE is ready for

IPN 074-472-P1C

sampling.

7 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

7 - 34

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 8
Plus IQ Software
8.1 The HAPSITE Software - Plus IQ
Plus IQ software includes all of the functions and controls for the HAPSITE
Chemical Identification System and its accessories. The software controls
instrument operation, runs analyses, manages files and creates reports. Plus IQ
can also view and interpret data collected by HAPSITE. The Plus IQ software
operates on a Laptop.
The main window of the Plus IQ software is called System Setup. This appears as
the first screen when the Plus IQ software is run. See Figure 8-1.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-1 System Setup View in Plus IQ Software

8-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.2 Computer System Requirements
The following is the minimum recommended computer system for communication
with one HAPSITE.
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pentium III 550 MHz or greater
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 MB or greater
Hard Disk Space
to load Plus IQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Mb
Hard Disk Space for storage . . . . . . 10 GB
Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) CD, (1) USB drive
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 inch, SVGA or greater
Monitor Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 x 768 or greaterCommunications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) RS-232 port and (1) Ethernet port
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows 2000 or XP

8.3 Installing and Updating the HAPSITE Smart Plusand Plus IQ Software
The steps for installing and updating the Plus IQ software are the same.

CAUTION

8.3.1 Updating the HAPSITE Smart Plus Software
The HAPSITE Smart Plus is delivered with factory-installed software. These
instructions explain how to upgrade that software.
The HAPSITE will need to be connected to the Laptop computer andcommunicating. Refer to Section 2.4.6, Connect Laptop (if desired), on page 2-10
if the HAPSITE and Laptop are not connected. See Section 8.6, Establishing
Communications between the HAPSITE and Laptop Computer, on page 8-13 if
communications need to be established.
For software installation instructions, refer to the instructions that are located on thesoftware disk.

8-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

The most important point to remember is to always
update the HAPSITE Plus software prior to updating thePlus IQ software on the computer.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.4 Installing/Updating NIST and AMDIS
The NIST and AMDIS mass spectral libraries are powerful tools for identifying
VOCs contained in samples.

1 Insert the NIST Installation CD into the CD Drive of the Laptop.
2 Select Start >> Run. See Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 Selecting the Run Function

3 Type D:\setup.exe. Press OK. See Figure 8-3.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-3 Running the Setup.exe Program

8-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 The welcome window for the NIST and AMDIS setup will appear. Press Next.
See Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 NIST and AMDIS Installation Welcome Window

5 On the Setup window, select Typical. See Figure 8-5.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-5 NIST and AMDIS Installation Setup Window

8-4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 Press Next. Refer to Figure 8-5.
7 When prompted to choose the software destination location, ensure the Installcheck boxes are checked for NIST and AMDIS and press Next. See Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6 NIST and AMDIS Program Designation Window

8 When prompted to find and connect to user libraries, make the selections
shown in Figure 8-7 and press Next.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-7 NIST and ADMIS Libraries

8-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 When prompted to select a program folder, use the default shown in Figure 8-8
and press Next.
Figure 8-8 Choosing the NIST and AMDIS Program Folder

10 Press Next to start copying files. See Figure 8-9.

11 If a window appears asking to overwrite existing files, press Yes. See Figure
8-10.
Figure 8-10 Overwrite Files Prompt

8-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-9 NIST and AMDIS Installation Copying FilesHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 The installation will proceed automatically and will last a few minutes. See
Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 NIST and ADMIS Installation Progress Window

13 A series of setup windows will appear, which is followed by a create program
files window. When the Setup Complete window appears, press Finish to close
the installation program. See Figure 8-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-12 NIST and AMDIS Installation Complete Window

8-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.5 Reloading Default HAPSITE Methods
All of the default methods are saved on the Laptop. These methods can be loaded
and modified or used as they are.

8.5.1 Locating Default Methods
Right-click on the HAPSITE icon to access the menu. Highlight the Edit Method
option and a second menu will appear. On this menu the bottom choice is
HAPSITE Default Method. This provides access to the default methods. See
Figure 8-13.

Clicking on the HAPSITE Default Method option will bring up a window with thedefault methods. Check the Plus box to view Smart Plus methods. See Figure
8-14.
Figure 8-14 HAPSITE Default Methods

The methods found in the Default Methods window are general purpose methods
for each of the HAPSITE Plus configurations.

8-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-13 Finding Default Methods

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Air_Tri-Bed_PPB_Standard . . . . . . Basic Carbon Concentrator method (15minute analysis time)
Air_Tri-Bed_PPM_Standard. . . . . . Carbon Concentrator Method to be used inlieu of Air_Loop_PPM_Standard (15 minuteanalysis time)
Air_Tenax_PPM_Standard . . . . . . . Tenax Concentrator Method to be used inlieu of Air_Loop_PPM_Standard (15 minuteanalysis time)
Air_Tenax_PPB_Standard . . . . . . . VOC and Chemical Warfare Agent Air
Analysis using Tenax Concentrator (15minute analysis sample time. Consists of 1
minute inlet purge plus one minute sample
collection.)
Air_Loop_PPM_Standard . . . . . . . VOC and Chemical Warfare Agent analysis
using Sample Loop (15 minute analysis time)
HSS_Tri-Bed_PPT_Standard . . . . . VOC and Chemical Warfare Agent
Headspace Solid/Liquid analysis using the
Tri-Bed Concentrator (15 minute analysis
time)
HSS_Loop_PPB_Standard . . . . . . VOC and Chemical Warfare Agent
Headspace Solid/Liquid analysis using
Sample Loop (15 minute analysis time)

IPN 074-472-P1C

HSS_Tenax_ PPT_Standard. . . . . . VOC and Chemical Warfare Agent
Headspace Solid/Liquid analysis using
Tenax Concentrator (15 minute analysis
time)
SP_Tri-Bed_PPT_Standard . . . . . . General purpose analysis for VOCs in awater matrix using the Tri-Bed Concentrator
and SituProbe (15 minute analysis)
SP_Loop_PPB_Standard . . . . . . . . General purpose analysis for VOCs in awater matrix using Sample Loop and
SituProbe (15 minute analysis)
SP_Tenax_PPT_Standard . . . . . . . General purpose analysis for VOCs in awater matrix using Tenax Concentrator and
SituProbe (15 minute analysis)
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick analysis to determine if there are
VOCs in an area (analysis time is determinedby the user, 2 minutes is suggested)

8-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: In addition to the standard 15 minute methods, there are 25 minutemethods for the Sample Loop and Concentrators. These methods end in
Extended in place of the Standard portion of the name. The analysis of
Toxic Industrial Chemicals is the suggested use for these methods. The
extended analysis time provides improved resolution of multiple
compounds and elution of higher boiling point compounds.

8.5.2 Loading a Default Method to the HAPSITE
1 From the Default Methods Menu, select the default method to load. Refer toFigure 8-14, HAPSITE Default Methods, on page 8-8.
HINT: Refer to Section 8.5.1, Locating Default Methods, on page 8-8 to findthe default methods.
2 Press the Load button. See Figure 8-14, HAPSITE Default Methods, on page8-8.
3 Press the Save button at the bottom of the Method Editor Description window.
See Figure 8-15.
NOTE: The method file name is the default method name with a two digit
number appended (e.g., 01). If the two digits are not desired, thenremove them from the file name before pressing the Save button.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-15 Default Methods Method Editor Description Window

8 - 10HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Double-click the Analyze folder for Analyze methods (or Survey folder for a
Survey method). See Figure 8-16.
HINT: Make sure HAPSITE is selected at the top of the Save Method Filedialog. See Figure 8-16.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-16 Choosing the Analyze Folder

8 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Double-click on the appropriate folder for the method to be saved. See Figure
8-17.
NOTE: If using a Survey Method, skip Step 5.
Figure 8-17 Choosing the Appropriate Folder

6 The default name is automatically modified by Plus IQ, or it can be manually
IPN 074-472-P1C

renamed. Press OK. The method is now saved to the HAPSITE.

8 - 12

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.6 Establishing Communications between the HAPSITE and
Laptop Computer
Establishing communications between the HAPSITE, Laptop and Service Module(if connected) is necessary to perform many advanced functions. The sections
which follow explain the steps needed to establish communications.

8.6.1 Setting Up Communications
1 Open Plus IQ. From the System drop-down menu, select Properties. See
Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-18 Selecting Properties from the System Drop-down Menu

NOTE: You must be in Advanced User Mode to set up communications. See
Section 8.9, Access Levels, on page 8-23.

2 Press the HAPSITE List button. See Figure 8-19.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-19 HAPSITE List Button

8 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Enter the letter "H", followed by the last 3 or 4 significant digits of the Serial
Number of the HAPSITE that requires communication setup. (The Serial
Number can be found on the inside front cover of the HAPSITE or by touching
the HAPSITE icon, then the HAPSITE System icon and then the NET button.)
For example: "H1086". Select Add. See Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20 Add HAPSITE

4 The newly added HAPSITE will appear in the HAPSITE List. Press OK.
5 Press OK on the System Properties Window.
6 The newly added HAPSITE icon will now appear at the bottom of the System
Setup Window. If the HAPSITE appears as in Figure 8-21, thencommunications have been established.

6a If the HAPSITE icon appears with a Blue "X" through the icon, thencommunication has not been fully established. See Figure 8-22.
Figure 8-22 Communication Has Not Been Established

6b Continue with Configuring the HAPSITE for Communications, see section
8.6.2.
NOTE: If the HAPSITE is shown with an a Blue "X", setting up the HAPSITE
for communication using the IP address can also be tried.

8 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-21 Newly Added HAPSITEHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.6.2 Configuring the HAPSITE for Communications
1 If communication between the HAPSITE and the Laptop could not beestablished using Section 8.6.1, Setting Up Communications, on page 8-13
continue with Step 2.

2 Press the STAT key on the front panel of the HAPSITE until the System
Parameters page is displayed.

3 Use the arrow keys to highlight NET, push OK SEL. Alternately, touch NET.
The IP address of the HAPSITE will be displayed. Example: 10.210.4.62 /255.254.0.0. Each HAPSITE will have a unique IP address.

4 On the Laptop, press Start. Depending on the Laptop’s setup follow either Step
4a or Step 4b.

4a Click on Settings, drag the cursor over Network Connections, drag the cursor
over Local Area Connection and click the Left Mouse Button. See Figure
8-23.
NOTE: For wireless connections, select Wireless Network Connection.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-23 Network Connections Classic View

8 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4b Click on Connect to, drag the cursor over Show All Connections and click
Left Mouse Button. Click on Local Area Connection. See Figure 8-24.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-24 Network Connections Standard View

8 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 The Network Connection Status Window will open. Click the desiredconnection and press Properties. See Figure 8-25.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-25 Local Area Connection Status Window

8 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 In the General tab, scroll down and highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), press
Properties. See Figure 8-26.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-26 Selecting Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

8 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Select Use the following IP address and enter the IP address of the
HAPSITE, (refer to Step 3 on page 8-22), with the number 128 added to thethird number of the first line of the IP address. This is necessary in order for thesystem to configure communications properly. Example: 10.210.4.62 becomes
10.210.132.62. Press OK.
NOTE: If configuring the HAPSITE for a wireless configuration, change the second
number, 210, to 209.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-27 Entering IP Address

8 Press OK in the Internet Protocol Window to close the window.
9 Communication between the HAPSITE and the Laptop is now established asindicated by the HAPSITE Sensor in the Plus IQ System Setup Window.
Figure 8-28 Active HAPSITE Sensor Icon

8 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.6.3 Establishing Communication with the Service Module
Service Module communications will be established automatically if a COM port
has been selected. Plus IQ has been set up with COM1 communications, so Plus
IQ will automatically recognize and communicate when a Service Module isconnected using a RS-232 cable.
Open Plus IQ. From the System drop-down menu, select Properties. See Figure
8-18.
Figure 8-29 Selecting Properties from the System Drop-Down Menu

NOTE: You must be in Advanced User Mode to set up communications. See
Section 8.9, Access Levels, on page 8-23.
In case the COM port communication has been removed, select the Add Port
button. See Figure 8-30.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-30 Port Settings in System Properties Window

8 - 20HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

When Add Port is selected, the window shown in Figure 8-31 will appear. Selectthe appropriate COM port to add. Select COM1 or the appropriate COM port.
Figure 8-31 Selecting a COM Port to Add

After the COM port has been selected, the COM port will appear in the Port list in
the System Properties window, as shown in Figure 8-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-32 Port List in Port Settings Tab of System Properties

Press the OK button. The system will automatically establish communications witha Service Module (if powered on and connected using a RS-232 cable.) Pleaserefer to Section 2.8.1, Setting Up the Service Module, on page 2-19 for moredetails.

8 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.7 Establishing Communications between the HAPSITE and
Laptop Computer Using the Wireless Connection
Refer to Chapter 4, Wireless and Touch Screen Options and Section 8.6.2,
Configuring the HAPSITE for Communications, on page 8-15 for information on
configuring the HAPSITE Plus to communicate via the wireless connection with the
Laptop computer.

8.8 Setting the HAPSITE Time Zone
To set the HAPSITE Time Zone, continue on with this procedure.
1 Open the Plus IQ software. See Figure 8-33.
Figure 8-33 Plus IQ Icon

2 On the System Set-up Page, double-click on the HAPSITE Sensor Icon. See
Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 HAPSITE Sensor Icon

3 Click on the HAPSITE Time Zone tab in the Properties Window. See Figure
8-35.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-35 HAPSITE Time Zone Tab

8 - 22

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Select the correct Time Zone from the drop-down list above the map.
5 Press OK and reboot the HAPSITE. A reboot is required to set the Time Zone.
6 Return to the dialog shown in Figure 8-35 to synchronize the Laptop and
HAPSITE data and time.

7 Click on Set HAPSITE Date/Time to PC Date/Time. Press OK. Refer to Figure
8-35.

8 The HAPSITE will be synchronized with the Date and Time of the computer.

8.9 Access Levels
There are two user Access Levels which can be set in Plus IQ: Normal andAdvanced. Neither Access Level is installed with a password.
Normal users can run samples, view results and perform basic operations with
HAPSITE Plus.
Advanced is a higher level which allows access to all user operations. This includes
everything a Normal user is allowed plus Tune, Method Editor, and some service
actions.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Advanced user level allows changes to key
setpoints. Trained users should only adjust these
setpoints to prevent adjustments that may result ininaccurate data collection.
The default access level is Normal, and no password is set by the factory. To
restrict access to advanced functions, an Advanced user password can be set.
Once the password is set, the password must be entered each time the Plus IQ
program is restarted, or whenever the access level is changed from Normal to
Advanced.
NOTE: Lost passwords may delay Service and Repairs.

8 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.9.1 Changing Access Levels
NOTE: When Normal access level is selected, a message will appear stating thatsome areas of Plus IQ will be restricted from access.

1 To change the access level, click on Tools on the System Startup Page.
1a Select Set Access Level.... See Figure 8-36.
Figure 8-36 Choose Set Access Level.... from Tools Menu

2 To select advanced access, click on the Requested Access Level pull-downmenu and select Advanced. If a password has been entered, the current
password will need to be entered in the password box before pressing OK.
See Figure 8-37.
Figure 8-37 Change Access Level Window

the Plus IQ program, in the Status Bar, as shown in Figure 8-38.
Figure 8-38 Current Access level, shown in Status Bar

8 - 24

IPN 074-472-P1C

3 The current access level of the system is shown at the bottom right corner ofHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.9.2 Setting or Changing the Access Level Password
1 To change the Advanced level password, first enter Advanced level.
2 Press the Change Password button. See Figure 8-39.
Figure 8-39 Change Password Button

3 The window shown in Figure 8-40 will appear.
Figure 8-40 Change Password Window

4 In order to change the password, the correct existing password must be

IPN 074-472-P1C

entered in the Old Password box. The new password must be entered in both
New Password and Verify New Password boxes. Press OK to set the new
password, or press cancel to exit without resetting the password.

5 Once the new password has been entered, the Change Access Level window
will re-appear. Press the Cancel button to close the window. Refer to Figure
8-39.
NOTE: Plus IQ remembers the last access level when closed. When the programis re-opened, the system will default to the last access level used. If a
password has been set, the user will be required to enter the correct
password to open with Advanced access. If the password is not known, theuser can select Normal access and continue.

8 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.10 Plus IQ Controls
The System Setup Page is the main screen of the Plus IQ software. The System
Setup Page appears as shown in Figure 8-41 upon initial installation.
Figure 8-41 Plus IQ - System Setup View

The screen includes various user interfaces, including:A menu, located at the top of the window

Toolbars to perform various actions

A main screen which displays component connections, such as HAPSITE andService Modules connected. This screen also shows the status of the selected
HAPSITE or Service Module.

When a HAPSITE sensor or Service Module sensor is selected, the sensor
displays icons to execute functions for that device.
IPN 074-472-P1C

8 - 26

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.10.1 System Setup Main Menu
The Main Menu in the System Setup view includes entries which can change,depending upon the item selected and the user Access Level selected. See Figure
8-42.
Figure 8-42 System Setup Main Menu

8.10.1.1 File
The File drop-down menu is shown in Figure 8-43.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 8-43 File menu selection

8.10.1.2 Functions
Functions are only available when a component is selected (System, HAPSITE,
Service Module, etc.).
8.10.1.3 System
The System menu accesses Properties. See Figure 8-44.
Figure 8-44 System Menu

8 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.10.1.4 Tools Menu
The Tools menu, shown in Figure 8-45, is consistent for all screens in Plus IQ.
Tools includes System Setup, which allows switching back to the System Setup
view. The menu also includes System Properties, Sensor Properties, and Set
Access Level....
Figure 8-45 Tools Menu

8.10.1.5 View Menu
The View menu provides selections for displaying and removing parts of the userinterface. There is also a choice to use large Toolbar buttons.
8.10.1.6 Window Menu
The Window menu is a standard menu for maximizing and minimizing windows in
the program.
8.10.1.7 Help Menu

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Help menu provides version information about Plus IQ.

8 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.11 Software Versions for the HAPSITE and Laptop
Table 8-1 Plus IQ and HAPSITE Smart Plus Compatibility Guide

Plus IQHAPSITE

ReleaseVersionSmart Plus

Date

(PC)

(AM)

2.0

2.0

May 2008

2.1

2.1

May 2009

2.2

2.2

April 2010

HAPSITE Smart Plus’s use HAPSITE Smart Plus software. Laptops use Plus IQ
software. Even though the two programs usually are distributed on the same CD,
the programs are not the same and require separate installations. Refer to Section
8.3, Installing and Updating the HAPSITE Smart Plus and Plus IQ Software, on
page 8-2.
Click on the Plus IQ Information icon to check the software version for the Laptop.
Figure 8-46 Plus IQ Information Icon

Refer to Section 3.7.1, System Parameters, on page 3-50 to determine how tocheck the version of the HAPSITE Plus software installed on the HAPSITE.

IPN 074-472-P1C

CAUTION
If possible both the Laptop and HAPSITE should always
have the most current version of the software installed.
The chart above shows the compatibility of the Plus IQ
and HAPSITE Smart Plus software. Do not try to run
incompatible versions of software together..

8 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

8.12 HAPSITE Icons
Table 8-2 HAPSITE Icons

Icon

Description
Starts Plus IQ Software from Desktop.

System Properties (Communications, Display,
Miscellaneous)

HAPSITE Sensor. Right Mouse Button to access menu.

Accesses all saved data files.

Accesses methods to initiate a run.

Accesses the NIOSH Database.

Accesses the AMDIS software and library.

Allows transfer of files between HAPSITE and Laptop.

8 - 30

IPN 074-472-P1C

Accesses the NIST software and Library.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 8-2 HAPSITE Icons (continued)

Icon

Description
Allows editing and creating methods.

Accesses the Service Module when attached.

Accesses HAPSITE Properties.

Accesses the HAPSITE tune program.

Opens the HAPSITE Front Panel display on the Laptop
screen.

Accesses Data file information.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Returns the current screen to the System Setup screen.

Accesses Plus IQ software information.

Accesses the Calibrate function.

Accesses the ID Unknowns function.

Accesses Chromatogram Overlay function.

8 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 8-2 HAPSITE Icons (continued)

Icon

Description
Navigates through files in Data Review.

Navigates through peaks in “search for peaks”.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Returns to the complete full chromatogram (TIC) display
in “search for peaks”.

8 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 9
Data Review
9.1 Introduction to Data Review

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Data Review section of the HAPSITE Smart Plus software allows access topreviously acquired data for review and analysis, or to view data that is being
acquired in real time. Data Review functionality includes:


Searching quickly for individual components using the NIST Library and the F7
key.

The Search for Peaks function to scan and tentatively identify all peaks in a
Total Ion Chromatogram (TIC), as well as generate a report.

Specifying which masses to view in a Reconstructed Ion Chromatogram (RIC).



Selecting Scan ranges to be viewed in the TIC.



Zooming in/out of TIC/RIC.



Subtracting backgrounds from TIC.



Subtracting specific scans from acquired spectra.

Grabbing spectra for analysis utilizing the full NIST database program.



Searching with AMDIS (Automated Mass Spectral Deconvolution and
Identification System) for TIC qualitative identification.



Reviewing data file information.

Labeling TIC and individual spectra.



Viewing the method used to acquire data.

Viewing the GC column temperature profile (if applicable).



Adjusting properties of the Data Review.

These features will allow the tentative identification of unknowns using the NIST or
AMDIS spectral libraries. They also prepare reports that will aid in the identificationof unknown chemicals.

9-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.2 Accessing the Data Review Feature
The Data Review feature can be accessed as follows:Double-click the Data Review icon, see Figure 9-1, orFigure 9-1 Data Review Icon

Right-click the HAPSITE icon. The menu shown in Figure 9-2 will appear. Click
Data Review.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-2 Data Review Menu

9-2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The Recall window will appear. Select the desired data file, either from the PC or
the HAPSITE. See Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Data Recall Window

There are three data file extensions that are available:*.hps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE Smart Plus data file extension*.hpz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressed HAPSITE Smart Plus data fileextension

IPN 074-472-P1C*.acq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE 5.2 and below data file extension
Once selected, the Data Review screen with the requested data file will be
displayed. The Data Review screen is divided into three sections, as shown in
Figure 9-4.

9-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-4 Sections of the Data Review Screen

TIC/RICWindow

Scan/Spectrum
Window

Control
Panel
Window

TIC/RIC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This window displays the Total Ion
Chromatogram. This is the screen where
basic data analysis, such as backgroundsubtraction and selecting peaks, isconducted.

Scan/Spectrum Window . . . . . . . . This window displays the spectrum
generated from the TIC/RIC window. Thiswindow will also display NIST matches if
Search NIST/User is checked in the Control
Panel.

9-4

IPN 074-472-P1C

Control Panel Window . . . . . . . . . . This window allows the input of masses toplot RICs for the specified mass. Check
Search NIST/User to search the NIST libraryfor the current spectrum.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.3 Data Review Toolbar
The Data Review toolbar is shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Data Review Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aborts a running method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stops a method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pauses a Run in Progress.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accesses Data File Information Page (seeFigure 9-6).

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-6 Data File Information Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views search reports for this data file.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens NIST Program.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens NIOSH Database.

9-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens AMDIS Program.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens the previous file in the current
directory.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens the next file in the current directory.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens previous SIM Set (used when
scanning by SIM).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens next SIM Set (used when scanning by
SIM).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens all SIM Sets.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moves to previous peak when Search forPeaks function has been run.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moves to next peak when Search for Peaks
function has been run.

IPN 074-472-P1C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the full chromatogram display.

9-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.4 RMB (Right Mouse Button) Menus within Data Review
All functions within Data Review can be obtained by right-clicking the mouse buttonon the appropriate window, be it the TIC window, the Spectrum window, the RIC
window, or the Control Panel window.

9.4.1 RMB in the TIC/RIC Window
The Figure 9-7 shows the functions available when right-clicking on the TIC
window.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-7 RMB Menu in TIC/RIC Window

Common Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, all RIC plots will be plotted tothe same scale; when not checked all RIC
plots will be individually scaled to 100%.
Select Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allows the scan cursor to select a specificscan.
View All Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rescales the plot to display the entire run.
Also accessed by F-11.
View Temperature Profile. . . . . . . . Graphically show the GC temperature profile
from the method.
Change Plot Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes the color of the TIC plot.

9-7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Label Chromatogram . . . . . . . . . . . Brings up a text box to label thechromatogram. The label can be moved withthe cursor and can be saved with the data
file.
Scan Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtracts the current scan from thedisplayed RIC plots.
Peaks gives you the following submenu:
Switch to AMDIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches to the AMDIS program. Also
accessed by Shift+F8.
Search for Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search the TIC for peaks.
Show Current Search Results . . . . . . . Displays the results of the Search forPeaks selection.
Clear the Peaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clears the identification of peaks fromthe TIC graph.
Label the Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels identified peaks with retention
time and area.
Change Search Parameters. . . . . . . . . Displays the peak searchparameters, enables modification of
the parameters.
Previous Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . View results from a previous search.
(Drop down menu of previously
opened data files.)TIC Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays TIC window.

Spectrum Scan ### . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays current
Spectrum/Scan window.
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays the Control Panel.
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allows access to the properties of thedisplay.

9-8

IPN 074-472-P1C

RIC Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays the RIC window.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.4.2 RMB in the Spectrum Display Window
The Spectrum display is shown in the Scan Window. Every time the LMB (Left
Mouse Button) is double-clicked in the TIC window, a spectrum for that scan isdisplayed. Clicking the RMB in the Scan/Spectrum window will access the menu
shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Spectrum Display Menu

Label Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, will display the mass
numbers in the Spectrum window.
Label Spectrum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brings up a text box to allow the analyst to
manually label the spectrum in the Spectrum
window.

IPN 074-472-P1CShow Spectrum Cursor . . . . . . . . . Shows the Spectrum Cursor in the Spectrum
window.
Show Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Will display the description of the Scan
Cursor location and normalization mass. If
Search the NIST Library is checked, this will
display the NIST match information in the
spectrum window along with providing
additional description options in the Control
Panel Window.
NOTE: Is only active if Search NIST/User isselected.
Unlock Normalization Cursor . . . . Must be unlocked to move the normalization
cursor to a mass other than the 100% massfragment.
Unlock Mass Cursors. . . . . . . . . . . Unlocks the mass cursors to change any
RICs assigned to the display.

9-9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualSpectrum Mass List . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays a report of all the masses in the
spectrum.
Delete Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deletes masses from the display and for the
purpose of searching the NIST library. (Doesnot delete data.)
Grab Spectrum for Template . . . . . Used for target compound methods. See
Chapter 12, Target Compound Methods.
Grab Spectrum for Calibration . . . Used for Survey target compound methods.
See Chapter 12, Target Compound
Methods.
NIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allows the analyst to utilize the NIST
database for qualitative identification of thedisplayed spectrum.
TIC Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays TIC window.
Spectrum Scan ### . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, displays current
Spectrum/Scan window.
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When checked, display the Control Panel.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allows access to the properties of thedisplay.

9 - 10HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.5 The TIC/RIC Display Functions
There are tools available to assist in the Data Review process.

9.5.1 How to Access the Scan Cursor
The specific scan displayed in the Spectrum window is accessed using the Scan
Cursor in the TIC window. See Figure 9-9.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-9 Location of the Scan Cursor

The Scan Cursor can be moved to the desired location by:Placing the mouse cursor over the Green Triangle, click and hold the Left
Mouse Button, then drag the cursor to the peak/area of interest.

Double clicking the Left Mouse Button over the peak/area of interest.

Using the arrow keys on the computer.

9 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.5.2 How to Use Background Subtraction
WARNINGBe careful not to subtract a data/peaks that may beneeded for proper identification within thechromatogram.
Background subtraction is a key component in "cleaning up" spectra before
attempting to search against a database such as NIST. In order to obtainbackground spectra, there are two triangles ("cursors"), one with one blue line
designated as Background 1 (B1), the other with two blue lines designated as
Background 2 (B2), located at the bottom left of the TIC window.
NOTE: All background subtractions are indicated in the Spectrum window by
the designation Scan Number - B1(range) - B2(range).
9.5.2.1 Steps Required to Perform a One Point Background Subtraction

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-10 Original Chromatogram

9 - 12

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1 Using the Scan Cursor, select a peak of interest in the chromatogram. Refer toFigure 9-10.

2 Perform a manual NIST search by pressing the F7 key or by checking the
Search NIST/User box in the Control Panel. The search shows multiple
results. Refer to Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-11 Using Background Subtract

IPN 074-472-P1C

3 Select the background subtract blue triangle from the lower left side of thechromatogram and drag to an area on either side of the selected peak. Refer
to Figure 9-11.

4 The identification is now chlorobenzene with three duplications. The first ID has
an SI# of 706. Refer to Figure 9-11.
NOTE: Both background subtract tools can be used if two background subtract
ranges are desired.

9 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.5.2.2 Background Subtraction Using a Range of Points
Figure 9-12 Using Background Subtraction to Remove a Smaller PeakMultiple scans in an area, such as a smaller peak on the side of a larger peak, cancomplicate the chromatograph. The background can be widened to remove an
area. Refer to Figure 9-12.
(Left Mouse Button), then drag B1 to the location where the background should
be subtracted.

2 Move the cursor to the tip of the B1 marker. The cursor should change to avertical double headed arrow. Holding the LMB while moving the double
headed arrow up, widens or selects a range for the background. Moving it down
narrows the range of the background. The left and right side boundaries can be
manually adjusted using a drag and drop with the LMB.

3 Repeat Step 2 for Background 2 (if desired) using the triangle with TWO bluelines (B2).

9 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

1 Place the cursor on the triangle with ONE blue line (B1). Click and hold the LMBHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.5.2.3 Additional Features of the Background Tool
If the cursor is placed over B1 or B2, and the Right Mouse Button is clicked, see
Figure 9-13, a menu will pop-up that will give the analyst the option to:
Figure 9-13 Background Subtract RMB Menu

Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove the Background cursor
Select Mass for Integration . . . . . . Select the TIC or RIC for Integration
Show Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the integration on the x-axis
Show Retention Time . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the retention time on the x-axis

9.5.3 Utilizing the Range ToolWARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Be careful not to leave out data/peaks that may be needed
for proper identification within the chromatogram.
The Range Tool provides the analyst with the ability to average spectra overa "range" of scans across a given peak. This is helpful when analytes are in low
concentrations or to select a section of a peak when there is co-elution. The ability
to establish a range and average the spectra within that range will allow better
matches with the NIST database. The range tool is the triangle with the two red
vertical lines located at the bottom left hand of the TIC window.
Figure 9-14 displays a TIC/RIC window showing how it would look if ranging is
initiated.
NOTE: All ranges are indicated in the Scan/Spectrum window by the designation:
R1 [Range Start Scan, Range End Scan].

9 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-14 Using the Range Tool

9.5.3.1 Steps Required to Range Acquisition

1 Place the cursor on the triangle with Two Red Vertical Lines (R1). Click andhold the LMB. Then, drag R1 to the location where the scans should beaveraged. Refer to Figure 9-14.
vertical double-headed arrow. Holding the LMB, moving the double-headed
arrow up widens a range. Moving the arrow down narrows the range of thepeak averaging. The red range lines should intersect the peak sides at 50% of
their height. The left and right side boundaries can be manually adjusted using
a drag and drop with the LMB.

9 - 16

IPN 074-472-P1C

2 Move the cursor to the tip of the R1 marker. The cursor should change to a

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.5.3.2 Additional Features of the Range Tool
If the cursor is placed over R1, and the RMB is clicked, the following menu items
are available. See Figure 9-15.
Figure 9-15 Range Tool RMB Menu

Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removes the Range cursor
Select Mass for Integration . . . . . . Selects the TIC or RIC for Integration
Show Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the integration on the x-axis
Show Retention Time . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the retention time on the x-axis
Show Signal/Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows Signal to Noise Ratio. A Background
Must be Selected using B1 first.
Subtract Current Spectrum . . . . . . Subtracts the current spectrum (Green
Triangle) from the range.

IPN 074-472-P1C

9.6 Using the Zoom Function
WARNINGBe careful not to leave out data/peaks that may be needed
for proper identification within the chromatogram.

The Zoom function allows targeting a particular section of thechromatogram for a detailed view.
Co-elution of peaks can be detected by zooming in on odd shaped peaks.

9 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.6.1 Using the Zoom Function in the TIC/RIC Window
There are two ways to Zoom into a TIC/RIC:

1 Move the mouse cursor to the Magnifying glass with the "+" inside. When theLeft Mouse Button (LMB) is clicked, there will appear two vertical lines on the
TIC/RIC graph window. Place the cursor on one of the vertical lines. Click andhold the LMB. Drag the vertical line to where zooming may begin. Repeat theactions of the previous sentence for the second vertical line. See Figure 9-16.
Once the Zoom range has been set, move the mouse cursor within the range.
The cursor will turn into a magnifying glass. Click the LMB, and the display will
Zoom in on the area selected.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-16 Selecting Area to Zoom

2 Press and hold the LMB at the point in the TIC where Zoom should begin. A
vertical line will appear. Drag the cursor to the position that Zoom should end,
and release LMB. Place the mouse cursor within the two vertical lines. The
cursor will turn into a magnifying glass. Click the LMB, and the display will zoom
in on the area selected. Refer to Figure 9-17.

9 - 18HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-17 Zoomed Spectrum

3 To Unzoom, click on the Magnifying Glass with the "-" inside. Alternately, movethe cursor below the x-axis of the TIC window. Then click the LMB.

9.6.2 Using The Zoom Spectrum Function

IPN 074-472-P1C

Zooming into a spectrum requires selection of the Zoom buttons on the right sideof the spectrum window.

1 Click the Zoom button, and a rectangle is displayed in the spectrum window.
2 Place the cursor in the middle of the rectangle until the cursor turns into afour-headed arrow. See Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-18 Selecting Area to Zoom

3 Press and hold the LMB, then drag the box to the Zoom location.
4 Adjust the box size to the desired Zoom area.

9 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Place cursor within the desired Zoom area, the cursor will turn into a magnifying
glass. Click the LMB. See Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Placing Cursor in Area to Be Zoomed

To unzoom, either one of the following actions will accomplish the task:
Click on the magnifying glass on the right hand side of the window with the "-"inside the magnifying glass.



Clicking the cursor outside the spectrum box. This is located underneath thex-axis.

9.7 Displaying Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms (RIC)
RIC plots are useful when locating specific compounds in a chromatogram. A RIC
plot of the top two or three mass fragments can help locate the peak of interest.

9 - 20

Using the Control Panel window, click on the Mass box. Type in the desired RIC
mass, then press the Enter key. Multiple masses can be entered and displayedin the RIC plot. Each RIC will have a unique color plot displayed in the RIC
window, and the same color Control Panel check box. See Figure 9-20.

In the Spectrum Window, select the mass to be displayed. Double-clicking ona mass in the Scan Window will automatically insert the selected mass in theControl Panel table as well as display the RIC for the selected mass. Multiple
masses can be selected and displayed.

IPN 074-472-P1C

There are two ways to display RICs:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-20 RIC Plot

When the box in the Control Panel labeled -RIC is checked, the TIC/RIC window
will display the TIC minus the RIC selected.

9.7.1 RIC Plot to Locate Specific Compounds

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: Before running NIST, position the scan cursor over the peak of interest in
the TIC plot.

1 Either from the System Setup View or the Data Review screen, double-click on
the NIST icon. See Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21 NIST Icon

2 Click on the NAMES tab at the bottom of the NIST screen. See Figure 9-22.
Figure 9-22 NIST Names Tab

9 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Enter the name of the compound, to be located, in the box on the top left of thescreen. EXAMPLE: Benzene. See Figure 9-23.
Figure 9-23 NIST Name Entry

4 The spectrum and information about the compound will appear in the two boxes
to the right of the names column.

5 In the bottom right box, the 10 Largest Peaks will be listed. Make a note of thethree largest mass peaks that are between 45-300 AMU.
NOTE: Peaks are listed in order from the largest to the smallest. EXAMPLE:
Benzene's three largest peaks are masses 78, 77 and 51. See Figure
9-24.
Figure 9-24 Top 10 Masses

6 Minimize the NIST window and return to the Plus IQ Data screen displaying the
TIC chromatogram.

7 Enter the three largest peaks in the boxes under the Mass (it may also be
shown as Ma...) in the control panel box. Figure 9-20. For the Benzene
example, 78, 77 and 51 are entered.
in the RIC window and create a new row in the control panel for an additional
mass to be entered. See Figure 9-25.
Figure 9-25 Entering Masses in Control Panel

9 As soon as the first mass is checked, a RIC plot will open directly under the TIC
plot. See Figure 9-26.
NOTE: This RIC window can be closed by un-checking the masses selected in thecontrol panel.

9 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

8 Check the box to the left of the mass or press ENTER. This will plot the mass

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-26 RIC Plot for Suspected Benzene One Mass Selected

10 The compound may be present in the unknown sample if all three masses(peaks) align in the RIC plot. Use F7 NIST program to confirm identification of
the suspected compound. See Figure 9-27.
NOTE: There may or may not be a peak visible in the TIC plot.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-27 RIC Plot to locate Benzene — Three Masses Selected

11 The compound was not detected in the unknown sample if all three masses(peaks) are not present, or do not align together in the RIC plot.

9 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.8 NIST Library Searches
A TIC or sequential SIM peak qualitative identification can be accomplished using
the integrated features of the NIST Mass Spectral Database found on the Laptop.
Figure 9-28 Searching a Library

Figure 9-28 shows the TIC Window, the Spectrum Window and the Control Panel
Window. Steps required to invoke a qualitative search are:

2 The spectrum will be displayed in the Spectrum window.
3 Press the F7 key, or use the RMB to display the pop-up windows as shown.
Search NIST/User box in the Control Panel window can also be checked toinitiate a NIST search.

4 The search results are displayed both in the Spectrum window as well as theControl Panel window. See Figure 9-29.

9 - 24

IPN 074-472-P1C

1 Click the cursor on the peak of interest in the TIC window.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-29 Search Results Display

Additional information may be obtained by checking the boxes in the Control Panel.

IPN 074-472-P1C

These boxes, when checked, will provide information so that the NIST Match andthe spectrum generated by HAPSITE Plus IQ can be compared. See Figure 9-30.

9 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-30 Comparison of NIST and Spectrum

If the Description box is checked, the NIST header information such as Similarity
Index (SI), Formula, and CAS number will be displayed.
If the Search Result Masses box is checked, the masses and relative intensities
are displayed for the NIST reference spectrum.

9.8.1 Searching Peaks
The Search for Peaks function allows the analyst the capability to search theentire TIC for qualitative identification of each peak detected by the searchfunction. The Search for Peaks function will also integrate each peak area thatmeets the search criteria. It will then give the analyst a report showing the area
percent that peak contributed to the total area of all peaks found.
The Search for Peaks function is accessed by clicking the RMB on the TIC/RIC
window.
Select Peaks. The submenu pops up displaying the choices. See Figure 9-31.

9 - 26

IPN 074-472-P1C

If the Scan Spectrum Masses box is checked, the HAPSITE Plus IQ masses andrelative intensities are displayed for the unknown spectrum.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-31 Peaks Menu Choices

To view and adjust the search parameters, select Change Search Parametersfrom the submenu.
Figure 9-32 displays the parameters that will determine what peaks are found. The
Peak Search Parameters window is divided into sections of Peak Search, AMDIS,
Libraries, and Elimination Rules. These can be modified to make the search as
selective or as general as required.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-32 Peak Search Parameters Window

After the Peak Search parameters have been optimized, select Peaks >> Search
for Peaks. After analysis, the following will be displayed (see Figure 9-33):

9 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-33 Post Analysis Display

In Figure 9-33, both the Search for Peaks function and the Label the Peaks
function have been selected. Therefore, the retention time of each peak isdisplayed in the TIC/RIC window. At the top of the TIC/RIC window, the black
triangles mark each peak that met the search parameters.
To display the results, select Peaks >> Show current search results. The results
screen will be displayed.
The results screen displays the information pertaining to each peak that met the
search criteria. See Figure 9-34.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-34 Results Display

9 - 28HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Qualitative identification of each peak found by the Search function can be done bychecking either Search in NIST, Search in AMDIS or both. After the search is
selected and the Search button is clicked, the screen shown in Figure 9-35 isdisplayed.
Figure 9-35 Identification of Each Peak

IPN 074-472-P1C

When the search is completed, each peak will have identifications in the Hits
Found section of the table. Click on the arrow button next to each peak in the Hits
Found section to display all of the hits as per the Search Parameters.
NOTE: When the Hits Found are displayed, the hits found in the AMDIS librarywill have the words (AMDIS) displayed. NIST hits do not display the word
(NIST).
From the Peaks Found screen, other functions can be accessed:


NIST Search Setup, where the libraries that NIST will use are defined

Peak Search Parameters, where parameters can be changed to improve thesearch

Redo Peak Search, where the search can be reanalyzed after changes to thePeak Search Parameters have been made.

To print a report of the results, click on the Report Preview button. This will resultin the following screen being displayed.

9 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-36 Preview Screen

The report is displayed, refer to Figure 9-36. Some options are:

Check the box that says Report as shown in the grid. This will only display
the first hit found for each peak. With the box unchecked, all hits for each peak
are displayed.



Export to Excel will create an Excel® text file, open Excel and display the file.



Print will print the report as displayed.

9.8.2 Analyzing Data Using AMDIS

AMDIS utilizes its own databases. The HAPSITE Plus IQ utilizes the HAPSITE.msl
AMDIS library.

9.8.3 How To Access AMDIS
AMDIS can be accessed by the following methods:


Selecting the AMDIS button on the Function Toolbar, orRight click in the TIC window, then select Peaks >> Switch to AMDIS, orWith the TIC window as the active window, press the Shift+F8 key.
NOTE: AMDIS only works on the TIC data. AMDIS does not use spectrumdata.

9 - 30

IPN 074-472-P1C

AMDIS is an additional program provided by NIST and can be used to analyze data
generated by the HAPSITE Plus IQ. AMDIS is the acronym for Automated Mass
Spectrum Deconvolution and Identification System.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

When the analyst invokes AMDIS, upon completion of the analysis, the program
returns the Results Screen. See the inset in Figure 9-37. The results screen
includes:

Retention Time Window

Identifications WindowComponent Window

Match Quality Window

Library Tab

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-37 AMDIS Results Screen

This provides the results of the AMDIS data analysis and provides all the data thatmost analysts need. If a particular analysis needs additional confirmation, press theConfirm button to access the Confirm Window, see Figure 9-38.

9 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-38 AMDIS Confirm Window

This window shows the complete analysis, peak by peak. If there are any peaks
that were not identified by AMDIS, use the NIST database to identify them.
9.8.3.1 Accessing NIST from AMDIS
To use the NIST database to identify a peak not identified by AMDIS:

2 Select Analyze >> Add component/scan to search list
3 Select Analyze >> Go to NIST MS ProgramThis will place the selected component scan from the search list into the NIST
program and will utilize the NIST database for identification. See Figure 9-39.

9 - 32

IPN 074-472-P1C

1 Highlight the peak not identified by clicking on the triangle above the peak

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-39 NIST Database Search

9.8.4 Analyzing Data Using NIST
By right-clicking on the Spectrum window, the NIST menu appears. See Figure
9-40.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-40 NIST Menu

Grab Spectrum for NIST (F9) . . . . . This function will grab the spectrum selected
and put the spectrum in the grab file for use
within the NIST program.

9 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Clear NIST Grab file . . . . . . . . . . . . Clears the grab file of previous files.
Switch to NIST Program (F8). . . . . Starts the full NIST program and will place
any files that are in the grab file into the Spec
List. It then begins analysis of them.
Search NIST/User (F7) . . . . . . . . . . Starts the NIST program and does searches.
Displays matches on the Scan /Spectrum
window and Control Panel.
Exit Search NIST/User (Alt+F7) . . . Exits the Search NIST/User database searchfunction.
Add to NIST User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add selected spectrum to a Search
NIST/User database.
Manage NIST User Database. . . . . Display, delete or plot entries in a Search
NIST/User database.

9.8.5 How to Grab Spectra/Utilize the Full NIST Program
The sequence of events required to utilize the full NIST program are:

1 Double-click on the peak in the TIC/RIC window to update the spectrum
window.

2 Place the cursor in the Spectrum window and RMB click. Select NIST >> Clear
NIST Grabfile

3 Place the cursor in the Spectrum window and RMB click. Select NIST >> Grab
Spectrum for NIST. See Figure 9-41.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-41 Pop-Up WIndow, Grab Spectrum for NIST

4 After the spectrum has been grabbed, either:

press F8 to open the full NIST program.

select NIST >> Switch to NIST Program.

Once inside the NIST Program, the analysis will be performed. There are manyother features that the NIST program has to offer. See Figure 9-42.

9 - 34

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 9-42 NIST Database

Notice the tabs at the bottom of the NIST window. These are multiple windows thatmake use of all the functions in the NIST software.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The NIST program is a third-party software that comes with the HAPSITE Plus IQ
software. Instructions on how to fully utilize the NIST and AMDIS software areincluded in the NIST Mass Spectral Database folder on the Laptop and the HELP
selection of either program from the Menu selection.

9 - 35

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.9 Reporting and Printing Data
Reports are generated in Data Review utilizing the HAPSITE Plus IQ software by:using the method that acquired the datautilizing the Search for Peaks function

printing a report

9.9.1 Method Generated Reports
To access reports generated by the method that acquired the data being reviewed,
the View Search Results icon should be accessed from the Results screen. See
Figure 9-43. Alternately, View Search Results may be accessed in the Data
Review pull down menu. It will display the screen shown in Figure 9-44.
Figure 9-43 View Search Results Icon

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-44 Search Reports Screen

There are a maximum of three reports available, depending on how the method
used to generate the data was configured. They are:

9 - 36

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generates a report based upon the
Qualitative and Quantitative results. It will
display quantitative results for identified
compounds included in the Target Library.
Compounds not included in the Target
Library will be identified by the AMDIS
Library.
Qualitative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generates a report based upon searching
the ADMIS library and displaying apredetermined number of matches based
upon the search criteria
Quantitative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generates a report based upon a calibrated
Target Compound Library. Results arereported in the specified units. This report
can be exported to Excel.
NOTE: This will be empty if no calibration
library is in use.
To export the Quantitative Report to Excel for further work, click on the Export to
Excel button, which will produce the window shown in Figure 9-45.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 9-45 Qualitative Report in Excel

9 - 37

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9.10 Plus IQ Hot Keys
Table 9-1 Plus IQ Hot Keys

Keys

Functions

Crtl+oOpen data file

F3

Datafile Info

F7

Search NIST (when a peak is selected)

Alt+N

Next NIST Hit (when NIST is showing)

Alt+P

Previous NIST Hit (when NIST is showing)

F8

Switch to NIST Program

F9

Grab spectrum for NIST

Shift+F8 Switch to AMDIS
F11

Full Plot (resumes chromatogram to live data, or restoresa zoomed area)

Ctrl+P

Print

Page up Expands the Y Axis view to show twice the current max
scale (if it was 100%, it will show 200% after it ispressed-up to 800%)
Zooms the Y Axis view to show half the current max
setting (if it was 100%, it will show 50%-down to 0.4%)

IPN 074-472-P1C

Page
down

9 - 38HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 10
Saving and Managing Files
10.1 Saving Files on the HAPSITE
File types are created two ways, either by the HAPSITE software or by the analyst
when analyses are performed. The list of possible file types includes:


Method filesEvent Log files



Data files

Tune files

Report files

10.1.1 Method Files
Method files are created using the HAPSITE Plus IQ software to direct the
instrument how to collect and analyze samples. Once created and saved, a Method
file can be selected to run samples. Method files are created using the Method
Editor and saved using either to a directory on the Laptop or to the HAPSITE hard
drive.

IPN 074-472-P1C

To save a newly created method using the Method Editor, press the Save button at
the bottom of the Method Editor window. The dialog window shown in Figure 10-1
is displayed. Notice that the default location to save a method file is to the
HAPSITE.
NOTE: Method files can be saved to the HAPSITE only if the HAPSITE isconnected to the PC. Refer to section 2.4.6, Connect Laptop (if desired),on page 2-10 for additional information on how to connect the Laptop to
the HAPSITE.

10 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-1 Save Method File Dialog Window - HAPSITE Option SelectedEnter the new file name in the box labeled File Name. The file location may bechanged to save in the GCMS (Analyze) or Survey directory, or a new directory
may be created using the Create Folder button, as shown in Figure 10-2.

To create a new folder, name the new folder then open the new folder before saving
the Method file. Once the location and name have been chosen, press OK to savethe file. See Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 Entering a New Method File NameHINT: The HAPSITE Plus software is case sensitive. Folder names on the
HAPSITE and Laptop must be exactly the same. Example: Bakeout must
be written in both places as Bakeout, not as bakeout and BAKEOUT.

10 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 10-2 Create Folder Button

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10.1.2 Event Log Files
Event Log Files are created automatically by the system to record system state
information (such as heating, valve changes, etc.) for future reference. These files
are created daily when running the HAPSITE using the Plus IQ software. Thesefiles are saved on the Laptop. Refer to section 10.2, Saving Files to the Laptop, on
page 10-9, for more information.

10.1.3 Data Files
Data files are automatically saved to the HAPSITE hard drive, in a data directoryunder a folder named the same as the Method used to run the analysis. For
example, in the case where a Method named Method01 was used to run theanalysis, the folder where files are saved for that method would be data\Method01\.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The default naming convention for these files is to use the method name with anunderscore and 3 digits added to the end. The first file would start with _001. This
file name would then be incremented each time a new analysis is performed. The
name may be modified by selecting the Method Editor - Data page, shown in
Figure 10-4.

10 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-4 Method Editor - Data, Showing File Name Options

10.1.4 Tune Files
Refer to Chapter 7, Tune for additional information on Tune.
NOTE: Manual Tuning requires Advanced access. Normal users do not haveaccess to Manual Tune. Refer to section 8.9, Access Levels, on page 8-23
for additional information on Access Levels.
If Manual Tune is performed, the file must be saved to the Tune folder on the
HAPSITE. Figure 10-5 shows a typical Manual Tune screen, which is opened by
selecting the Tune icon in the System Setup window, or by right-clicking on asensor icon and selecting Tune. To save changes made during manual tuning,press the Save Tune button on the Sensor Toolbar and tune will be saved
immediately. Other ways to save a tune file include using File >> Save, File >>Save As, or Tune >> Save Tune Parameters.

10 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

The system allows flexibility to add Date or Date and Time as a prefix or suffix. A
different naming convention if Use Default Filename is not selected.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: Tune files are saved, by default, to the HAPSITE hard drive under the\Tune folder.
Figure 10-5 Manual Tuning Screen Showing Save Tune Button

When an attempt is made to exit manual tune without saving, a window will appear
asking Do you want to save the changes to a tune file? See Figure 10-6. To
save the file, press Yes. If not saving the tune file, press No. Pressing Cancel willabort exiting tune without saving the tune file. If saving the tune file, the Save Tune
File window will appear as shown in Figure 10-7. Select a Tune file name and press
OK.
IPN 074-472-P1C

HINT: It is highly recommended to always save the tune as default.tun.
Figure 10-6 Save Changes Prompt

10 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-7 Save Tune File Screen

Once the Tune file is saved, the Save Tune File and Manual Tune windows will beclosed.
If the Tune file already exists, a prompt will appear to confirm that the file will beoverwritten. The confirmation window is shown in Figure 10-8.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 10-8 Overwrite Existing Tune File Confirm Window

To overwrite the file, select Yes, otherwise select No. If No is selected, the Save
Tune File window will appear.

10 - 6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10.1.5 Data Review
Data review is used to view and analyze data files. To open files, double-click on
the Data Review icon in the System Setup window, or right-click on a HAPSITE
icon and select Data Review, or select a file from the Recent Files list in System
Setup view. The Data Review window is shown in Figure 10-9. Refer to Chapter 9,
Data Review for additional information on Data Review.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 10-9 Data Review Recall Window

The window opens showing the data folder for the currently selected HAPSITE
Data Files, organized the same as method files. Data files are saved under/Data/method_folder_name/ where the method_folder_namecorresponds to the folder in which the method is located. For example, if themethod called Default was used to run the analysis, the folder would be
Data/Default. To select a file to open, open a folder then click on the desired data
file to open, then click the OK button. See Figure 10-10, which shows a selected
data file.
NOTE: Plus IQ data files are saved with a .hps file extension at the end of thefilename.

10 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-10 Data Review Recall Window

IPN 074-472-P1C

The data file is opened in the Data Review window, as shown in Figure 10-11.

10 - 8HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-11 Viewing Results in the Data Review Window

IPN 074-472-P1C

Data files stored on the Laptop may also be opened for review. To open files on the
Laptop, select the PC button at the top of the Data Review window, refer to Figure
10-10, then select the appropriate file from the Laptop hard drive.
NOTE: Alternately, select Manage Files, to copy files, manage folders, or delete
files and folders on either the HAPSITE or Laptop hard drive.

10.2 Saving Files to the Laptop
File types are created two ways, either by the analyst or by the HAPSITE software
when analyses are performed. The list of possible file types includes:


Method filesEvent Log files



Data files

Tune files

Report files

10 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10.2.1 Method Files
Method files are created using the HAPSITE Plus IQ software to direct the
instrument how to collect and analyze samples. Once created and saved, a Method
file can be selected to run samples. Method files are created and saved using the
Method Editor, to either a folder on the Laptop or the HAPSITE hard drive.
After method parameter changes are entered, the method needs to be saved.
When ready to save the method, press the Save button at the bottom of the Method
Editor window and the dialog window below is displayed. Notice that the default
location to save a method file is to the HAPSITE. Method files may be saved to the
Laptop hard drive in a manner similar to the way they are saved to the HAPSITE.
To save Method files to the Laptop, select the PC option as shown below in Figure
10-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 10-12 Save Method File Dialog Window - PC Option Selected

Selecting a different Laptop disk drive is achieved by clicking on the drive drop
down box. (Figure 10-12 shows Local Disk (C:) selected.) To change folders on adrive and choose from a list of available hard drives, move up using the Up One
Level button (shown in Figure 10-13), or by double-clicking on an entry in the main
file list. New folders may be created by selecting the New Folder button.
Figure 10-13 Up One Level Button

10 - 10

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10.2.2 Event Log Files
Event Log Files are created automatically by the system to record system state
information, such as heating or valve changes, for future reference. These files are
created daily when running the HAPSITE using the Laptop Plus IQ software. Thesefiles are saved in the Sensor directory Events folder (as shown in Figure 10-14) as
C:\haps4\. The events would be saved in C:\haps4\Events by specifying
this location. The location where log files are saved can be changed only bychanging the Sensor directory.
By default, log files are deleted after 30 days. To modify how long the files are
saved, open up sensor properties by right-clicking on a HAPSITE Sensor icon andselecting Properties. It can also be modified by double-clicking on a sensor or by
selecting the menu item Tools >> Sensor Properties. Select the Data Settings
tab. The window shown in Figure 10-14 below will appear.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 10-14 Sensor Properties - Data Settings

On the Maintain Logs line of Data Settings, the number of days which the log file
will be saved may be changed. Maintain Logs can also be used to save all createdfiles indefinitely. If a number of days is selected, each time HAPSITE Plus IQ is run
the HAPSITE will delete files which are older than the number of days selected.
NOTE: This setting is saved in the HAPSITE Plus IQ.ini file in the HAPSITE Plus
IQ program install directory. If for any reason the HAPSITE.ini file isreloaded or deleted, the setting will change back to the default setting ofMaintain Logs for 30 days. Log files use the naming convention:
LogYYYYMMDD.evt, where YYYY is year, MM is month, and DD is day.

10 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10.2.3 Data Files
Data files are automatically saved to the HAPSITE hard drive. Data files are also
saved to the Laptop if the Laptop is connected and running Plus IQ when themethod finishes. To save these files to the Laptop, use the Manage Files dialog totransfer the files from the HAPSITE to the Laptop. For more information ontransferring files, see section 10.3, Transferring Files Between the HAPSITE and
Laptop, on page 10-12.

10.2.4 Tune Files
Tune files are automatically saved to the HAPSITE hard drive. To save Tune files
to the Laptop, use the Manage Files dialog to transfer the files from the HAPSITE
to the Laptop. For more information on transferring files, see section 10.3,
Transferring Files Between the HAPSITE and Laptop, on page 10-12.

10.2.5 Report Files
Report files are automatically saved to the HAPSITE hard drive. To save Reportfiles to the Laptop, use the Manage Files dialog to transfer the files from the
HAPSITE to the Laptop. For more information on transferring files, see section
10.3, Transferring Files Between the HAPSITE and Laptop, on page 10-12.
NOTE: Report files are embedded in the data files so copying them to the PC isnot critical.

Transfer of files between the HAPSITE and Laptop in the HAPSITE Plus IQ
software can be performed using Manage Files. To open the Manage File dialog,
either right click on a sensor icon then select Manage Files, or select a sensor thendouble-click on the Manage Files icon in the System Setup view. The Manage
Files icon is shown in Figure 10-15.
Figure 10-15 Manage Files Icon in System Setup View

The Manage Files dialog allows the transfer of files directly from the HAPSITE to
the Laptop, or from the Laptop to the HAPSITE. The Manage Files dialog is shownin Figure 10-16.
NOTE: Data files cannot be copied from the Laptop to the HAPSITE.

10 - 12IPN 074-472-P1C

10.3 Transferring Files Between the HAPSITE and Laptop

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 10-16 Manage Files Dialog Window

IPN 074-472-P1C

In the Manage Files window, the left side displays PC files while the right side
displays HAPSITE files. The current folder directory is listed for both the PC and
HAPSITE at the top of the window. The PC drive can be changed by clicking on the
Drive pull-down list and selecting another available drive. Pressing the Up One
Level button will move the directory back to the parent directory. Double-clicking
on a folder will open the folder.
HINT: The Name, Size, and Date columns can be resized by clicking and holding
the left mouse button on the line at the right edge of the field. Then drag it
to resize. Double-clicking on the right edge of any field will size the field to
fit the data. Single-clicking on a column heading will sort the list based onthat column.
Folders or files may be renamed by selecting the appropriate file or folder, thenselecting the Rename button. The Rename dialog is shown in Figure 10-17.
Figure 10-17 Manage Files - Rename Window

10 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Files or folders may be deleted using the Delete button. Select the desired file orfolder to delete, then press the Delete button. A window will appear asking for
confirmation to delete the file or folder. Select Yes to perform the delete, otherwise
select No. The delete confirm window is shown in Figure 10-18.
Figure 10-18 Manage Files - Delete Confirm Window

Folders or individual files or groups of files within a folder may be moved between
the Laptop and HAPSITE. To move a single file, make sure the desired destination
directory is already opened. Then, click on the file and press the arrow button tomove the file to the selected directory. A section of files may be moved by clicking
on the first file in the section, holding the shift key, then clicking on the last file inthe section to move. Individual files may also be added to the list by holding down
the Ctrl key and clicking on files. To complete the transfer, press the arrow button.
HINT: To move files from the Laptop to the HAPSITE, use the Copy button withthe arrow pointed right (see Figure 10-19). To move files from the HAPSITE
to the Laptop, use the Copy button with the arrow pointing left.
NOTE: Only method files may be moved to the HAPSITE.
Figure 10-19 Copying Files from the Laptop to HAPSITE Button

NOTE: Information about a selected file is listed in the bottom box of the window.
The information will vary based on the type of file selected and thedescription information entered for that file.
The Backup Function will back up the selected file(s) that are on the HAPSITE
onto the Laptop.
The Backup All Function will backup all files on the HAPSITE onto the Laptop.
When finished, click the Done button to close the Manage Files window.

10 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

HINT: New folders may be created using the Create Folder button.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 11
Method Editor
11.1 The Method Editor
WARNING
Only trained users should create methods. Selecting aparameter that is incorrect may provide an inaccurate
analysis of the compound(s) sampled.
The HAPSITE Method File provides for the identification, quantitative, andqualitative analysis of volatile compounds in the sample. The main components
covered in this section, which are used to build the HAPSITE Method File, are theInlet component, which is built on the Inlet page, the Acquisition component, which
is built on the Full Scan page, and the Calibration/Quantitation component, which
is built on the Search page.

IPN 074-472-P1C

When completed, the HAPSITE Method File normally is saved to the HAPSITE sothat the HAPSITE can run in Portable Mode, without the need for an external
computer. This chapter will instruct how to build a method to quantify a VOC(Volatile Organic Compound).
The Method File is used at an incident site where the hazard has not been
identified. A HAPSITE Method File will allow a search from a default range of 45 to
300 AMU and generate a data file for analysis. The file will include many target
compounds, for which the HAPSITE can be calibrated, but may also include
unexpected compounds. The unexpected compounds are tentatively identified by
a NIST library search, allowing only for an approximate quantitation.
Before being able to quantify a compound, one must develop a HAPSITE Method
File with a calibrated target library of selected compounds. The information neededfor each component of the HAPSITE Method File is described on the following
pages:
The Description page, which specifies the type of Method being built.



The Startup page, where all initial temperatures are set, and where the input
device is selected (i.e., Probe, Headspace or SituProbe).

The Inlet page, defines the temperatures, timing, and other gas chromatographparameters as well as accessory control parameters if installed.



The Tune page requires the selection of a Tune/Calibration file, which defines
the mass spectrometer response parameters. The tune report can be displayedon this page and on the Tune page.

11 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The Full Scan component, which defines the mass range and otherparameters of the Mass Spectrometer operation, is defined on the Full Scan
page. For SIM collection, this component is configured on the SIM page.



The Search page sets the Calibration/Quantitation component, which
designates the target library file to access and search, the global GC/MS peakdesignation/integration parameters, and various reporting options.



The Data page, which sets the Data File (file extension .hps) component, andspecifies where the data will be stored. By default, data files are located in thedata folder, in the program folder and Method name pathway, e.g.,
C:\HAPSITE32\Method01\data\filename.hps.

A Summary page is provided, at the end of the Method Editor, which allows forreview and printing of the Method parameters.

NOTE: Methods cannot be viewed, created or changed when Access Level is set
to Normal.
Each functional page of the Method Editor shows a common profile at the bottom,
which depicts the Inlet States and Temperature Profile. Newly created Methods
start with a default set of Inlet States and a default Temperature Profile. Thesecan be changed as required by the application.
The Method Editor can be run in a Wizard mode, which displays one page at a timeand moves through the pages in a logical sequence while allowing movement
forward or back through the pages to make or review changes (see Figure 11-1).

In "non-Wizard" mode, which is recommended only for experienced users, allpages are available through a tab interface. To change the Wizard mode settings,
click System Properties >> Miscellaneous page (see Figure 11-2). The Method
Editor must be closed to change and affect this setting.
Figure 11-2 System Properties Miscellaneous Page Wizard Setting

All Method parameters, on each page of the Method Editor, are checked forsynchronization and correctness. The Method Editor automatically adjusts timingof the Inlet and Acquisition components to force synchronization. Prior to making
automatic adjustments, the Method Editor colors the background of allquestionable parameters with yellow. Each Method Editor page also has an Error
Information button (see Figure 11-3), which is colored yellow when parameters
are not synchronized. The editor permits movement from page to page, even whenerrors are present, because some errors may be repaired on one of many pages
and some require repair on specific pages.

11 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-1 Method Editor Navigation Buttons

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-3 Error Information Button

The order of pages that appear in Wizard mode for various collection and analysis
modes are listed in Table 11-1.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Table 11-1 Method Editor Page Flow

GC/MS Full
Scan

GC/MS SIM

Survey Full
Scan

Survey SIM

Description

Description

Description

Description

StartupStartupStartupStartup

Inlet

Inlet

Tune

Tune

Tune

Tune

Full Scan

SIM

Full ScanSIM

SearchSearchSearchSearch

Data

Data

Data

Data

Summary

Summary

Summary

Summary

Development of a Method starts with a set of default components. The default
settings are extracted from the software when editing a New Method. A New
Method is also supplied with a default Method filename, which can be changed on
any page of the editor. The editor will automatically increment the default name witheach successful launch and exit of the editor, provided the resulting Method is
saved.
Both section 11.2 and section 11.3 describe and define the Method Editor
interface. It also describes all the parameters used to create a HAPSITE Method
File. A HAPSITE Method File can be deployed in numerous configurations.
However, development of the complete method is done only on the Laptop and isthen downloaded to the HAPSITE.

11 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.2 Accessing Method Editor
CAUTION
Read all of Chapter 11 before creating a method.
NOTE: For questions relating to specific settings, refer to the previous sections of
this chapter.
Creating a method is a very involved process. Creating a method from scratch isbest left to experts; however, custom methods can be written by modifying a default
method.
To access Method Editor:

1 On the System Setup View, double-click on the Method Editor icon. See
Figure 11-46.
Figure 11-4 Method Editor Icon

2 Choose the HAPSITE to which the method will be applied and click Open. See
Figure 11-47.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-5 Method Editor Open Window

11 - 4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.3 Description PageWARNING
Incorrect selections for the mode of analysis may not
identify and/or quantify the compounds being sampled.
The first page displayed in the Method Editor is the Description Page (Figure11-6), which provides selections for the Mode of Analysis and Collection Mode.
These selections determine the default content of the remaining Editor pages andthe content of the Method file itself.
NOTE: A Method File ends with a file extension of .mth.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-6 Method Editor Description Page

11 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Mode of Analysis
Analyze (GC/MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This analysis uses both the Gas
Chromatograph (GC) and Mass
Spectrometer (MS) to separate and analyze
compounds. Compounds are tentatively
identified by a library search.
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This mode uses only the Mass Spectrometerand provides an immediate response andapproximate quantitation. Samples flow
directly to the Mass Spectrometer with noseparation of compounds by the GC.
Collection Mode
Full Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This mode scans all the masses across agiven range. This is used for general analysis
of samples when several compounds are to
be quantified or when attempting to identify
unknowns. Full Scan is available for both
Analyze (GC/MS) and Survey modes ofanalysis.

WARNING
Collection modes must be carefully selected to be sure
all the compounds are identified.

11.3.1 Full Scan Method
A full scan Analyze (GC/MS) method is used for the full identification andquantitation of volatile compounds in the sample.
The analysis may include expected (or target) compounds (for which the
instrument will be calibrated), but may also include unexpected compounds. These
must be tentatively identified by a library search, and their quantitation can only beapproximated.

11 - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

SIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Ion Monitoring, this mode is used
for specific target compounds expected to bein the sample. A higher degree of sensitivity
is provided with this mode of collection. SIM
is available for both Analyze (GC/MS) and
Survey modes of analysis. Survey analysis in
SIM Mode can be used for leak detection.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Method elements are:

If the HAPSITE is to operate separate from the Service Module, the HAPSITE
must have a NEG Pump installed and activated. Refer to section 2.8, Service
Module, on page 2-19 and Chapter 15, Service Module.



The method components must be defined. This includes the definition of:

the Data file (where the data will be stored)the Full-scan parameters (which defines the mass range and otherparameters of the mass spectrometer operation)the Library Search parameters (which designates which library file toaccess, individual and collective peak search, integration parameters, andvarious reporting options)the Inlet parameters (which defines the events and the order in which theyoccur, the temperature profile and ramping rate, the filament delay time, as
well as the control parameters of the HSS or SituProbe, if installed)

the Tune file (which optimizes the mass spectral response to the target
compounds and the Internal Standards)



If the HAPSITE is to operate without the Laptop, the method must be savedon the HAPSITE.

The HAPSITE must be tuned. (Refer to Chapter 7, Tune.)

The HAPSITE must be calibrated to the target compounds. (See Chapter
12, Target Compound Methods.)

IPN 074-472-P1C

11.3.2 SIM Method
The SIM Analyze (GC/MS) method is used for the identification and quantitation of
only specific (or target) compounds expected to be in the sample.
This type of analysis should be used where the highest sensitivity (lowest minimum
detectable concentration) is required, and where the compounds to be measured
are known. The SIM Analyze (GC/MS) method might include one or many specificcompounds for which the HAPSITE will be calibrated.
This work may be carried out with just the HAPSITE, or a Laptop, Service Module,
HSS, SituProbe, and/or sample conditioning probe may be used. Regardless of theconfiguration, certain method elements must be defined and set-up proceduresmust be carried out. The method elements are:

If the HAPSITE is to operate separate from the Service Module, the HAPSITE
must have a NEG Pump installed and activated. Refer to section 2.8, Service
Module, on page 2-19, or Chapter 15, Service Module for additional
information.

11 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The quantitation sequence method must be defined. This includes thedefinition of:

the Data file (where the data will be stored)the Selected Ion Method parameters (which defines the masses to bemonitored and the elution times expected, as well as other parameters ofthe mass spectrometer operation)the Library Search parameters (which designates which library file toaccess, individual and collective peak search, integration parameters, andvarious reporting options)the Inlet method file (which defines the temperatures, timing, and other gas
chromatograph and head space parameters)

the Tune/calibration file (which defines the mass spectral response to thetarget compounds and the internal standards)



The HAPSITE must be tuned, either with the AutoTune or Manual Tune
program. (Refer to Chapter 7, Tune.)

The HAPSITE must be calibrated to the target compounds. (See Chapter 12,
Target Compound Methods.)

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Temperature settings are critical to get the proper results.
Only trained users should modify these.

11 - 8HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.4 Startup Page
The Startup Page, shown in Figure 11-7 and Figure 11-8, allows for setting theinitial parameters for the HAPSITE system heaters and selection of the sample
input device.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-7 Method Editor Startup Page for Analyze (GC/MS) Methods

11 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-8 Method Editor Startup Page for Survey Methods

Use Internal Standard . . . . . . . . . . This option is shown on the Startup Page for
Survey methods. Refer to Figure 11-8.
HAPSITE Temperatures (C)Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Column mustachieve before starting data acquisition. (Notused for Survey methods.)
Membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Membrane mustachieve before setting before starting dataacquisition.
Valve Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Valve Oven mustachieve before starting data acquisition.

11 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

The parameters on the Startup page are:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Probe mustachieve before starting data acquisition. Thissetting is not available when the Headspaceor SituProbe is enabled.
Sample Input Device
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Probe is used for analyzing air samples
for volatile organic compounds.
Headspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This accessory is used for analyzing solids
and liquids for volatile organic compounds.
Additional components and their target
settings appear that are specific to the
Headspace. Refer to Chapter 13, Headspace
Sampling System.
SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This accessory is used for direct analysis ofliquid samples. For example, it can be placed
directly in a flowing sample stream(continuous monitoring). Additional
components and their target settings appear
that are specific to the SituProbe.
In selecting a method, the Probe will automatically be highlighted in the drop down
box for the Sample Input Device Options. See Figure 11-9.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-9 Sample Input Device Options

11 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.4.1 Headspace
WARNING
Only trained users should create methods. Choosing theincorrect sampling device and/or temperatures may
result in inaccurate data.
To create a Headspace method, choose the Headspace Sample Input Device.
This will bring up another temperature setting window for setting the HeadspaceOven and Transfer Line temperature. See Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Headspace Parameters

Headspace Temperatures (C)Transfer Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Transfer Line
must achieve before starting dataacquisition. This setting is not available when
the Headspace is disabled.

11 - 12IPN 074-472-P1C

Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Oven mustachieve before starting data acquisition. Thissetting is not available when the Headspaceis disabled.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.4.2 SituProbeWARNING
Only trained users should create methods. Choosing theincorrect sampling device and/or temperatures may
result in inaccurate data.
To create a SituProbe method, choose the SituProbe Sample Input Device. This
will bring up another temperature setting window for setting the SituProbe Ovenand Transfer Line temperatures. See Figure 11-11.
Figure 11-11 SituProbe Parameters

SituProbe Temperatures (C)IPN 074-472-P1C

Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Oven mustachieve before starting data acquisition. Thissetting is not available when the SituProbe isdisabled.
Transfer Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The target temperature the Transfer Line
must achieve before starting dataacquisition. This setting is not available when
the SituProbe is disabled.
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SituProbe temperature settings before
starting the method. This setting is notavailable when the SituProbe is disabled.

11 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.5 Inlet PageWARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect analysis.
NOTE: The Inlet page is not used (or displayed) when creating Survey methods.
Figure 11-12 shows the default settings for the Inlet page for an Analyze (GC/MS)
Full Scan Method. From this page, the Inlet States, GC Temperature Profiles and
Run Time are integrated and synchronized to form the Inlet Component of the
Method. Changing one item on this page often affects others and that effect isshown in the profile, at the bottom of the page, for clarity. There is a synchronization
requirement between the start time of the Standby Inlet Event, the total time of theTemperature Profile, and the Run Time. Changing a time related to one of these
entries will automatically change a related time in the other entries, in most cases.
For example, in Figure 11-12, increasing the Run Time will increase the Durationof the Backflush Inlet State and will result in a later Start time for the Standby event.
The Run Time increase will also result in an increase to the Hold Time at 180
degrees Celsius in the GC Temperature Profiles.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: In the rare case that the settings cannot be automatically synchronized, theincorrect cells are colored yellow as a guide to what needs correction.

11 - 14

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-12 Method Editor Inlet Page for GC/MS Full Scan

The only difference on the Inlet page between an Analyze (GC/MS) Full Scan
method and an Analyze (GC/MS) SIM method is that the Run Time parameter entry
is replaced with a table showing the SIM Sets as programmed on the SIM page(refer to section 11.3.2, SIM Method, on page 11-7). This difference is shown in
Figure 11-13.

11 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-13 Inlet Page for Analyze (GC/MS) SIM

11.5.1 Inlet States
WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
inlet states may result in incorrect analysis.
Inlet States specify the HAPSITE and accessory valve settings that control thesampling, analysis and clean-out of the HAPSITE. The Inlet component of the
Method features multiple Inlet States, which are programmable for duration but not
for valve settings. One generic Inlet State, Other, is available for creating a custom
set of valve settings. Figure 11-14 shows the grid used to program the Inlet Statesin a GC/MS Method.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-14 Method Editor Inlet Page: Inlet States

The basic steps when editing the Inlet States grid is to first select the desired Inlet
State from the Inlet State column. The duration for that Inlet State is entered in the
Duration column. After the duration is entered, the editor will automaticallycalculate and enter the Start time for the next Inlet State. There is always a default
Inlet component of Method; this can be modified by highlighting any cell in the gridand pressing the Delete key, to remove a row, or the Insert key to add a row. Afteradding a row the first entry must be the Inlet State.

11 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

HINT: When editing from the keyboard, the Alt+DownArrow key combination will"pull" the pull-down in the Inlet State column. Also, the Insert and Delete
keys work for this grid.
The following parameters are found on the Inlet States page:
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the start time of each Inlet State and is
not programmable. The start of the Run Timeactually is the start of the first Injection event.
This being the case, there can be several
events occurring before the actual start of the
Run Time. Each Inlet State starts at the endof the duration of the previous state.
Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the run time, in minutes andseconds, of each Inlet State event.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Inlet State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The flow order of the entire Method isprogrammed via the Inlet States page andspecifically via the Inlet State column. A setof pre-programmed Inlet States exist and are
selected from the pull-down menu in the Inlet
State column. Selecting an Inlet State willshow the Valve States used for that Inlet
State (see Figure 11-15). An Inlet State of
Other can be selected, which allows for acustom set of Valve States to be set for thatparticular Inlet State (see Figure 11-16). The
selection of some Inlet States is dependent
on the configuration or placement within the
Method. Some Valve States cannot bechanged for certain Inlet States.
NOTE: The list of Valve States may also include pumps, heaters and fans,depending on the system configuration. Selecting a component on
the Valve States list tells the system to activate the component. An
empty checkbox (not check marked) tells the system to deactivate
the valve or component.

11 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-15 Valve States for an Inlet State Event

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-16 Customizing the Valve States for an Inlet State

Inlet States can be selected from the pull-down within the Inlet State column asshown in Figure 11-17. Some Inlet States are not available as the first state andsome are only available after specific states have been selected. Some Inlet Statesoccur before the Inject time 00:00, which is considered the chromatographic start
event.

11 - 18

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-17 Accessing the Inlet States

The following choices are available in the Inlet States column:
Loopfill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This sets the GC valves when a Loop is being
used so that the sample pump pulls the
sample through the Sample Loop. The
recommendation is the Loopfill duration be atleast 60 seconds. This allows for clearing thesample line of the previous sample as well as
good mixing with the Internal Standard (ifused).

IPN 074-472-P1C

Line Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State pulls the sample through theprobe and out through the exhaust vent. The
sample does not go through theConcentrator.
Foreflush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This sets the GC valves so that Carrier Gas
will push sample out of the Sample Loop andonto the precolumn. The Foreflush timeshould be set so that all of the volatilecompounds of interest will pass through theprecolumn and onto the analytical column
prior to Backflush.

11 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Backflush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State sets the GC valves so thatcarrier gas is directed to the input of theanalytical column and into the output of theprecolumn. The Backflush state provides theability to customize the GC method sovolatile compounds that pass quickly throughthe precolumn and onto the analyticalcolumn, during the Foreflush state, can beseparated from less volatile compounds. The
less volatile compounds are pushed back outof the precolumn, while the more volatilecompounds of interest are separated on theanalytical column for MS analysis.
ISTune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This state sets the GC valves so the InternalStandard gas is directed to the Mass
Spectrometer for MS tuning.
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State sets the GC valves and turns
on the sampling pump so the sample willby-pass the GC and be directed to the inlet of
the MS for real time analysis.
NOTE: Survey is the Inlet State used (bydefault) in the Survey and Direct
Sample, Single Compound
Methods. This cannot be changed.

Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State must be included in every
Method as the last state. Standby closes the
Membrane Isolation valve and turns theMass Spectrometer filament off.
The following additional Inlet States are available in the Inlet States column whena Concentrator is being used:
ConcFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent to Loopfill, when a Concentrator isinstalled the sample passes through theConcentrator.
ConcCooldown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State provides a Duration Valuethat allows the Concentrator cool down to adesired operating temperature.

11 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This allows the customization of eachspecific GC valve for a custom GC valve
state. Useful for GC troubleshooting.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Line Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State turns on the sampling pumpand pulls sample through the Probe and out
the exhaust vent, while bypassing theConcentrator.
PreDesorb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreDesorb begins the process of heat
desorption of the analytes adsorbed on theConcentrator prior to introduction onto the
GC column.
Desorb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This completes the desorption of analytes off
the Concentrator and onto the GC column.
The following Inlet States are only available in the Inlet States column when
the Headspace Sampling System (HSS) is enabled for use:
HSSample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State sets the valves of both the
HAPSITE and HSS. It turns on the sample
pump for analysis. The collection of thesample trapped in the vial headspace sample
passes through the Transfer Line and to the
HAPSITE Analytical Module. The suggested
HSSample duration is approximately 15
seconds.

IPN 074-472-P1C

HSPurge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet state sets the valves for Nitrogen toflow through the lines, the needle assembly
and then through the Transfer Line. This
removes moisture and cleans out theprevious sample. The needle should be
inserted into a clean, dry vial during purge.
HSConcDry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State allows dry N2 gas to flow
through the Transfer Line and Concentrator
to remove moisture prior to sample injection.
This should only be used if the Headspacesystem is connected to an external cylinderof Carrier Gas.
The following Inlet States are only available in the Inlet States column when
the SituProbe (SP) is enabled for use:
SPLinePurge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This state sets the valves for Nitrogen to flow
through the lines and SituProbe assembly,
then through the transfer line. This cleans out
the previous sample. The recommended
event duration is at least 60 seconds to allow
for clearing the sample line of the previous
sample as well as good mixing with theInternal Standard (if used).

11 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

SPConcFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This sets the GC valves so that the sample
pump pulls the sample through theconcentrator.
SPLoopFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This sets the GC valves so that the sample
pump pulls the sample through the Sample
Loop. The recommended duration is at least
60 seconds to allow for clearing the sample
line of the previous sample as well as good
mixing with the Internal Standard (if used).
SPN2DryPurge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Inlet State purges the transfer line andconcentrator system with dry N2 before
sample injection to remove moisture.

11.5.2 GC Temperature Profile
WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing GC
temperature profiles may result in incorrect analysis.

Figure 11-18 Method Editor Inlet Page: GC Temperature Profiles

The Insert key does not work for this grid. Changes to the profiles must be madeby editing the Temp, Ramp Rate or Hold Time and adding heater profiles.

11 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

GC Temperature Profiles (see Figure 11-18) specify the temperature ramp andhold settings for the HAPSITE Method. Any profile can be edited by changing thevalue in the Temp, Ramp Rate or Hold Time column. When a new profile is added,
the first value entered will force the other values to be calculated and enteredautomatically. However, this automatic entry does not prohibit the values frombeing edited. The Start time of each profile is automatically derived from thepreceding profile. The Ramp Time is automatically calculated based on the Ramp
Rate and Temp entries. It cannot be edited directly.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.5.3 Use Internal Standard
The selection to use an Internal Standard is available for Loopfill, Concfill and
LinePurge events.
Figure 11-19 Selection to Use Internal Standard

If Use Internal Standard is checkmarked, the Internal Standard will automaticallybe mixed at a ratio of 1:10 with the sample to be analyzed.
NOTE: Use Internal Standard is not available when the HSS is enabled.

11.5.4 Scan Events
WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect analysis.
The following describes the Scan Events of the Method (Figure 11-20).

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-20 Scan Events

The Filament Delay is a delay, after the start of analysis, which must pass before
the filament is turned on. This delay should be set as a protection for the filament;a large enough delay should be set to allow the components of the air peak orsolvents to pass through the Mass Spectrometer before turning the filament on.

11 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

HINT: In some applications, if the Mass Spectrometer starts collection of data too
soon, then the high pressure burst caused by a solvent peak may shut it
down and stop the analysis.
The Run Time is calculated based on the Inlet Events and GC Temperature
Profiles and is the cumulative time of the Method at the point of sample injection
onto the GC column.

WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. If theincorrect Concentrator is selected when creating amethod the detection limit may not provide the correct
concentration of the media.

11.5.5 Concentrator Selection
There are three selections available for the Concentrator:
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select this when no Concentrator will be
used with this Method.
Carbon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select this when a Tri-Bed Concentrator will
be used with this Method.
Tenax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select this when a Tenax Concentrator will
be used with this Method.

WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Incorrect
flow rates may lead to improper analysis.
Headspace Flow Pressure controls the flow rate of Nitrogen through the HSS
during the Sample and Purge states. This parameter is only available when the
HSS is used.

11 - 24

IPN 074-472-P1C

11.5.6 Headspace Flow Parameter

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.5.7 SituProbe Flow Parameter
WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Incorrect
flow rates may lead to improper analysis.
SituProbe Flow Pressure controls the flow rate of Nitrogen through the SituProbe
during the Sample and Purge states. This parameter is only available when the
SituProbe is used.

11.6 Tune Page
The Tune Page is divided into two pages, Report and Param, that each provide
information about the Tune file.

11.6.1 Param Page
The Param Page (see Figure 11-21) provides the filename of the Tune file on the
HAPSITE, which provides the MS tune parameters used with the method. These
parameters are updated after every successful tune. The default filename isdefault.tun. If a different Tune file exists on the HAPSITE then the Browse
button can be used to locate and specify the desired tune for the Method. The
default.tun file always contains the most recent Tune parameters.

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page also has a Show Details checkbox (Figure 11-22), which will produce agrid of Tune parameters contained in the file and produced by the Tune Report.
These parameters cannot be edited.

11.6.2 Report Page
The Report Page (Figure 11-23) provides a printable report saved after the mostrecent execution of AutoTune.

11 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-21 Method Editor Tune Parameter Page

11 - 26

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-22 Method Editor Tune Parameter Page - Show Details

11 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-23 Method Editor Tune Report Page

11 - 28

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.7 Full Scan PageWARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect analysis.
The Full Scan page contains the mass range and other parameters of the Mass
Spectrometer operation (see Figure 11-24). The full parameter set can be assigneda Scan Set Name for easy identification, if desired. The Filament Delay, from the
Inlet Page (see section 11.5.4, Scan Events, on page 11-23), is also shown on the
Full Scan page. Changing the Filament Delay on this page may require a review
of, and changes to, the Inlet Page.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-24 Method Editor Full Scan Page

The following Mass Spectrometer parameters can be programmed:

11 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualStart Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The mass at which the Mass Spectrometer
will start to scan. The starting mass can be
set from 1-300 AMU.
NOTE: Start as high as possible to decrease
the scan time and collect as manyscans as possible.
NOTE: If possible, avoid starting below 45
AMU. There is a significant response
to components of air at mass 44 andbelow. This would add to the
instrument background and make it
more difficult to detect low
concentrations of other compounds
in the TIC.
End Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The mass at which the Mass Spectrometer
will end a scan. The end mass can be set
from 1-300 AMU.
NOTE: End the scan at least 2 AMU above
any mass used for compound
identification. End as low as possible
to decrease the scan time to collectas many scans as possible.

Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The time span of the method from start tofinish.

11.8 SIM PageWARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect analysis.
Figure 11-25 shows the SIM page, which is presented with different content
depending on the mode of analysis — Analyze (GC/MS) or Survey (Figure 11-26).
Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) uses a set or sets of specific masses to scan withthe highest sensitivity for known compounds.

11 - 30

IPN 074-472-P1C

Dwell Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Dwell Time is the length of time the Mass
Spectrometer will sample data at eachsampling point. The longer the Dwell Time,the better the signal to noise ratio of theAnalyte.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.8.1 SIM for Analyze (GC/MS)

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-25 Method Editor SIM Page for Analyze (GC/MS) Analysis

SIM for the Analyze (GC/MS) mode allows for creation of multiple sets of masses.
Each set has a Begin Time and an End Time which must be entered when
programming the Set. After the Begin and End Times are entered, as well as an
optional Name, the Mass list for the Set can be entered. Default settings for each
Mass are automatically entered based on the previous Mass. As the Mass list isentered, the Round Trip Time is automatically calculated and entered in the Scan
Sets grid.
The Scan Sets fields are as follows, in the order recommended for editing:
Begin Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In minutes: seconds, the time at whichcollection of the listed masses should start.
End Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In minutes: seconds, the time at whichcollection of the listed masses should stop.
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Each Scan set can be assigned a name for
identification purposes. This entry is optional.

11 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: One of the column entries listed above must be highlighted to enable
editing of the Mass list for that specific Scan Set.
Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The masses for each set are entered here ina list. The title above the Mass column "Mass Measurements for Scan Set x" indicates which Scan Set is being edited.
Mass Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This defines the number of points, the mass
spectrometer will scan, around the selectedmass in tenths of an AMU. For example, a
Mass Width of 0.6 will scan 0.3 on each sideof the peak centroid.
Extra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This sets the number of extra scans, from 0 10, for each mass. Extra scans lower thedetection limits by increasing the intensity
within the Mass Spectrometer. Extra scansshould be used when scanning for ppb levelcompounds. Do not set this for InternalStandards because this will lower theintensity from the other masses, causing lossof possible target masses.

Lead In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This determines the number of points themass spectrometer will skip prior to scanningthe desired mass peak. Best practice is to set
the Lead In to at least a 1000 µs delay prior
to collecting data. The delay is based on
Lead In multiplied by the Dwell.
NOTE: The Mass Width, Extra, Dwell and Lead In values for each newly entered
Mass are inherited from the value in the row above the new entry.
NOTE: To automatically fill any column, click in the desired cell and press Ctrl+D.
This automatically fills "down", with that cell’s value, to the end of thecolumn.

11 - 32

IPN 074-472-P1C

Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the amount of time the mass
spectrometer will sample data at eachsampling point. The dwell can be set from100 µs - 5,000 µs. 400 µs is recommended.
Increasing the Dwell decreases thedetection limit.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.8.2 SIM for Survey

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-26 SIM Page, Differences for Survey Analysis

11 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The SIM page for Survey mode provides the ability to create only one Scan Set of
multiple masses. Refer to Figure 11-26.
Scan Set Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A name should be created here to reference
the specific set of ions being detected.
Timed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When selected, allows the time of the survey
method to be set to a determined length. Thismethod will run for a programmed amount oftime.
Trigger Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When selected, programs this method tostart or stop based on the Run button. When
the RUN button is pressed the sample pumpwill turn on, signaling the beginning of therun. Pressing RUN again will turn off thesample pump and end the sample run.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Scans to Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This determines how many scans will becollected and averaged before the results are
updated on the chromatogram.

11 - 34

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.9 Search PageWARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Dependingon the search mode selected, results may not bereal-time.
The Search Page provides all the criteria needed to qualify and quantify data.
Calibrated libraries will need to be created in order to quantify results. The settingof parameters on this page mostly govern the actions that take place during front
panel operation of the HAPSITE. See Figure 11-27.
NOTE: SIM Method only allows No Search as the search option.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-27 Method Editor Search Page

11 - 35

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

There are four choices in the Search Mode drop down menu.
No Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If this option is highlighted no library search
will be conducted and no report will be
displayed on the front panel at the end of arun.
Qualitative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This will allow the AMDIS library to be
searched during the run, providing real-time
identifications. A report will be generated at
the end of the run, to be viewed on the front
panel display.
Quantitative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This will allow for a quantitative report to begenerated at the end of a run, referencing thelibrary designated by the Library SearchParameters.
Qualitative / Quantitative . . . . . . . . This option allows for both the AMDIS library
to be searched during analysis and for thequantitation library to be searched giving
results at the end of a run.

11.9.1 Setting Up a Qualitative Search
WARNINGTo set up a qualitative search, the drop down menu for the Search Mode must be
set to Qualitative. This tells the method that chemical identifications are required.
Once this is selected, the method must be told where to look for the identifications.
This is done using the AMDIS Search Parameters button. See Figure 11-28.

11 - 36

IPN 074-472-P1C

Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect data.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-28 AMDIS Search Settings

Figure 11-29 lists the different analysis types available for the search.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-29 Type of Analysis

Analysis Type

Simple - Uses only the mass spectral data for the individual target compounds
in the library to identify the compounds. The calculated match factor depends
only on the quality of the match between the deconvoluted component spectra
and the target library spectra.



RI Calibration Data - This type of analysis uses an external calibration file.
This analysis assumes that on a periodic basis, an experiment is run to
generate a correlation between retention time and retention index for a set of

11 - 37

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

retention index standards. In addition to mass spectral data, if the identified
compound is not within a specified retention window, the program will penalize
the match factor by a specified amount.


RI Calibr. Data + Internal Std. - In this mode the retention indices arecalculated from the external calibration file as in Use RI Calibration Data typeof analysis. The internal standards are used only to insure that the instrument
is functioning correctly or that the sample preparation has been performed
correctly. The Internal Standards are not used to calculate retention indices.



RI Calibration/Performance - Unlike all of the previous analysis modes, thisis presumed to be run on a clean mixture of known composition. This analysis
establishes the correlation between the Retention Time of a component and theretention index using the set of standards specified in the calibration library.
Usually, the C-series or the normal hydrocarbons are used as retention index
standards, but there is no requirement that this be the case. Retention
standards that are not uniform can even be used.



Performance Check - This analysis type only checks the performance forcompounds identified as performance compounds in the CSL library. The
analysis does not perform a calibration.
Figure 11-30 Performance Window

Deconvolution Window . . . . . . . . . The number of adjacent peaks subtracted
from the deconvoluted peak.
Minimum Match Factor . . . . . . . . . The threshold net match factor value for an
identification to be reported. Values at or
above 80 are good matches, 70-79 are fairand less than 70 is poor. For most cases, amatch factor of 80 is the minimum that should
be used if identification rather than detection
is desired.
High Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The highest mass in the range being
considered. The maximum value for the
HAPSITE is 300.

11 - 38

IPN 074-472-P1C

Low Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The lowest mass in the range of masses
being considered. For most cases involving
the HAPSITE, this value is 45.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30, used in model peak perception ranges:
30, 15, 10, 3, 1. As the value for thisparameter increases, increasingly noisy andbroad peaks are sought at the expense ofanalysis time and increased risk of false
positives. An increase in the sensitivity will
extract broader peaks, resulting in an
increase in the extraction of smaller andnoisier peaks.
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Medium/Low, Default Medium: As thelevel of resolution goes up, the program
separates peaks that are closer together.
If Analyze Region is selected, see Figure 11-31, the AMDIS is directed to only
search in the scan range selected. This is for specialized use, and does not need
to be utilized for normal usage. The default of Analyze Region off (i.e., unchecked)
will search the entire range specified by Low Mass and High Mass.
Figure 11-31 Analyze Region

When setting up the AMDIS library for qualitative analysis the HAPSITE.msl is thedefault library for the system. See Figure 11-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-32 The Libraries

To view other library choices, select the Browse button, refer to Figure 11-32. There
are several small and specific libraries in addition to the HAPSITE.MSL See Figure11-33. Many of the compounds found in these small libraries, that can be detectedby the HAPSITE, are incorporated in the HAPSITE.MSL file.
NOTE: INFICON recommends using HAPSITE.MSL.


HAPSITE.MSL

NISTEPA.MSL

NISTCW.MSL

NISTFDA.MSL

NISTFF.MSL

NISTDRUG.MSL

11 - 39

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-33 Library Options

Figure 11-34 Advanced Settings

NOTE: INFICON recommends leaving the Advance Settings at their default.
Noise Thresholding Level . . . . . . . Refers to the minimum signal recorded. Will
filter out noise along the baseline.
Chromatogram Peak Width . . . . . . Forces deconvoluted peaks to have thesame shape by specifying width in AMUs.

11 - 40

IPN 074-472-P1C

Advanced Settings

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Reject Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rejects peaks with less than set number ofscans.
Deconvolution Level . . . . . . . . . . . High/Medium/Low, Default Medium: As thelevel of deconvoltution goes up, the program
separates peaks that are closer together.
Peak Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The shape requirement is a way of forcing allof the deconvoluted peaks to have the same
shape. As the shape requirement increases,
the shape of the individual ions must be morenearly the same.
In the Search Trigger Criteria section of the Search page, the decision of how
often and when to run an AMDIS search is determined. There are three choices,
see Figure 11-35.
Figure 11-35 Search Trigger Criteria

IPN 074-472-P1C

Every ____ Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The value typed into the box determines theinterval at which AMDIS will run a search.
The default value for this is 100 scans.
Every ____ min:sec . . . . . . . . . . . . The value typed into the box determines thetime interval in which AMDIS will run asearch.
End of Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If this is selected, an AMDIS search will only
be conducted at the end of a run.

11.9.2 Setting Up a Quantitative Search
WARNING
Only trained users should modify methods. Changing
parameters may result in incorrect data.
When setting up a quantitative method, a quantitative library needs to be createdusing the Calibration function of the software. See Chapter 12, Target Compound
Methods.

11 - 41

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Writing a quantitative method still begins with Method Editor, but certain buttons will
not be available until the library is created. All the settings described in section
11.9.1, Setting Up a Qualitative Search, on page 11-36 still apply to the creation ofa quantitative method. In addition two more options become active, The Library
Search Parameters button and the Library Actions window, see Figure 11-36.
Figure 11-36 Library Search Parameters Button

Clicking the Library Search Parameters button opens the window shown in Figure11-37. The center section refers to the AMDIS parameters and is exactly the sameas described in Figure 11-28 on page 11-37.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-37 Library Search Parameters Window

The Peak Search section is comprised of all the elements that define a peak in thechromatogram.
Search Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This value indicates the time window allowed
for a peak to appear. 30 seconds indicatesthat the acceptable window for a peak is 15
seconds on either side of the expected
retention time.
Window Expand Factor . . . . . . . . . This value has a default of 0.05. This value ismultiplied by the run time and then added tothe search window time. The search window
is then expanded by the time calculated.

11 - 42

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Peak Resolution (dx) . . . . . . . . . . . This number indicates the minimum numberof scans between two peaks which is used todetermine whether to split a peak into two or
consider it as one peak.
Noise Level Mult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A peak intensity must be greater than thisnumber multiplied by the baseline noise inorder to be called an analyte.
Min. Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This number discriminates against low
responses which are usually attributed tonoise rather than detection of the analyte.
Increase this number to 10,000 or more if
false hits are encountered.
Min. Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This number specifies the minimum numberof scans to comprise a peak. This is anotherdiscrimination against low responses ornoise.
Max Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This number specifies the maximum numberof scans to comprise a peak. This allows
discrimination against a very broad peak.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Precedence Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When compared to the compound-specificprecedence level, it determines which searchparameters to use — the global parametersspecified in Figure 11-37 or thecompound-specific parameters. As a generalrule, leaving this set to 0 allows one to use
specific search parameters for individualcompounds as discussed in Chapter 12.
Min. Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This compares the expected mass intensities
relative to each other to those saved in thelibrary. Reasonable values depend on how
selective the calibration, but typically 0.5 to
0.9 is used. This value is a way of lowering
false positives, where a higher number ismore discriminative.
Min. Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This measures the purity level of the peakdetected compared to the mass peak in thelibrary. Reasonable values depend on how
selective the calibration, but typically 0.5 to
0.9 is used. This value is a way of lowering
false positives, where a higher number ismore discriminative.

11 - 43

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The Reset button allows for default values to be reset in the Peak Search window.
See Figure 11-38.
Figure 11-38 Resetting Default Search Parameters

The Elimination Rules section gives parameters for peaks to be reported. There
are three options. See Figure 11-39.
Figure 11-39 Elimination Rules Window

Keep no more than. . . . . . . . . . . . . This check box determines how many peaks
are to be shown. This refers to the Mass
Spectrum. If 10 is selected, only the top ten
peaks will be displayed.
Keep peaks above . . . . . . . . . . . . . This check box defines the percent intensityof a mass peak to be displayed on the Mass
Spectrum. Fifteen is generally used as thelow end for intensity.
Maximum NIST Hits . . . . . . . . . . . . This value is the number of matches reported
by NIST.

The Library Action box has four main sections. Each can be enabled using acheck box. See Figure 11-40.
Figure 11-40 Library Actions

AMDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When enabled, a concentration can beentered. This will determine the critical levelof concentration at which AMDIS will identify
the chemical on the front panel display of the
HAPSITE.

11 - 44

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: This section also has a Reset button, which will set any changed values
back to the default setting.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When enabled, a concentration can beentered which will determine the criticalconcentration level at which a peak will be
displayed.
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When enabled, a concentration can beentered which will trigger an alarm. The
alarm can be set to be either visual or audibleby using the Settings button. See Figure11-41.
Figure 11-41 Setting the Alarm

Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When enabled, a concentration can beentered which will create a report when thecritical concentration level is reached. See
Figure 11-42.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-42 Setting the Report

There are two choices for reports, the Full TIC Peak Report and the AMDIS
Search Report.

11 - 45

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.10 Data Page
The Data Page provides the capability to customize the data filenames, andstorage of data files, for the Method. Defaults are provided that assure automaticstorage of data in a filename format that increments with each data file stored.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-43 Method Editor Data Page

The following parameters can be set on the Data Page:
Use default filename . . . . . . . . . . . This check box, which is selected as adefault, allows the Method to use a default
format for the data filename. The default
filename is a combination of the Method
filename and an index, which is automaticallyincremented with each saved data file.

11 - 46

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

File increment digits. . . . . . . . . . . . This parameter sets the number of digits
used in the index, starting at 000 andincrementing up to the maximum number
provided by the index digits (in this case,999). By default, the index is three digits, but
can be specifically changed here for thismethod or for the entire system on the
System Properties >> Miscellaneouspage.
Add Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . This parameter adds the date and time, in theformat yyyymmdd_hhmmss to the filename(see Figure 11-44). This can be added as asuffix, which uses an underscore before the"yyyy" information, or as a prefix, which uses
an underscore after the "ss" information. The
format of the date and time is:yyyy is the year the data was collected

mm is the month the data was collected

dd is the day the data was collected

hh is the hour data collection was started

mm is the minute data collection wasstarted

ss is the second data collection wasstarted.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-44 Example of Date and Time Appended to the Filename

Add as Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When selected, along with Add Date andTime, the date and time are added to the endof the filename. It is preceded by anunderscore.
Use default directory . . . . . . . . . . . This selection sets the Method to store alldata, collected with this Method, in thedefault directory specified in the Data FilePath. When this selection is unchecked, any
valid path can be entered in the Data FilePath to specify data storage.

11 - 47

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Data File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The entry box for the data file path is used to
specify where this method should save thedata. This entry box is automatically filledwith the default path, derived from the
HAPSITE Properties >> Data Settings
page, if the Use default directory box ischecked.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Save Data to Removable Drive . . . This selection is always enabled and cannot
be changed. Data is saved to the hard drivein the folder (directory) shown immediately
above this check box.

11 - 48

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.11 Summary Page
The Summary Page, see Figure 11-45, provides selections to show any
component, or all components, of the Method in a text summary. These selections
effect both the displayed and printed information. This page allows for a review ofthe Method settings before saving the Method to a file.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-45 Method Editor Summary Page

11 - 49

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11.12 How to Create a Method
WARNING
Only trained users should create methods. Selecting aparameter that is incorrect may provide an inaccurate
analysis of the media being sampled.

CAUTION
Read all of Chapter 11 before creating a method.
HINT: For questions relating to specific settings, refer to the previous sections of
this chapter.
Creating a method is a very involved process. Creating a method from scratch isbest left to experts; however, custom methods can be written by modifying a default
method.

11.12.1 Creating a New Custom Method from an Existing Method
1 On the System Setup View, double-click on the Method Editor icon. See
Figure 11-46.

2 Choose the HAPSITE to which the method will be applied and click Open. See
Figure 11-47.

11 - 50

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-46 Method Editor Icon

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-47 Method Editor Open Window

3 Choose the method file to be the template for the new method. Click OK. See
Figure 11-48.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-48 Choose Method

4 Refer to section 11.3, Description Page, on page 11-5 through section 11.10,
Data Page, on page 11-46 for details on changing options.

11 - 51

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 To save a newly created method from the Method Editor, press the Save button
at the bottom right of the Method Editor Summary Page (see Figure 11-45). The
dialog window shown in Figure 11-49 is displayed. Notice that the default
location to save a method file is to the HAPSITE.
NOTE: Method files can be saved to the HAPSITE only if the HAPSITE is
attached to the Laptop. Refer to section 2.4.6, Connect Laptop (ifdesired), on page 2-10 for additional information on how to connect the
Laptop and HAPSITE.

6 On the File Name line, type a NEW file name. Refer to Figure 11-50.
Figure 11-50 Entering a New Method File Name

7 The file location may be changed to save in the GCMS (Analyze) or Survey
directory, or a new one may be created using the Create Folder button, as
shown in Figure 11-51.

11 - 52

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-49 Save Method File Dialog Window - HAPSITE Option SelectedHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 11-51 Create Folder Button

7a If creating a new folder, name the new folder and then open the new folder
before saving the Method file.

CAUTION
Saving the new method file with the original name will
overwrite (replace) the method that was used as the
template.

8 Once the location and name have been chosen, press OK to save the file.
Refer to Figure 11-49 or Figure 11-50.

11.13 How to Sequence Methods
Sequencing methods is very useful when a group of methods needs to be rununattended, repeatedly, or at timed intervals.

1 From the Plus IQ system setup screen, double-click the Method Editor Icon.
See Figure 11-52.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-52 Method Editor Icon

2 Select HAPSITE Method Sequence. See Figure 11-53.
Figure 11-53 Method Editor Open Window

11 - 53

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Type a new name for the sequenced method or use the name provided. See
Figure 11-54.
NOTE: Method runs (i.e., sequence of methods) use the .xmth file extension.

4 Click the ... button. See Figure 11-54.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-54 Method Run List

11 - 54

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Choose a method file to add to the sequence. Click OK. See Figure 11-55.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-55 Choose Method

11 - 55

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 until all desired methods are listed in the Method
Run List. See Figure 11-56.
Figure 11-56 Sequenced Method Options

7 In the Start column chose either Run Button or Immediately for each method.
This selection determines how each method in the run is started. Refer toFigure 11-56.

8 In the Sleep column, choose for or until for each method. Refer to Figure
11-56.

9 In the Time column, enter the desired Time for the next method to start or the
10 Click Save. Refer to Figure 11-56.
11 Save the sequenced method to the desired location. Click OK. See Figure
11-57.

11 - 56

IPN 074-472-P1C

length of Time to sleep before the next method starts. Refer to Figure 11-56.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 11-57 Saving Sequenced Method

11 - 57

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

11 - 58

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 12
Target Compound Methods
12.1 Introduction To Quantitative Analysis
Quantitative analysis is the process of building a method calibration library of target
compounds, analyzing samples and converting target compound responses toconcentration results. The process of building a quantitative analysis method
includes the following steps:

1 Preparation of a standard or standards at multiple concentrations.
WARNING
Wear appropriate Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
as advised by the MSDS of the standard(s) being used.

2 Collecting representative data files of the compounds at one or moreconcentration levels.

3 Identifying the compounds and building a target compound library.
4 Calibrating the library.

IPN 074-472-P1C

5 Collecting and processing unknown samples for target compounds.
The Calibrate function of the HAPSITE software is used to set up or define thequantitative method. The ID Unknowns function is used to process and review
results from a quantitative method. Quantitative results are automatically displayedon the HAPSITE front panel display after data collection.
A HAPSITE method can be developed to collect, process and quantitate data. Thismethod must meet the chromatography performance requirements of theapplication, e.g., retention times, compound separations, sensitivity, etc. It will be
used throughout the process of building the library and processing results. Refer to
Chapter 11, Method Editor for additional information on building a method.
The library is the key component in the quantitative method. The library contains
three types of information: the Retention Time (time it takes the compound to elutefrom the column), mass spectral data used to confirm compound identity, and the
response factor that is used to calculate the concentration of the compound.

12 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12.2 Definition of Terms in the Calibrate Window
Figure 12-1 Calibrate Window

12.2.1 Method
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brings up the Method Selection window.
View/Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens the Method Editor with the current
method.
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saves the current Method.
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the currently saved libraries.
Save Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brings up the dialog box to save the library.
Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the search parameter settings.
Conc. Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to input or select the concentration
units.

Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to select the data files for building andcalibrating the library; when a data file isselected the data is listed as follows:
D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the data file reference number.
Data File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the data file name and path.
Conc Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basis for calculating the concentration.
Global (all analytes are at the same
concentration) or Analyte (analytes are in fileat specific concentrations).
Conc/Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data file concentration of analytes if Global isselected, or Concentration Multiplier if
Analyte is selected.
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If checked, file will be processed when Start
is pressed.

12 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

12.2.2 Data FilesHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the chromatogram for the selected
data file.
Reset Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If checked, will reset the calibration curve,deleting all points currently contained in thelibrary.

12.2.3 Peak Search
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performs two functions, depending onwhether Build/Edit Template or Calibrate
Library is selected. When Build/Edit isselected, the Search performs a peakdetection and integration on the selected files
and loads the results into the library
template. When Calibrate is selected,
search performs the calibration of the libraryand calculates response factors.
Recalculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalculates the peak areas and response
factors without performing a peak search.
This is most useful following manual editingof peak baseline points.
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiates the Search or Recalculation. See
Figure 12-2.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-2 Search for Recalculation

Build/Edit Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Selects the mode in which a data file issearched to locate compounds, andloads/edits compounds into the library
template.
Calibrate Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When selected, data files are processed tocalibrate the library.
Search for Analytes . . . . . . . . . . . . Enables a search to be performed on theselected data file/files without adding thedetected analytes automatically to the library.
This enables review of data files and the
addition of all or selected compounds to thelibrary template.
NOTE: When adding compounds to an existing library or Template, use Search
for Analytes. If using Build/Edit Template, the original template is lost.

12 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12.2.4 Analytes
Analytes in Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the analytes in the library
Analytes in File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the analytes in the currently
displayed or selected file
Search Results in File . . . . . . . . . . If a search has been performed with Search
for Analytes selected, a review of theanalytes detected in the file is enabled.
Individual analytes can then be added to thetemplate by Right Mouse Button clicking on
the compound name and then selecting Add
To Template or Add All to add allcompounds detected in the file.

12.2.5 Reports
View Calibration Reports:
Calibration Response Table . . Report that displays the response factor andcurve statistics based on the selected curve
type.
Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . Report that displays the area fit and purity forthe calibration standards.

# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the analyte number in the library
Data Ref. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Reference, shows the reference to thedata file in which the analyte was found.
Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the compound name found in AMDIS,NIST library or assigned by the user for the
analyte.
CAS #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the Chemical Abstracts Service
Number for the analyte from the AMDIS orNIST library.
Q Ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the Quantitation Ion for the analyte.
Ret. Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show the Retention Time for the analyte.

12 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

NIST Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The initial search when building atemplate/library is performed using the
AMDIS library. If peaks are detected andloaded into the template without an
identification, the NIST Search can be used
to identify these compounds.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the integrated analyte area
quant-ion.
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designates the compound as an analyte oran Internal Standard.
Conc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the concentration of the analyte orInternal Standard in the displayed file.
NOTE: This field is not used if theconcentration flag is set to global.
IS Ref. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Internal Standard reference
number for analyte quantitation.

12.2.6 Extracted Mass Peaks
Displays the mass peaks and relative percentages for the selected analyte. See
Figure 12-3.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-3 Extracted Mass Peaks

12.2.7 Calibration
Displays the calibration curve and curve statistics for the selected analyte.

12 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12.3 Definition of Terms in the ID Unknowns Window
Figure 12-4 ID Unknowns Window

12.3.1 Method
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brings up the Method selection window.
View/Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opens the Method editor with the current
method.
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saves the current Method.
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the currently saved libraries.
View Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays a report of the last processed data
files.
Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the search parameter settings.
Unknown Reports

By Analyte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays report by analyte.

12.3.2 Data Files
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to select the data file for processing.
When a data file is selected, the data is listed
as follows:
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Will display a chromatogram with a T overthe compounds found in the calibration
report. See section 12.4.
File Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lists the reference number for the file.
Data File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List the file name and path of the selected
files.

12 - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

By File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays report by file.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12.3.3 Peak Search
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performs a peak detection and integration on
the selected files, producing the quantitation
report.
Recalculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrates analyte peak areas andrecalculates the concentrations without
performing a peak search. Typically usedfollowing manual editing of peak baseline
points.
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiates the Search or Recalculation. See
Figure 12-5.
Figure 12-5 Analytes Display

12.3.4 Analytes
Analytes in Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the analytes in the library.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Analytes in File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the analytes in the currently
displayed or selected file.

12.3.5 Reports
Calibration Response Table . . . . . Report that displays the response factor andcurve statistics based on the selected curve
type.
Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report that displays the area fit and purity forthe calibration standards.
View Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the selected calibration report.
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the analyte number in the library.
D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Reference: lists the reference to thedata file in which the analyte was found.

12 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the compound name found in AMDIS,NIST library or assigned by the user for the
analyte.
CAS #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the Chemical Abstracts Services
Number for the analyte from the AMDIS orNIST library.
Q ION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the quantitation ion for the analyte.
Ret. Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the Retention Time for the analyte.
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the analyte integrated quant ion
area.
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designates the compound as an analyte oran internal standard.
Conc: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shows the concentration of the analyte orInternal Standard in the displayed file.
NOTE: The field is not used if theconcentration flag is set to global.
IS Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Internal Standard reference
number for analyte quantitation.

12.3.6 Extracted Mass Peaks
Displays the mass peaks and relative percentages for the selected analyte. See
Figure 12-6.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-6 Extracted Mass Peaks

12.3.7 Calibration
Displays the calibration curve and curve statistics for the selected analyte.

12 - 8HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12.4 Display Function
The Display button in the Data Files section of both Calibrate and ID Unknowns
shows the selected data file’s spectrum. This feature is beneficial when reviewing
and revising identifications, selecting spectral peaks, adding to a library andmanually integrating peak areas. See Figure 12-7.
Figure 12-7 Calibration Display File

IPN 074-472-P1C

To display a chromatogram while in Calibrate or ID Unknowns, select the file byhighlighting with the Left Mouse Button and selecting the Display button.
The controls of the Display function are similar to the data review functions forworking with RICs (Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms) and Mass Spectra. Data
Review is described in Chapter 9, Data Review. Additional features are described
below.
With the Build/Edit Template option selected in the Calibrate window, theDisplay button will show the peaks detected and selected for the library template
when a peak search is performed. See Figure 12-8. Peaks selected for thetemplate are indicated on the plot with a T. The quant mass for each analyte isdisplayed on the RIC plot. The T symbol will be the same color as the mass number
color displayed in the lower right corner of the RIC graph. If a peak has not been
detected, the mass spectrum of that peak can be manually selected and thecompound it represents added. After selecting the Spectrum for the compound to

12 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

be added, place the cursor in the mass spectrum window and click the right mousebutton to open up the spectrum pop-up menu. See Figure 12-8. Select the Grab
Spectrum for Template menu option.
Figure 12-8 Calibration Display

WARNING
Wear appropriate Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
as advised in the MSDS of the standard(s) being used.

1 A standard or series of standards must be prepared from the list of analytes tobe quantified. If practical, prepare all standards in a single sample. If not, thetemplate/library can be built from multiple files. If possible, prepare standards
for multi level calibration by serial dilution. Analytes can be prepared at thesame concentration for all compounds or at different concentrations. Whenusing individual concentrations, an initial concentration of each analyte must beentered into the library using the method editor. Additional concentration levels
are then processed by using the dilution factor to calculate the concentration ateach level.

12 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

12.5 Using the Calibrate Function

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 After the standard(s) have been prepared, a method must be developed tocollect the data. The method can be a default method or a modified method
using the Method Editor. All method development and chromatographic
changes which can affect the retention time must be made prior to collecting
the standard runs that are to be used for building and calibrating the library.
Refer to Chapter 11, Method Editor for additional information on method
development.
HINT: When running each sample, enter the concentration and a description
on the Data File Information page. See Figure 12-9. To access this pagerefer to section 9.3, Data Review Toolbar, on page 9-5.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-9 Data File Information Page

NOTE: In this example, a series of standards at four concentration levels wereprepared by serial dilution. The method, QuantExample, was used tocollect the data. Start with one method for collection and continue withthat method. These are arbitrary concentrations for example only andNOT actual concentrations.
 QuantExample_20060301_005 = 150 PPM
 QuantExample_20060301_004 = 50 PPM
 QuantExample_20060301_002 = 200 PPM
 QuantExample_20060301_001 =100 PPM

3 After the data has been collected, open the Calibration function which can beaccessed from the drop-down menu, by right mouse button clicking on the
HAPSITE icon, by the toolbar icon or via the Status icon and Function tab.
See Figure 12-10.

12 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3a Selecting the Calibrate function will display a dialog box used to select the typeof quantitative method being developed — Analyze (GC/MS) or Survey. See
Figure 12-11.
NOTE: Methods can be built for Full Scan data or SIM (Selected Ion
Monitoring) data. Best practice is for the Select Method First box tobe checked, as the library is linked to the method.

12 - 12IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-10 Accessing the Calibrate Function

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 12-11 Selecting the Type of Quantitative Method

3b Click OK.
3c The Method File window will be displayed. Select the method which will containthe library. This will open the Calibration Control Panel.

4 Use the Browse button under Data Files to select the data file to be used tocreate the library template. This should be a data file (or files) collected whenrunning known samples. See Figure 12-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-12 Calibration Control Panel with Data File Selected

NOTE: Best practice is to use a high or mid range standard and not the lowest
concentration level for calibration library development. Low
concentration standards may not have peaks too small to be detectedwith current Search Settings.
HINT: Step 5 and Step 6 will be automatically completed if the information wasentered in the Data File Information screen when the sample was run.

5 Enter or select the concentration units.
6 Enter the concentration units of the standard.
7 The Concentration reference should be set to Global.
8 Check the selection box. Select Global.
9 Make sure the Build/Edit Template button is selected and then select Start.
The data file will be processed and the detected compounds displayed. Peaks
are detected according to the Search Settings. The library template will befilled in with the detected peaks. The compounds identified by AMDIS will have

12 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Compound names and CAS#’s. See Figure 12-13. The Chromatogram display
window will automatically open below the calibration control panel to display theplot and the detected peaks.
The peaks marked with a T have been identified by AMDIS, and those with only
the black triangle have not been identified. All of the features described in
Chapter 9, Data Review can be used to interact with the plot.

10 The template can now be edited to remove duplicate and unidentified entries
from the analyte list. Place the mouse cursor over the compound name of an
entry to be deleted or edited. Refer to Figure 12-13 and Figure 12-15.
HINT: Only keep one entry for each compound. In this example, the InternalStandards and the compound of interest are repeated multiple times.
Delete the duplicate entries.
Figure 12-14 Right Mouse Button in Calibration Control Panel

Press and hold the Right Mouse Button. The options available are:

12 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-13 Calibrate Display with Detected Peaks

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualDuplicate Row. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates a duplicate entry for the highlighted
row.
Fill down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replaces the contents of all rows below thehighlighted row with the name of the selectedcompound.
Clear All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erases all entries in the Template.

Clear All Empty
Compound Entries . . . . . . . . . . Deletes all entries that do not have acompound name associated with them.
NOTE: The down arrow next to the compound name can be used to select a
different name if more than one possible match has been determinedby the AMDIS search.

10a For this file, all of the blank entries are to be deleted. Click the Right Mouse
Button in the Compound field and select Clear All Empty Compound
Entries. Refer to Figure 12-13.
HINT: If a compound is unidentified (blank), but is known to the analyst, namethe peak by highlighting the blank compound name field and entering
the name.

IPN 074-472-P1C

10b Next, the Internal Standards must be selected. When using Internal Standards,
best practice is to use a quant ion from the internal standard that is close inmass to the quant ion of the compound to be quantitated. The software always
selects the largest mass fragment in the spectrum as the quant ion. To change
the quant ion, highlight the field and type in the new number. Change the quantion for TRIS from 213 to 75. The software will warn that a re-calibration isrequired. This is true if a quant ion is changed after calibration. To signify whichquant mass is being used, change the name of TRIS HAPSITE IS #1 toTRIS_75. See Figure 12-15.
NOTE: If the name of the analyte begins with TRIS or BPFB the software willrecognize the analyte as a HAPSITE IS and automatically enter theconcentration from the IS canister into the method for calibration andquantitation.

10c More than one quant ion can be used from a single Internal Standard peak.
Highlight the second Internal Standard and click the Right Mouse Button, selectDuplicate Row, then change the name of the Internal Standard peaks to
BPFB_79 and BPFB_117. Next the Quant Ion should be changed to 79 and117. See Figure 12-15.

12 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 12-15 Finished Analytes Chart

10d To finish the template, the concentration of each analyte must be individuallyentered if not using the global concentration flag. In this example, theconcentration of all analytes is the same, so Global is being used. The
concentration field is not a required entry. For analyte specific concentrations,the Concentration field should contain the individual analyte concentrations forthe selected data file. Each additional file would have a specific multiplication
factor entered in the Conc/Factor field in the Data Files control panel.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-16 Extracted Mass Peaks

10e The Extracted Mass Peaks can also be edited to delete mass fragments withintensities below 15%. The exception would be a molecular ion if thefragmentation pattern is not very distinct. To delete unwanted mass fragments,
highlight the field and press the delete key. Refer to Figure 12-16.

11 The finished library needs to be saved. Select the Save Library button under
the Method controls. Enter a library name and save it as part of the method.
See Figure 12-17.

12 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 12-17 Save Library Button

12 The template is complete and the library is ready for Calibration. Refer to Figure
12-18.
Figure 12-18 Library Ready for Calibration

12a Prior to calibration, the curve fit should be selected. To change the curve fit fromthe default Linear, Forced through Origin, select the View/Edit button under
the Method controls. Select the curve fit and save the method.

12b To calibrate the library, select the standard data files, select Calibrate Libraryand press the Start button under Peak Search.

IPN 074-472-P1C

12c Review the curves for each analyte. To review each analyte, select the
Calibration tab and use the mouse to select each compound. See Figure12-19.

12 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 12-19 Calibration Curve

12d Additional calibration points can be added to the curve at any time by using theBrowse button under Data Files. First add the data file. Select the data fileadded and make sure that the previous data file is no longer selected byun-checking the select field. Select Start under Peak Search. Review the
curves as with the previous data file. Each curve should have all of thecalibration points.
NOTE: To investigate problems use the View Reports function to examine theCalibration Report. If an outlying point is detected on the curve,delete the point by highlighting and clicking delete.

12e When the curve is complete, save the Library and the Method. The Quant
HINT: Whenever this Method is run from the front panel or the Laptop, theMethod will report concentration for the target compounds by selecting
the Quantitative tab of the report.

12.6 Using the ID Unknown Function
Files can be reprocessed on the laptop using the ID Unknowns function.

1 The ID Unknowns function can be accessed from the Function drop downmenu, by clicking the right mouse button on the HAPSITE icon, by the toolbar
or via the Status icon and Function tab. See Figure 12-20.
HINT: The ID Unknowns function is very similar to the Calibrate function.

12 - 18

IPN 074-472-P1C

library is now part of the Method.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 12-20 Accessing ID Unknowns Function

1a Selecting ID Unknowns will display the Select File Type dialog box used to
select the type of quantitative method, GC/MS or Survey. See Figure 12-21.
Figure 12-21 Selecting the File Type

2 Select the method to be used to process or re-process the data. After a method

IPN 074-472-P1C

is selected, the ID Unknowns control panel will be displayed.

3 Use Browse to select the Data File(s).
4 Select Start to reprocess the data.
5 View results. See Figure 12-22.

12 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 12-22 Sample Quantitation Report

12 - 20

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 13
Headspace Sampling System
13.1 Introduction
The Headspace Sampling System (HSS) is an accessory to the HAPSITE portable
GC/MS, allowing testing for volatile compounds in various solid and liquid matrices,
including soil and water. Used in combination with the HAPSITE, the Headspace
Sampling System attachment provides the opportunity to perform soil and water
analyses for quantitative and qualitative results in the field. See Figure 13-1.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 13-1 Headspace Sampling System

The HAPSITE is designed to analyze volatile compounds in air, so samples must
be introduced in the gas phase. HSS technology involves heating samples of soil
or water in a closed sample container to a known temperature. Heat forces thevolatile components to partition between the sample and the headspace above thesample. After allowing sufficient time for equilibration to occur, a portion of theheadspace (now containing volatile compounds from the sample) is introduced to
the HAPSITE as a gas sample.
Unknowns are tentatively identified using the National Institute of Standards andTechnology (NIST) mass spectral library. Known compounds can be quantified
using a prepared calibration curve.

13 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.1.1 How the HSS Operates
The function of the HSS is to provide consistent partition of analytes between thesample and the headspace, and to transfer a representative sample of theheadspace to the HAPSITE for analysis.
Figure 13-2 is a schematic of the gas flow system which accomplishes thesefunctions. The flow starts with the Nitrogen supply, at the upper left. This can befrom disposable canisters or from an external cylinder supply. The Nitrogenpressure and flow are controlled by two pressure gauges, a shut-off valve (thevariable orifice valve) and a fixed restrictor. All the valves in this system areoperated under software control.
Figure 13-2 HSS Operation Flow Diagram
N2 Canister
Supply Pressure

Control Pressure

External Supply
VSO Valve

Fixed Restrictor
VSO PCBHAPSITETransferLine

IPN 074-472-P1C

Headspace Oven

Two three-way valves direct the flow to either bypass the vial (in the position
shown) or purge through the vial. While a sample is being transferred to the
HAPSITE, the flow is directed through the long needle, below the surface of thesample. The Nitrogen flow into the vial is approximately balanced by the
HAPSITE’s sample pump draw out of the vial. The headspace sample istransferred to the HAPSITE while maintaining neutral pressure in the vial.
At the end of the analysis, if a Purge cycle is programmed, the operator is prompted
to insert the needle into a clean vial and acknowledge it by pressing RUN. Purge
is achieved by providing a flow of clean Nitrogen through the needle, heated line
and the sample path in the HAPSITE. This clean flow removes residual organics

13 - 2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manualand moisture from the previous run. During the Purge cycle, the three-way valveschange state, assuring that the bypass line is also purged. The sample pumpcontinues to run during Purge.
The temperature-controlled oven contains not only the sample wells, but thethree-way valves and the entire sample line up to the connection with the HAPSITE
heated Transfer Line. This design precludes the condensation of volatiles at cold
spots.

13.1.2 Performance Specifications
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10oC to 45oC, up to 95%
Relative Humidity(non-condensing)
Dimensions (L x W x H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 cm x 39.5 cm x 19 cm
Weight (including battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 kg
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 W at 24 V
Oven Temperature Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ambient to 80oC
Equilibrium Stabilization Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 minutes
Practical Quantitation Limit (toluene) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 µg/liter
Mounting Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Upright, +15o

IPN 074-472-P1C

13.1.3 HSS Indicators
The HSS has three indicators in the left side of the front panel and under the label
Headspace Sampling System. When illuminated, these indicate POWER, RMT
PWR, and LO BAT. The left and center indicators are green when illuminated,while the right is red when illuminated.
POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the left indicator is illuminated, theHSS power is on.
RMT PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the center indicator is illuminated, the
HSS is connected to remote power.
LO BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the right indicator is illuminated, thebattery power is getting low, and HSS power
will soon be lost. Either replace the battery
with a charged battery or connect to a powersource using the AC-to-24 V(dc) adapter.
NOTE: The HSS and the Transfer Line are powered by the HSS instrument. If the
instrument loses power or is turned off, the temperatures of both the HSS
and the Transfer Line will begin to drop. Power up the HSS and run a HSS
method to restart the heaters.

13 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.1.4 Consumables Required
The following consumables are required for routine analysis when using the HSS.
Compressed Nitrogen — A source of pressurized, high-purity nitrogen is required
for analysis and purging of the system. Nitrogen canisters are available from thesales agency which provided the HSS, or an external source of Nitrogen, regulated
to 700 kPa, may be connected using the 3/16" Swagelok quick connect fitting
located at the back of the instrument.
The nitrogen canisters are available as the following INFICON part numbers:

Box of 6 — IPN 930-432-P6

Box of 12 — IPN 930-432-P12



Box of 24 — IPN 930-432-P24

CAUTION
The Nitrogen must have less than 50 ppb of volatileorganic compounds, and argon less than 40 PPM. Moredetailed specifications can be obtained by contacting
INFICON, see Chapter 18, Customer Support.

NOTE: The sample vials must have dimensions of 29 mm OD x 81 mm length toensure a proper fit in the HSS sample heating block. A proper fit allows the
sample heating block to most effectively heat the samples. Supelco, Inc.
(1- 800 247-6628) offers clear glass vials of this size with PTFE-silicone
septa and open-top phenolic closures. The vials are Supelco part number
2-7180 (box of 100).
Water — Water is used for syringe cleaning, blank analysis, calibration standard
preparation, calibration check standard preparation, and sample dilutions if
necessary. This water must be free from volatile organic compounds, or"VOC-free".
Calibration Mix — This mix should consist of the target compounds for sample
quantitation. The mix is used to prepare standards for a calibration curve. The
calibration curve is used for quantification.
INFICON has created a four component mix used as Internal Standards for
Headspace Sampling (HSS) runs. This mix is added in conjunction with calibration
mixes used to create calibration curves for quantification methods. The partnumber for this mix is:
4 component (HSS) Internal Standard — IPN 071-748

13 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

40 milliliter (mL) Glass Sample Vials — These vials are used for all analyses,
including calibration standards, blanks, quality control samples, and samples
regardless of matrix.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: Calibration Mixes may be purchased from a variety of laboratory supply
businesses in liquid form, usually in a methanol matrix. Typical laboratory
mixes are readily available as off-the-shelf items, while custom mixtures
can be made to specifications.

13.1.5 Connecting the HSS to the HAPSITE
Determine a suitable location, on a level surface, where the HAPSITE and the HSS
are close enough together to connect via the Transfer Line. Refer to section 2.7.2,
Installing the Headspace Sampling System, on page 2-15 for detailed installation
instructions.

CAUTION
Care must be taken to avoid sharp bends of the Transfer
Line, which could lead to flow restriction or breakage.

13.1.6 Providing Power to the HSS
The HSS may use AC power from an outlet, or may also use an INFICON
rechargeable battery. A description of the connections for each power supply
follows.

IPN 074-472-P1C

13.1.6.1 If AC Power is Available
If AC power is available, use the Y-cable furnished to "split" the 24 V(dc) powerfrom the HAPSITE’s AC to DC power converter. Connect one connector of theY-cable to the HAPSITE’s power connection and connect the other connector to theback of the HSS. Then connect the two-cable connector to the output line of the AC
to DC power converter. Finally, plug the AC to DC power converter into the AC
power outlet.
Refer also to section 2.7.2, Installing the Headspace Sampling System, on page
2-15.
NOTE: Do not use the Y-cable to power two HAPSITE instruments.
HINT: If the HAPSITE is not shut down, do not disconnect the power cable unlessa charged battery is installed.
13.1.6.2 If AC Power is Not Available
For field operations, or whenever AC power is not available, batteries must be
used. A battery will provide power to the HSS for approximately 3 hours of use,
depending on ambient temperature and the parameters of the method being used.

13 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.2 Using the HAPSITE with HSS
The following instructions can be used as a guideline for sample and standard
preparation unless more specific operating instructions are available.

13.2.1 Powering on the HSS
CAUTION
Do not open the front door in a contaminated or wet area.
Open the front door and press the POWER button to turn on the HSS. See Figure
13-3.
HINT: The POWER button is a toggle switch. Once pressed and released theswitch returns back to its previous position.

,

Once the HSS is connected to the HAPSITE, and the HSS power is on, run one of
the Headspace methods using the Run Method icon. This will heat up the
Headspace instrument. See section 5.6, Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with Headspace
Sampling System, on page 5-19 and section 3.9, Analyze (GC/MS) Mode with
Headspace Sampling System in Portable Mode, on page 3-67.

13 - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 13-3 Powering on the Headspace Instrument

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.2.2 Loading the Vials
WARNING
Wear appropriate Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
as advised by the MSDS of the compound(s) being used.
Loading of vials is accomplished in a manner which best preserves the integrity ofthe sample. The HSS works on the basis of heating a sample to partition thevolatiles between the sample and the headspace within the vial. Just as heat drives
off volatiles, aeration also removes volatiles from a sample.
NOTE: Use Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) free water to rinse a syringe (either
25 or 50 mL size Luer-Lock tip syringe is suggested). No needle is required
for this syringe.
To load a water sample into the vial:

1 Rinse a small clean vessel (such as a beaker) with VOC-free water and discard
the water.

2 Pour some VOC-free water in the rinsed vessel for rinsing of the sample
syringe.

3 Rinse the sample syringe with VOC-free water by drawing the water up into thesyringe through the tip. Push the syringe plunger to discard the water. Repeat
three times.

4 Remove the plunger from the sample syringe. Hold the sample syringe at an

IPN 074-472-P1C

angle with the large open end up, and the small end (where a needle would be)
stopped against a gloved finger. See Figure 13-4. Carefully transfer the sample
into the sample syringe.
Figure 13-4 Transferring the Sample into a Sample Syringe

13 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: The 40 mL sample vials are intended for one time use only and should
be properly discarded when finished.

5 Adjust the amount of sample in the sample syringe to 20 mL while removing the
air bubble. See Figure 13-5.

WARNING
Do not insert a vial, which is completely full of liquidsample, into a Headspace sample well. An adequate
airspace above the sample is required to allow for sample
expansion during heating. Failure to leave an airspace inthe vial may result in failure of the vial and personal
injury. Do not fill the vial with more then 20 mL of liquid.

6 Add Internal Standard and surrogates into the sample.
NOTE: The Internal Standards are a set of compounds which are injected at aconsistent known concentration with each calibration standard,
continuing calibration check, blank, quality control sample, as well aswith each sample. The Internal Standards are used to correct formethod inconsistencies. Internal Standards are chosen so thatinterference with compounds from the sample is not encountered.

13 - 8IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 13-5 Clearing the Air Bubble from the Sample Syringe

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: Surrogates are used to indicate consistency within the analysis ascompared to internal standards. These compounds are also injected
into the sample at a consistent known concentration similar to theInternal Standard. Surrogates are also chosen to avoid interferencewith compounds in the sample. Surrogates are reported as recovery
values in percent (%) compared to expected response value.

6a Rinse the 10 L syringe, with cemented needle (pictured in Figure 13-6), to be
used for the injection of the Internal Standard/Surrogate mixture, with highpurity methanol three times, discarding the methanol according to local
regulations (preferably in a vented hood) after each rinse.

WARNINGThe needle tip is sharp, be careful to avoid injury.

6b Rinse the 10 L syringe once with the Internal Standard/Surrogate mixture, anddiscard the internal standard/surrogate mix from the 10 L syringe.
6c Inject the desired amount of Internal Standard/Surrogate mixture into thesample through the small end of the sample syringe. See Figure 13-6.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 13-6 Injecting the Mix into the Sample Syringe

For calibration standard preparation, injection of the proper amount of a calibration
mixture is performed to achieve the desired compound concentrations. Rinse a
separate 10 L syringe with methanol three times. (Discard the methanol fromeach rinse according to local regulations.) Then, rinse once with the calibration
mixture (discard this as well). Inject the desired amount of the calibration mixture
through the small end of the sample syringe to complete the calibration standard.

13 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The following is a set of examples for amounts of standard mix (at 200 and 2000
g/mL) to be injected into 20 mL of water to achieve the stated concentrations. See
Table 13-1, Example Calibration Concentration Table, on page 13-10.
Table 13-1 Example Calibration Concentration Table

Concentration Desired

Amount (at 200 µg/mL) to be injected

20 PPB

2 L

50 PPB

5 L

100 PPB

10 L

If using a 2000 µg/mL standard mix:
400 PPB

4 L1000 PPB

10 L

The formula used to calculate the amount needed for injection (as above) is asfollows (1 PPB = 1 ng/mL):
X = CF / CC x 1000 L/mL x 1 g/1000 ng x 20 mL[1]

where:
X = L to be InjectedCF = Final Desired Concentration in ng/mL (PPB)CC = Calibration Mix Concentration in g/mL (PPM)

6d Uncap a new sample vial, tilt the vial, and transfer the sample from the sample

IPN 074-472-P1C

syringe, taking care to avoid aerating (bubbling) in the sample. Cap the sample
vial tightly. See Figure 13-7.

13 - 10

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 13-7 Transferring the Sample to a 40 mL Vial

7 Label the vial with the appropriate information.

13.2.3 Loading the Wells
This section describes the procedure for loading a sample into the well of the HSS.

1 Open the top yellow cover of the HSS to expose the sample needle assemblyand metal heater block with four sample wells.

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGBe careful to avoid injury when handling hot sample
vials.

WARNINGBe careful to avoid injury when loading/unloading
samples, as the HSS metal sampling needle tip is sharp.

WARNINGBe careful to avoid injury from any broken glass.

13 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

WARNING
Do not insert a vial which is completely full of liquidsample. An adequate airspace above the sample isrequired to allow for sample expansion during heating.
Failure to leave an airspace in the vial may result in
failure of the vial and personal injury. Do not fill the vialwith more then 20 mL of liquid.

CAUTION
Do not open the HSS door in a contaminated or wet area.

2 Pull up on the needle assembly while grasping each side between the thumband forefingers. Swivel the needle assembly left or right as needed to expose
a free path to the sample well.

3 Insert the vial, plastic cap facing up, into the desired well.
4 Lower the needle, either into an empty well or an empty vial. See Figure 13-8.
NOTE: DO NOT puncture the sample septum until the sample has had
adequate time to equilibrate.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 13-8 Inserting the Needle into a Vial

5 Close the yellow cover to prevent heat loss and promote thorough heating of
the needle assembly.

6 Keep track of the time when each sample was inserted into the well to monitor
equilibrium time. See section 13.2.4, Cycling the Vials, on page 13-13.
HINT: Consistency of heating times is very important!
NOTE: The 40 mL sample vials are intended for one time use only. The vialand sample should be discarded properly when finished.

13 - 12HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.2.4 Cycling the Vials
Cycling the vials is performed to thermally equilibrate and analyze samples as
efficiently as possible. Four sample wells allow rotation of samples during analysis
for equilibrium times which are longer than a single sample run time.
Cycling the vials to achieve the desired equilibrium time:

Insert the first sample after the HSS sample heating block has reached the
setpoint temperature. Allow the sample to equilibrate for the desired time (asdetermined when the calibration analyses were performed) and continue withthe analysis.

For subsequent samples, determine a strategy for achieving the desired
equilibrium time while minimizing time between sample analysis.
HINT: Develop a consistent system such as analyzing samples in the same
position each time, and rotating samples clockwise orcounter-clockwise to that position during each sample shift.
NOTE: The 40 mL sample vials are intended for one time use only. The vialand sample should be discarded properly when finished.

13.2.5 Making the Measurement
To make a measurement using the HSS, a method is required. To quantify the
analytes detected, a calibration library in the method is required.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Once the calibration library method is completed, samples may be analyzed andcompared to the calibration library for quantitative analysis. Sample analysis mustbe performed using the same procedure used to perform the calibration runs.
Refer to Chapter 11, Method Editor and Chapter 12, Target Compound Methods
for additional information on developing methods and calibration libraries forquantitative analysis.

13.3 Maintenance of HSS
Other than replacement of consumable items, most maintenance will involve
routine purging of the system, as needed such as when analyzing highconcentration samples, needle replacement, or cleaning of the sample wells. See
section 16.9, Replacing the Headspace Sampling System Needle, on page 16-47.

13 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.3.1 Clean Out after a High Concentration Sample
When high concentration samples are analyzed using the HSS, the system canretain analytes which will be detected if the next sample has low levels of thosecompounds. This is typically referred to as a carry-over contamination. Carry-overcontamination can be reduced to approximately 0.1% by using Purge. In the caseof severe carryover, use the Flush function.
13.3.1.1 Purge Procedure
To purge the HSS, run a blank with the HSS needle in a clean, empty 40 mL purge
vial. In some cases, the blank may need to be run more than once.
HINT: A blank is the same method run without introducing a sample.

13.3.2 Cleaning Up a High Background
High background is usually encountered because some compounds are retainedin the HSS or the HAPSITE. These compounds could be in the HSS valves,transfer line, or within the HAPSITE.
To test whether the background is in the HSS or the HAPSITE, disconnect theTransfer Line, connect the air sampling probe to the HAPSITE, and analyze a clean
air sample. If the contamination is no longer present, the contamination is in the
HSS or Transfer Line.
Once the HAPSITE has been tested, test the Transfer Line by reconnecting it to the
HAPSITE and disconnecting it from the HSS. Perform an analysis of clean air with
the Transfer Line connected. If the contamination is not present, then thecontamination is in the HSS.
Contamination may be flushed from the HSS by disconnecting the Transfer Line
from the HAPSITE but leaving the line connected to the HSS. Once the Transfer
Line to the HAPSITE is disconnected, press the FLUSH switch inside the front
panel of the HSS (see Figure 13-9). This will pass Nitrogen through the system
while heating the sample well to 80 °C. The length of time the flush will need tooperate will depend on the level of contamination.
NOTE: The Flush function will continue to operate until the FLUSH toggle switch
is pressed again to turn it off.
HINT: Make sure that the HSS needle is inserted into a clean, new, empty vial
during flushing.

13 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

13.3.2.1 Flush ProcedureHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 13-9 Flush Switch Inside The Headspace Instrument

13.3.3 Cleaning the HSS Wells
The heating block is constructed of aluminum and is normally easy to keep clean.
Routine cleaning of the wells is not usually necessary, but debris and liquids may
be removed easily.

WARNINGBe careful to avoid burns if the surfaces are hot. Surfaces
may still be hot, even if the HSS has been turned off.

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGBe careful to avoid injury from the sharp samplingneedle.
The four wells may be cleaned, as necessary, using a damp paper towel or cloth.
Cleaning should be performed after the heating block has been allowed to cool toambient temperature or a reasonable temperature to avoid injury.
HINT: When cleaning the wells, position the needle assembly inside a well not
currently being cleaned. Use this as a precaution against possible injury
from the sharp needle point of the assembly.
To remove liquids, roll a paper towel or cloth into a tube shape which will fit easily
into the well, insert, twist and remove.

13 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Loose debris may be removed by turning the HSS upside down with the top door
open. (Remove the battery first to reduce the weight.) Make sure no samples arein the wells before performing this cleaning method.
If necessary, water, solvents, or detergent can be used to clean the wells. Be sureto think about contamination issues if using anything other than water!

CAUTION
Do not completely fill the vials heater area with any
liquids, since damage to the instrument may result.

13.3.4 Decontaminating the HSS
The HSS is designed to be water resistant, but not waterproof. The HSS canwithstand rainfall, but should be removed to a dry area as soon as possible. The
front door has a seal which prevents water from passing into the instrument when
the door is closed. There is also a seal around the entire instrument where theHeadspace cover meets the base plate of the Headspace. Proceed as follows towash the HSS.

WARNING - Risk Of Electric ShockBe careful to avoid shock. Disconnect the Headspace
instrument from its power source before continuing.

Be careful to avoid burns if the surfaces are still hot.

WARNINGThe needle tip is sharp, be careful to avoid injury.

1 Disconnect the HSS from the external power supply.
2 Remove the battery.
3 Remove all vials from the HSS heater wells. (Be careful of the sharp needle).
4 Disconnect the Transfer Line at the back of the HSS.
5 Close access doors.
6 Install the red plastic and metal plugs on all gas and electrical inlets and outlets
on the outside of the HSS.

13 - 16

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Decontaminate the instrument with a soft cloth and 10% bleach. For
decontamination of the wells, refer to section 13.3.3, Cleaning the HSS Wells,
on page 13-15.
NOTE: Solvents, abrasives, and strong soaps should not be used.

8 Use a soft cloth to wipe the HSS with clean water.
9 Allow the HSS to dry thoroughly before reconnecting any power supply.

13.3.5 Replacing The HSS Battery
Replacement of the battery is performed on an as needed basis. The battery isused when a remote power source is not available. When the battery charge reads
20%, a battery change is needed.
NOTE: The battery level can be monitored by pressing the TEST button locatedon the front of the HAPSITE battery. While the TEST button is pressed, the% Charge Level will indicate charge in increments of 20% from 20% to
100%, as well as OVER. A charge reading of OVER indicates a charge
above expected, and should be considered beneficial.
When the battery charge is low, the LO BAT indicator on the HSS is illuminated. If
this warning is ignored, the HSS will eventually turn off, and the HAPSITE (orlaptop, if used) will display a message stating that communication is lost.
Battery replacement should be performed between sample runs, and in a dry andnon-hazardous environment, since the front door must be opened.

1 Open the front door and turn off the HSS by pressing the POWER switch
located behind the front door.

IPN 074-472-P1C

HINT: The HAPSITE and laptop, if connected will display a message that
communication has been lost.

2 Hold the HSS instrument in place and push the installed battery further into theslot to free the latch.

3 Press the black button above the battery and hold while releasing the battery.
The springs will push the battery out, and the battery can be easily withdrawn
from the slot.

4 Place a charged battery in the slot, making sure the lettering is right-side up.
5 Press the battery into the slot until snug. The latch inside the slot will lock thebattery in position when properly installed.

6 Turn on the HSS by pressing the POWER switch located behind the front door.
NOTE: The HAPSITE and Laptop, if connected, will reestablish communications
with the HSS.

13 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.3.6 Replacing The HSS Nitrogen Canister
Replacement of the Nitrogen Canister is on an as needed basis. When thepressure is below approximately 140 kPa, the canister will need to be replaced witha new nitrogen canister. Replacement should be performed between sample runs,
and in a dry and non-hazardous environment, since the front door must be opened.
To change the Nitrogen Carrier Gas canister:

1 Open the front door of the HSS and locate the Nitrogen canister.
2 Press the black release tab on the left side of the Nitrogen canister and thecanister will partially pop out.

3 Remove the canister from the slot. A slight twist may be necessary to removecan.

4 Remove the plastic protective cap from a new Nitrogen canister and insert into
the canister slot.

5 Press and hold the black release tab while pushing the canister until thecanister stops, then release the tab. The canister should be snug and locked inplace.

WARNING
Do not refill the canisters after use. These canisters aredisposable and not designed for re-filling. Canisters may
fail upon refilling, causing bodily injury.

The HSS can be readily shipped to a field location. The cardboard box in which the
HSS was received, together with the cut-foam end-caps can be reused. A
reinforced plastic shipping case (IPN 931-406-P1) is also available.
Before shipping the HSS, place an empty vial in one of the wells and insert theneedle in it, for protection. Remove the battery and the canister. Install theprotective caps. No other steps are required to prepare the HSS for shipment.

13 - 18

IPN 074-472-P1C

13.4 Shipping the HSS

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

13.5 Charging the HAPSITE Battery using the HSS
HAPSITE batteries may be charged one at a time using the HSS.
To charge a battery, connect the HSS to remote power using the AC-to-24 V(dc)adapter. Turn on the HSS by pressing the power toggle switch inside the front door.
Insert the battery to be charged into the battery compartment, with the letteringright-side-up, until the battery is engaged.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Leave the HSS power on until the battery is fully charged. The battery should takeapproximately 12 hours to fully charge. The approximate level of the battery’s
charge can be monitored by pressing the TEST button on the battery. The battery
level is indicated in 20% increments. Refer to section 2.12, Batteries, on page 2-47
for additional information on batteries.

13 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

13 - 20

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 14
SituProbe14.1 SituProbe
The SituProbe™ Purge and Trap System is a sampling accessory for the
HAPSITE® Smart Plus portable GC/MS used for in-situ testing of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) in water. When used in combination with the HAPSITE, the
SituProbe accessory performs water analyses for qualitative and quantitative
results in the field. The SituProbe can be configured for unattended continuous
sampling as well as user-initiated, manual sampling.
The HAPSITE GC/MS is designed to analyze volatile organic compounds in air.
Therefore, the water sample VOCs must also be introduced to the HAPSITE in thegas phase. The SituProbe uses Nitrogen to create a headspace in the probe andto purge VOCs from the water sample. The Nitrogen purge gas collects in theheadspace at the top of the probe head. A portion of the headspace, containing theVOCs, is sampled by the HAPSITE for analysis.
Unknown VOCs are tentatively identified using the National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) mass spectral library. Known VOC compounds can bequantified when a calibrated target compound library is included in the analyticalmethod.

IPN 074-472-P1C

14.2 Theory
The SituProbe and HAPSITE is a dynamic purge and trap system. The SituProbepurges the VOCs from the water sample while the HAPSITE collects those VOCs
on an absorbent trap or in a fixed volume Sampling Loop within the HAPSITE. The
accumulated VOCs are subsequently desorbed from the trap or flushed from thesampling loop and analyzed by the HAPSITE.
To purge VOCs from the water sample, Nitrogen gas bubbles are introduced at thebottom of the SituProbe purge tube. The bubbles rise approximately five inches
through the water and collect in the headspace at the top of the purge tube. As the
bubbles rise through the water sample, a portion of the VOCs pass from the waterphase to the gas phase. The technical term for this transition is "partitioning". The
ratio of the VOC concentration in the water phase, VOCwater, to the concentrationin the gas phase, VOCgas, is the partition coefficient. See equation [1].

VOC water
Partition Coefficient = ---------------------VOC gas[1]

14 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Each compound will partition according to its solubility in the water phase and its
vapor pressure. Because only the headspace (gas phase) is sampled for the
HAPSITE analysis, the quantity of VOCs and therefore the detection limits are
dependent on the partition coefficient. Furthermore, each compound will have aunique interaction with the specific water sample matrix and temperature, making
the partition coefficient dependent on the sampling conditions. Analyte response isdetermined largely by the partitioning coefficient.
Solubility is determined by the polarity of the VOC molecule. Water is a polar
compound and therefore the more polar VOCs are more soluble in water. The polar
VOCs will partition more in the water while the less polar VOCs will readily volatilize
out of the water and partition more into the gas phase. Therefore, it is expected thaton a scale of more polar to less polar VOCs, as VOCs become less polar, detection
limits will decrease. See Figure 14-1.
Figure 14-1 Detection Limits
Polar
High

Non-polar
Detection Limit
Partition Coefficient

Low

In combination with the purging characteristics described above, the duration of thepurge and trap event will determine the quantity of each analyte collected on the
trap. Analyte response is directly related to the analyte mass collected for analysis.

14.3 Physical Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) . . . . . . . . . . 14.25 in x 15.5 in x 7.5 in(362 mm x 394 mm x 191 mm)

Probe line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ft (1.8 m) with LEMO connector andquick-connect for nitrogen purge gas
Weight (including battery). . . . . . . . . 30 lb (13.6 kg)External Carrier Gas Input . . . . . . . . 1/8 in Swagelok® miniature quick-connect atthe back of unit. Accepts 60-100 psi input
pressure (approx. 420-700 kPa).

14 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Transfer line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ft (1.2 m) with LEMO® connectors

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.4 Operating Specifications
Environmental Temperature . . . . . . . Operating: 5 to 45°C, 0-95% RH(non-condensing)
Storage: -40 to 70°C (stored dry)
Water Sample
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 to 30°C
Above 26°C, Dry Purge may be extended
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ionic conductivity is used to sense the proper
water level in the probe head before starting
the analysis. Therefore, the water sample
must exhibit conductivity before the analysis
can begin. Very pure water, such as
deionized or distilled water, may require theaddition of a salt before the analysis
sequence will start.
pH Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Probe Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimum, 5.5 in (140 mm)
maximum, 18 in (457 mm)
Heated Zones
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 to 60°C
Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 to 60°C

IPN 074-472-P1C

Transfer Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 to 60°C
80°C during Flush Mode
(External Power Only)
Practical Quantitation Limit. . . . . . . . ppt to ppb, based on HAPSITE configurationand method parameters
Internal N2 Carrier Gas: . . . . . . . . . . Standard HAPSITE (770 kPa) N2
disposable canPower Requirements
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 V(dc) ±5% via HAPSITE Power Adapter
80 W maximum
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard 19.2 V(dc) HAPSITE battery. Flushmode not recommended on battery power.
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE Plus IQ Software

14 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.5 Consumables
14.5.1 Compressed Nitrogen
A source of pressurized, ultra high purity Nitrogen is required for sample purging
and analysis. Nitrogen delivered by on-board canister or an external Nitrogensource, regulated to 60-100 psi (approx. 420-700 kPa), may be connected throughthe 3/16 in Swagelok quick-connect fitting located at the back of the instrument.
External ultra high purity Nitrogen cylinders must meet the following requirements:less than 50 ppb VOCs

less than 40 ppm Argon

The default methods for the SituProbe consume approximately 370 mL of Nitrogen
per run. Therefore, approximately 8 samples can be collected from a full Nitrogen
Gas canister. For mobile, in-the-field sampling, a 110 L bulk tank of Nitrogen isavailable. Larger bulk cylinders of ultra high purity Nitrogen, e.g., 300 ft3, can beused in fixed locations.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Nitrogen gas canisters are under pressure.

14 - 4

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.6 Heated Zones
There are several heated zones that must be maintained when operating the
SituProbe to keep VOCs and moisture from condensing in the sample pathway.
The temperature zones are set through the HAPSITE Plus software and are
implemented with the start of the method. See Figure 14-2. The method will notadvance until the zones are heated to the correct temperatures. Once a method isstarted and the zones are heating, the Transfer Line can be disconnected at the
HAPSITE without affecting the SituProbe’s heat-up process. Therefore, anytime
the SituProbe is disconnected from the HAPSITE it will maintain the heated zones
and be ready for immediate use when re-connected.
The table below contains information on each of the heated zones — their typicaloperating and input range of temperatures.
Table 14-1 Heated Zone Temperatures

Heated Zone

Default Operating
Temperature (°C)

Temperature
Range

Oven

50

30 - 60

Transfer Line60

30 - 60Probe

40

30 - 60

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 14-2 Method Editor Page for Entering Temperature Settings.

14 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.7 Valves and Sequences
The SituProbe follows a fixed sequence of events to volatilize, transfer, and collectthe water sample VOCs for HAPSITE analysis. The order of these events cannot
be changed, however the duration of each event can be adjusted (within ranges)
to meet the application’s analytical requirements.
The SituProbe accessory module contains heated valves and tubing to direct
sample and Nitrogen flows in the process of collecting and transferring sample
VOCs. The source of Nitrogen used by the SituProbe is either the onboard canister
mounted in the module or a pressure regulated bulk cylinder supplied through thequick-connect at the back of the module. Nitrogen is not provided by the HAPSITE
for SituProbe operations.
Before the method will start, the Sampling Probe must be properly immersed in thewater sample, as sensed by the conductivity electrodes and indicated by the LED
display on the front of the SituProbe.

14.7.1 Headspace
CAUTION
Without a headspace, the instrument could pull water
into the system.

14.7.2 Purge
Valves in the SituProbe are set to provide Nitrogen to the long tube at the bottomof the probe purge tube. Simultaneously, the HAPSITE sample pump starts, andthe Nitrogen purging through the sample is drawn out through the center openingof the probe head, through the SituProbe, and to the HAPSITE. The Nitrogen purge
flow rate must exceed the HAPSITE’s sample pump flow rate to maintain theheadspace. As a safety feature, if the headspace decreases and the water reaches
the upper conductivity electrode, a valve in the SituProbe module will open toprevent water from being drawn into the system.
During sample purging, the SituProbe provides a continuous flow of sample VOCs
to the HAPSITE. The HAPSITE’s configuration determines whether the VOCs are
simply purging the sample pathway or are being collected on a Concentrator. When

14 - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

The first operation is to create a headspace in the sampling probe. For fiveseconds, a flow of nitrogen is directed from the SituProbe module, through thesampling line and through the center of the probe head. The sample water level ispushed down to the upper holes in the purge tube, creating the headspace volume.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manuala Concentrator is installed, the HAPSITE’s sampling pathway initially bypasses theConcentrator and then switches to sampling through the concentrator for the time
period specified in the method.

14.7.3 Dry Purge
For a HAPSITE method that utilizes the Concentrator, a dry purge event follows
sample collection to expel moisture from the Concentrator. The SituProbe provides
a nitrogen flow of approximately 20 mL/min through the transfer line and the
HAPSITE’s Concentrator, sample pump, and exhaust port pathway.
This completes the SituProbe sampling portion of the analysis. The HAPSITE
continues with the analysis as it would for any other collected air sample.

14.8 SituProbe Operation
14.8.1 Headspace Creation

IPN 074-472-P1C

A series of several system checks are initiated when a SituProbe method is started.
One of the most critical conditions to check is the presence of a headspace in thesampling probe. VOCs will be collected into the headspace, but more importantly
the headspace volume must be maintained throughout the sampling process toprevent the water sample from being pulled into the SituProbe module and the
HAPSITE.
The water level in the Sample Probe is determined by conductivity measurementsfrom electrodes located in the sampling probe head. The state of the electrodesensors is displayed through the LEDs mounted on the SituProbe accessory. At thestart of a method, the system will always attempt to create a headspace or reinforce
an existing headspace by flowing Nitrogen gas into the probe head for fiveseconds. The headspace creation step is not part of any method’s events and does
not require any operator input. If the water level is within the proper range, themethod will continue. Otherwise, the method will stop and require operator
attention to correct the water level error before proceeding.

14.8.2 Purge Rate Adjustment
Following headspace creation is the SPLoopFill event. During this event, Nitrogenpurges into the probe sampling tube while the HAPSITE’s sample pump begins
sampling from the headspace. The purge rate must exceed the sample pump rate
to maintain the headspace volume. Adjust the purge flow by changing the"SituProbe Flow Pres." (pressure) parameter in the method editor. See Figure14-3. Increasing the parameter value will increase the purge flow rate. The purge
flow setting will be correct when a few bubbles are observed exiting the upper holes
in the purge tube during the sampling events (sample pump ON). See Figure 14-4.
Once the proper setting is determined, it can be used for all methods.
NOTE: The parameter change can only be made between runs.

14 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 14-3 Method Editor Screen for a Default Open Loop Method

Figure 14-4 Purge Tube

14.8.3 Method Events
The HAPSITE can be configured for either Loop or Concentrator sampling of the
SituProbe’s headspace. Separate methods and events are required for these
configurations. For more information regarding Loop and Concentrator method
events refer to Chapter 11, Method Editor.

14 - 8IPN 074-472-P1C

Excess purge gas exits upper
holes in the purge tube during
sampling events.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

14.9 Background Cleanup
14.9.1 Introduction
The SituProbe / HAPSITE system, with Concentrator installed, routinely detects
VOCs at the ppt level. Occasionally, an operator may unknowingly expose thesystem to an excessively high VOC level resulting in carryover in subsequent blankanalyses. The chromatogram indications of carryover can be broad baselineincreases or individual peaks of the analytes or other matrix VOCs that persistently
appear. Polymer components such as PEEK™ tubing in Transfer Lines andTeflon® in Diaphragm Valves are likely sources of carryover. If the backgroundpersists after a few blank runs with clean water then more aggressive measures
may be required.

14.9.2 Cleanup Steps
14.9.2.1 Probe Head
Because the contamination must originate with the water sample, the probe headshould be cleaned. Thoroughly rinse the probe head with VOC-free water. Unscrew
the glass or plastic purging sleeve being careful not to damage the othercomponents in the probe head. The sealing o-ring can also be removed and rinsed
with water. Clean the sleeve in detergent followed by thorough rinsing with
VOC-free water. Gently wipe the probe head components and surfaces that show
signs of contamination. Re-install the purging tube.
NOTE: The purge tube and o-ring are replaceable items.

IPN 074-472-P1C

14.9.2.2 HAPSITE
A simple troubleshooting step will determine if the contamination is in the HAPSITE
as well as the SituProbe. Disconnect the transfer line from the HAPSITE and attach
the air-sampling probe. Perform a blank run while sampling clean air or Nitrogenand compare the background and/or contamination peaks to the SituProbe blanks.
Repeat once or twice if necessary. If the contaminant is only in the SituProbe, thencontinue directly to the SituProbe cleanup procedure below. If the contaminant isin the HAPSITE, then the HAPSITE and SituProbe will require the cleanup
procedure. The HAPSITE should be baked out by setting the heated zones tohigher temperatures for a few hours, followed by blank runs using a HAPSITE Loopmethod or a default HAPSITE "cleanout" method (air-probe sampling,
Concentrator installed) as appropriate.
14.9.2.3 SituProbe FLUSH
The SituProbe has a built-in FLUSH mode for system cleanup. To prepare for thisoperation, remove the transfer line at the HAPSITE connection. Leave the transfer
line connected to the SituProbe. Remove the probe head from the water vessel andlay it on a clean surface. If possible connect the SituProbe to a bulk Nitrogen
cylinder, although an on-board canister can be used for shorter periods of time.

14 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Open the SituProbe front door and press the FLUSH switch. The SituProbe will
increase the temperatures of the heated zones and actuate valves to Nitrogen flush
all sample pathways. This process will continue until the the FLUSH switch ispressed a second time or the system runs out of Nitrogen gas. The system should
be flushed for a minimum of at least one hour to as long as overnight, dependingon the level of contamination. An installed Nitrogen gas canister will provide
approximately two hours of flush time. A bulk Nitrogen cylinder is recommended fora longer flush times.

14.10 Operating Tips
14.10.1 Reducing Background
Operator judgment is the first and best means of reducing background andcarryover contamination in the SituProbe.
14.10.1.1 Sampling Precautions
Avoid immersing the probe into an organic phase indicated by a sheen on thesurface of the water phase. Alternatively, try locating a less contaminated samplingarea or collect a sample from below the surface with a separate sampling vessel.
In addition to the analytes of interest, consider all VOCs that may be present in thewater sample.
14.10.1.2 Expected Concentration

When using a Concentrator method, set an appropriate ConcFill event time for the
expected VOC concentration range and detection limit requirements. Collecting on
the Concentrator for longer than required will unnecessarily emphasize
background interference.
Analyze clean water blanks on a regular basis to purge the system and monitor the
background level for use in interpreting sample data.

14.10.2 Nitrogen Usage
The Nitrogen supply to the SituProbe is only consumed during sample analysis.
There is no Nitrogen usage between sample runs. Nitrogen is consumed during
headspace creation, sample purging, and dry purge events. The operator has
control over the timing of the last two events. The sample purging events consume
the most nitrogen because the flow rate must exceed the HAPSITE sample pumpflow rate. Nitrogen sample purge usage can be managed in two ways:

14 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

Select a Loop or Concentrator method based on detection limit requirements.
Prepare and analyze standards within the concentration operating range of the
SituProbe/HAPSITE configuration.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The SituProbe Flow Pressure method parameter should be set to supply an
excess of a few nitrogen bubbles exiting the upper holes in the purge tube
during the purge event.

Sample purge time should be set to the minimum time required to properly
purge and equilibrate the sample pathway and to collect the proper amount ofsample for concentrator methods. Experience with the analysis will determine
the correct timing.

The dry purge Nitrogen (Concentrator methods only) flow is fixed at approximately
20 mL/min, but the event time can be controlled. The amount of moisture collectedon the Concentrator during sample purging will depend on the water sample’s
temperature and the length of the ConcFill event. When moisture from theConcentrator exits the analytical column and crosses the membrane into the mass
spectrometer, the MS pressure reading rises. Therefore, the amount of moistureleft on the Concentrator, prior to thermal desorption, must be managed to keep the
MS pressure within the software controlled limits. The proper dry purge time shouldbe empirically determined for the sampling conditions.

14.11 Calibration Standards
14.11.1 Introduction
Custom and ready-to-purchase calibration mixes may be purchased from a varietyof vendors. These calibration mixes are prepared in a water-soluble matrix such as
methanol for easy dilution into a known volume of water. The standard matrix must
be water soluble to evenly disperse the analytes. The low molecular weight ofmethanol is below the normal scan range and therefore it is not detected by the
HAPSITE’s mass spectrometer.

IPN 074-472-P1C

14.11.2 Standard Preparation
Commercially available calibration mixes are a reliable and convenient source forcalibration standards. These standards are normally received in flame sealed glass
vials that are easily opened by snapping the flame sealed end and transferring thecontents to a screw-cap vial with a septum seal.
The water standard is prepared for immediate use by transferring a measured
quantity of the standard mix, with a syringe, into a known volume of VOC freewater. The transfer volume of the typical spiking process is a few microliters of thestandard mix into one liter of water. Two acceptable spiking techniques are:

1 Prepare the standard directly in the purging vessel. See Figure 14-5.
1a Transfer a known volume of water into the purging vessel. The water level mustmeet depth specifications with the probe immersed.

1b Draw the required volume of standard mix into a syringe.

14 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

1c With a stirrer, begin swirling the water. Remove the stirrer and rapidly dispense
the standard below the water surface.

1d Quickly withdraw the syringe and allow a few seconds for the standard todisperse with the water’s movement.

1e For Internal Standard calibration, a second spike of the Internal Standard mix
can also be added.

1f Immerse the probe and immediately begin the analysis to avoid loss of VOCs.
NOTE: The sample purging process removes VOCs from the water sample.
Therefore, there can only be one analysis per water standard.
NOTE: The water standard and sample temperatures should be closely
matched for similar purging characteristics (partition coefficient). The
readout from the temperature sensor in the probe is displayed on the
HAPSITE and PC for easy temperature monitoring. An InternalStandard spike into the water will correct for some temperature
variations.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 14-5 Standard spiking into a purge vessel.

14 - 12HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 Prepare the standard in volumetric glassware.
2a Follow the above procedure for spiking the standard into the measured volume
of water.

2b Stopper the flask and carefully mix by gently inverting a few times.
2c Transfer the flask’s contents to the purging vessel without agitation.
2d Immerse the probe and immediately begin the analysis.

14.11.3 Calculations
The following equation can be used to calculate the volume of standard mix thatmust be injected into the water sample for the desired final concentration of VOCs.
1 gWater Std. Conc. (ng/mL)1000 L
Injected Vol. (L  = ----------------------------------------------------------------  Water Vol. (mL)  ---------------------  ------------------Calib. Mix Conc. (g/mL)
1 mL
1000 ng[1]

Simplified,
Water Std. Conc. (ng/mL)
Injected Vol. (L  = ----------------------------------------------------------------  Water Std. Vol. (mL)Calib. Mix Conc. (g/mL)[2]

Units: ng/mL (ppb); µg/mL (ppm)
NOTE: The injected standard volume is deliberately small compared to the sample
water volume so the sample composition is never significantly altered.

IPN 074-472-P1C

14.12 Calibration Curves
The HAPSITE Plus IQ software accepts single or multiple calibration points inconstructing a calibration curve of concentration vs response (target mass area).
The number of calibration points used may depend on the application’s
requirements, method protocol, response curve definition, and the analyst’s
judgment.

14 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 14-6 Figure 6-3. Multi-Point Internal Standard Calibration

14.13 Maintenance
Periodic cleaning is the only maintenance required for the SituProbe accessory.
The Viton® o-ring, between the sample collection tube and the purge head, should
be checked and cleaned or replaced as necessary.

Probe head surfaces will eventually become fouled with aquatic and bacterial
growth from long-term contact with water samples. Surface coating of the
conductivity sensors can result in sensing errors and method termination. Coatings
on the sample collection tube and probe head may trap VOCs and contribute tocarryover. The sample collection tube can be unscrewed from the purge head andcleaned with soap and water, followed by thorough rinsing with clean water.
NOTE: To remove the sample collection tube, hold the probe head close to thesample collection tube. Unscrew only the sample collection tube. Do not
unscrew the probe head. See Figure 14-7.
The o-ring can be cleaned with a lint-free cloth and clean water. Gently wipe theelectrodes and probe head surfaces with a wet lint-free cloth. Rinse thoroughly withclean water. Regular cleaning is recommended as a preventive measure.

14 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

14.13.1 Surface Cleaning

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 14-7 Disassembled View of the Sample Collection Tube and Sealing O-Ring
Do Not Loosen

Hold HereO-Ring

IPN 074-472-P1C

Sample Collection Tube

14 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

14 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 15
Service Module15.1 Introduction
The Service Module (also called the SM) provides several support functions for the
HAPSITE. The Service Module contains pumps that create vacuum for the
HAPSITE manifold, both during GC/MS operation in the lab and NEG Pump
activation. This vacuum system comprises a Service Module Manifold, two vacuum
pumps in series connected by a foreline, a Manifold Vent Valve, Foreline Vent
Valve, and controllers to operate and monitor the pumping operations. The Vacuum
Interconnect Valve is physically opened and closed from the Service Module.
A 24 V(dc) power supply in the Service Module provides the HAPSITE with power.
The Service Module also contains backup batteries to provide a controlled
shutdown of the Service Module if power is lost.
The Service Module operates using two separate, but connected, pumps. These
two pumps are called the Roughing Pump and Turbo Pump.
The Roughing Pump has a two or four stage design, depending on the version. The
newer version of the Roughing Pump has four stages. Each stage of the Roughing
Pump has a rubber diaphragm which is pushed against a smooth plate several
times a second in order to remove air through small holes in the plate. The
Roughing Pump is sometimes referred to as a Diaphragm Pump.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Roughing Pump works in series with the Turbo Pump to create a vacuum(typically about 1e-03 to 3e-03 Pa pressure) which is suitable for operating the
HAPSITE Mass Spectrometer.
The Turbo Pump has a set of precision balanced blades which rotate at
approximately 1,500 Hz (1,500 revolutions/second), or 90,000 RPM.

CAUTIONDue to the rotational speed the blades, the Service
Module should not be moved while it is operating.

15 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.2 Service Module Input PowerService Modules are available in either 110/220 V(ac) (IPN 930-202-G1) or
24 V(dc) (IPN 930-202-G3) input power models. With the exception of input power,both models are identical.

15.2.1 Service Module 110/220 V(ac) Input
The 110/220 V(ac) model operates from 110/220 V(ac) line voltage. See Figure
15-1.
Figure 15-1 Service Module 110 / 200 V(ac) Version

The 24 V(dc) model operates from an external 24 V(dc) power supply. See Figure
15-2.
Figure 15-2 Service Module 24 volts

15 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.2.2 Service Module 24 V(dc) Input

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.3 Components of the Service Module
The following section describes the components of both Service Module models.

15.3.1 Backup Batteries
NOTE: The Service Module contains two 12 V(dc) (24 V(dc) total) lead-acid gel
cells that will safely shut down the Service Module when power is lost. This
includes closing the Vacuum Interconnect Valve (if necessary), venting theService Module manifold, and a controlled shutdown of the electronics.
This procedure takes about 30 seconds, during which the POWER
indicator on the Service Module display will remain illuminated.

CAUTION
When power is regained after a loss, all operations thatwere interrupted must be restarted by the user.
When the Service Module is turned off by the user, theService Module will undergo the same controlled
shutdown procedure.
NOTE: Backup batteries are kept charged whenever the Service Module ispowered.

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.3.2 MDP/Turbo Pump
The Molecular Dispersion Pump (MDP), also known as MDP/Turbo Pump,
provides high vacuum to the HAPSITE Manifold. The top speed is 1500 Hertz(90,000 RPM). This is controlled by the MDP/Turbo Pump controller, which iscontrolled by the Service Module Processor. The pump is lubricated with special
vacuum pump oil at its base. Over-temperature protection is built into the pump.

15.3.3 Manifold Vent ValveThe Manifold Vent Valve is located in the middle of the MDP/Turbo Pump. The
Manifold Vent Valve is the main vent for the Service Module vacuum system.
Normally, the Manifold Vent Valve will vent the Service Module to atmosphere. If it
is desired to vent the vacuum system to another gas (dry nitrogen for example), thiscan be done by connecting the gas supply to the Service Module at the port marked
VENT. This port accepts an 1/8” OD tube. The maximum gas pressure at this ventshould be 10 psig (25 psia).

15 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.3.4 Foreline Vent Valve
The Foreline Vent Valve is located in the middle of the MDP/Turbo Pump. Thisvalve vents the foreline to atmosphere through a small orifice. This valve is either
off, pulsed, or continuously open, depending on the situation.
The inside surfaces of the vacuum system will absorb water vapor when exposedto the atmosphere. The amount absorbed is a function of the time exposed andhumidity. When the Service Module pumps are operated, this water vapor isreleased and needs to be pumped out of the system. The roughing pump cannot
pump this water without aid of periodic venting of the foreline by the Foreline Vent
Valve. This is controlled automatically when the operation Attach HAPSITE or
Activate NEG is selected.

CAUTION
The system will not be ready for use until a MDP/Turbo
Pump speed of 1480 Hz is reached.
NOTE: Depending on the amount of water vapor present, reaching a pump speedof 1480 Hz may take from five minutes for a dry system to several hours in
extreme cases.
The TMP indicator on the Service Module display will light up ACCL (accelerate)
when the MDP/Turbo Pump is accelerating and NORM (normal) when the
MDP/Turbo Pump has reached 1480 Hertz.

The Roughing Pump is a diaphragm pump. During normal operation, this pump will
evacuate the foreline to about 3 Torr. This pump is not designed to start when theforeline is under vacuum. Over-temperature protection is provided to the pump
motor.

15.3.6 Vacuum Interconnect Valve Actuator
The Service Module contains an actuator for the Vacuum Interconnect Valve. Partof the actuator mechanism operates inside the Service Module Manifold andconnects with the HAPSITE when the two are mated. This part of the actuator isdriven by a high torque motor through a rotary vacuum feed through.

15.3.7 Battery Charger
The Service Module contains a battery charger that will charge a HAPSITE battery
pack. The CHARGE indicator on the Service Module display will illuminate while
the battery is charging. This light will be extinguished when the charging
compartment is empty or the battery is fully charged.

15 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.3.5 Roughing Pump

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.3.8 Power Supply
The Service Module Power Supply is a 24 V(dc) supply that provides power to theService Module Components and is only available in the 110/220 V(ac) Service
Module (IPN 930-202-G1) model. The Service Module Power Supply also supplies
power to the Analytical Module when attached. The 24 V(dc) power is not supplied
to the electrical connector at the top of the Service Module unless the Analytical
Module is connected. The 24 V(dc) Service Module (IPN 930-202-G3) utilizes theexternal 24 V(dc) power supply to power the Service Module and Analytical
Module.

15.3.9 Communications

IPN 074-472-P1C

Communications to the Service Module are made through the electrical connector
on the top of the instrument. This is a RS-485 communication port utilized by the
HAPSITE and by the PC through the HAPSITE. There is also a RS-232
communication port on the side of the instrument that is used by service personnel.

15 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.4 When to Use the Service Module
The Service Module (SM) can be used with the HAPSITE Chemical Identification
System to provide vacuum for the Mass Spectrometer manifold. The Service
Module is to be used as an alternative to using the NEG pump to maintain avacuum in the MS manifold.
The Service Module is shown in Figure 15-3.
Figure 15-3 Service Module - Front And Top View

to change NEG Pumps quickly, without sending the HAPSITE back to the
INFICON Service Department.

WARNINGTo avoid personal injury, obtain proper maintenancetraining before attempting to install and activate a NEG
Pump.

15 - 6as an alternative, or backup method, to using a NEG Pump to provide vacuum
for the HAPSITE (i.e., the NEG Pump is not installed).

to perform troubleshooting operations with guidance from an INFICON service
representative.

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Service Module is used:HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.5 Plus IQ Software for the Service Module
The Plus IQ software for the Service Module can be accessed in three ways fromthe System Setup View:

Double-click on the Service Module icon. See Figure 15-4.
Figure 15-4 Service Module Icon

Double-click on the Status icon. See Figure 15-5. Click on the Service Module
Tab. See Figure 15-7.
Figure 15-5 Status Icon

Click on the Sensor icon with the right mouse button. Click on Properties withthe left mouse button. See Figure 15-6. Click on the Service Module Tab. See
Figure 15-7.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-6 Accessing Service Module in Plus IQ from the HAPSITE Sensor Icon

15 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.5.1 The Service Module Tab in Properties Window
Figure 15-7 Service Module Tab in Properties Window

The following options are available:

Attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to create the vacuum between the
HAPSITE and Service Module and within theMass Spectrometer after physicallyconnecting.
Pump Down SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to place the Service Module in storage.
Vent SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to take the Service Module out ofstorage.

15 - 8IPN 074-472-P1C

Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to release the vacuum between theService Module and the HAPSITE before
physical removal. (Vacuum is maintained in
the Mass Spectrometer.)HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays control information. See Figure
15-8.
Figure 15-8 Configure Window

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays additional control information. See
Figure 15-9.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-9 Manual Control Window

Ion Pump Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Ion Pump Status. See Figure15-10.

15 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 15-10 Ion Pump Status Window

Turbo & R.P. Status . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Turbo & R.P. Status. See Figure15-11.
Figure 15-11 Turbo & Roughing Pump Status Window

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contains controls to Activate NEG, Vent
HAPSITE and Bakeout NEG. See Figure15-12.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-12 Service Window

15 - 10

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The following status items are reported in the Service Module tab Properties
Window. Refer to Figure 15-7.:
Supply Volts (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The voltage being supplied to the HAPSITE(normally about 24).
UPS Battery (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
voltage, nominally 24 V.
Battery Level (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the charge percentage of the
HAPSITE battery (inserted in the battery
compartment of the Service Module), as apercentage of the nominal design capacity.
Displays “No Battery" if a battery is notinstalled.
Board Temp (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the temperature near the processor
board in the Service Module in degrees
Celsius.
Turbo Speed (Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicates the speed of the Turbo Pump in
Hertz (equivalent to rotational speed inrevolutions per second).
Turbo Current (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicates the current draw of the Turbo Pumpin amperes.
Total Press (Pa). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The vacuum pressure in the Mass
Spectrometer in Pascals.

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.6 Starting Up HAPSITE on the Service Module
CAUTION
Damage to the Turbo Pump may result from moving theService Module while the Service Module pumps areoperating.
NOTE: If the Service Module must be moved and the HAPSITE is Attached (Turbo
Pump is running), first Detach the HAPSITE. See section 15.8, Detaching
the HAPSITE, on page 15-17.
Before turning on power to the Service Module, refer to section 2.8, Service
Module, on page 2-19 for the physical setup instructions.
Power for the HAPSITE is provided through the Service Module, as long as theService Module is connected to a power source and turned on. Turn on the
HAPSITE by pushing the POWER button on the outside front panel.

15 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: If the HAPSITE is already powered on, it does not need to be turned off
before placing it on the Service Module.
HINT: The HAPSITE will take approximately 60 seconds to completely power on,or "Boot Up".

WARNING
If the NEG Pump is allowed to heat, the Attach procedure
will damage the NEG Pump and may cause injury. To
avoid heating, touch STOP PREPARE or using the arrowkeys, highlight STOP PREPARE and push OK SEL, when
the HAPSITE is starting.

15.7 Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module
The HAPSITE should be attached to the Service Module to create the vacuum in
the Mass Spectrometer. The alternative method of maintaining vacuum in the
HAPSITE is to use an installed and activated NEG Pump. Attaching the HAPSITE
involves physically placing the HAPSITE on the Service Module.

CAUTION

If the Service Module has been in storage, refer to section 2.8, Service Module, on
page 2-19 before proceeding.
The HAPSITE must be turned on before proceeding (refer to section 15.6, Starting
Up HAPSITE on the Service Module, on page 15-11). The HAPSITE can be
attached to the Service Module using the Plus IQ software, or using the HAPSITE
front panel.

CAUTION
When running the Service Module, the left and right side
vents must be kept clear to allow free airflow. Air flows
from right to left through the Service Module to allow
cooling of the pumps. A blockage can prevent the airfrom cooling the pumps properly and may cause thepumps to shut down to prevent overheating.

15 - 12IPN 074-472-P1C

Before attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module, theNEG Pump must be cooled overnight to allow it to reachroom temperature.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

15.7.1 Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module using thePlus IQ Software
Be sure to connect the HAPSITE to the Laptop before continuing. Refer to section
2.4.6, Connect Laptop (if desired), on page 2-10, if a connection is needed.

1 Make sure that the HAPSITE does not heat. On the HAPSITE screen, touch
STOP PREPARE or using the arrow keys, highlight STOP PREPARE andpush OK SEL. See Figure 15-13.
Figure 15-13 Stop Prepare Button

2 In Plus IQ, left-click on the desired HAPSITE sensor, then double-click theService Module icon, shown in Figure 15-14.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-14 Service Module Icon in System Setup View, after Selecting HAPSITE Sensor

15 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Double-clicking on the Service Module icon will open the Service Module tabin the HAPSITE Properties window, as shown in Figure 15-15.
Figure 15-15 Service Module Tab Selected in HAPSITE Properties Window

4 In the Service Module tab shown above, select the Attach button. A
confirmation window will open. Click Yes. See Figure 15-16.
Figure 15-16 Attach Confirmation Request

as shown on the Turbo Speed (Hz) line in Figure 15-15 above (initially listed as
0).
NOTE: The Attach procedure typically takes about 5 minutes to complete.
After selecting the Attach button, the HAPSITE Properties window can beclosed at any time.
While attaching, the following prompt will appear.
Figure 15-17 Attach In Process

15 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

5 The Roughing Pump will start first, then the Turbo Pump will begin to speed up,

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 When the Attach procedure is finished, the following message will be displayedon the screen.
Figure 15-18 Attach Successful

15.7.2 Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module using the HAPSITE
Front Panel Controls
1 To avoid running the start up method or AutoTune, touch STOP PREPARE.
See Figure 15-19.
Figure 15-19 Stop Prepare Button

IPN 074-472-P1C

1a If using the push button keys, highlight STOP PREPARE with the arrow keys.
Push OK SEL.

2 The SYSTEM IS NOT READY! message will appear.
3 Touch the Accessories icon or push the STAT key until the probe pageappears. See Figure 15-20.

15 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 15-20 Accessories

4 Touch the ATTACH SM button or using the arrow keys, highlight the ATTACH
SM button and push OK SEL. See Figure 15-21.

5 A bar graph displaying the progress of the attach will be displayed.
NOTE: The ATTACH SM button will become grayed out.

6 When the Attach has successfully completed, the Service Module Attachedmessage will be displayed. See Figure 15-22.

15 - 16

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-21 Service Model Attach Button

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 15-22 Service Model Attached15.8 Detaching the HAPSITE
Detaching the HAPSITE allows the safe removal of the HAPSITE from the Service
Module. The Detach procedure ensures that the interconnect plug on the HAPSITE
is closed at the proper time, and the two pumps in the Service Module are properly
shut down.
The detach procedure can be carried out either using Plus IQ software, or using
the HAPSITE front panel display.

15.8.1 Using Plus IQ Software to Detach
1 Be sure to connect the HAPSITE to the Laptop using a crossover cable before
continuing. Refer to section 2.4.6, Connect Laptop (if desired), on page 2-10 if
a connection needs to be made.
IPN 074-472-P1C

2 In Plus IQ, left-click on the HAPSITE sensor to detach, then double-click theService Module icon, shown below in Figure 15-23.
Figure 15-23 Service Module Icon

15 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Double-clicking on the Service Module icon will open the Service Module tabin the HAPSITE Properties window, as shown in Figure 15-24.
Figure 15-24 Service Module Tab Selected in HAPSITE Properties Window

4 In the Service Module tab shown above, select the Detach button. A message
will appear looking for confirmation to detach the HAPSITE, as shown in Figure15-25. Select Yes. A Detaching Service Module message is displayed. See
Figure 15-26.

Figure 15-26 Detach In Process

5 The HAPSITE Vacuum Interconnect valve will close shortly after selecting
DETACH.
NOTE: The detach procedure typically takes about 3 to 5 minutes to complete.
NOTE: After pressing the Detach button and selecting Yes on the confirm
window, the HAPSITE Properties window can be closed.

15 - 18

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-25 Detach HAPSITE Confirm Window

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 When the Detach procedure is complete, a message will appear confirming a
successful detachment. See Figure 15-27.
Figure 15-27 Detach Successful

NOTE: To place the Service Module in storage see section 15.10, Storing theService Module, on page 15-20.

15.8.2 Using the Front Panel Display to Detach
1 Touch Menu or push MENU.
2 Touch the PROBES & SM icon. Alternately, push the STAT button until the
PROBES & SM page is displayed.

3 Touch the DETACH SM button. Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight the
DETACH SM button. Push OK SEL

4 A bar graph displaying the progress of the Detach procedure will appear on thefront panel of the HAPSITE.

5 The message Service Module Found, Not Attached will be displayed on thescreen.

CAUTION

IPN 074-472-P1C

Wait until the Turbo Speed reads zero before physicallyremoving the HAPSITE from the Service Module.

6 To place the Service Module in storage, see section 15.10, Storing the Service
Module, on page 15-20.

15.9 Physically Removing the HAPSITE from the Service Module
The HAPSITE cannot be physically removed from the SM until a "Detach SM" hasbeen performed. Refer to section 15.8, Detaching the HAPSITE, on page 15-17
before physically removing the HAPSITE from the Service Module.
After the HAPSITE has been detached from the Service Module, release thelatches on each side of the Service Module.
HINT: To continue using the HAPSITE, place a charged battery in the HAPSITE
or connect exterior power before removing the HAPSITE from the docked
position on the Service Module.

15 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Physically remove the HAPSITE from the Service Module. Lift the HAPSITE off theService Module in a straight, upward direction. Once the HAPSITE is undocked,
replace the yellow plastic protective cover on the bottom of the HAPSITE, asshown in Figure 15-28.
Figure 15-28 Placing Yellow Protective Cover on Bottom of HAPSITEThis yellow cover is used to keep out dust and debris, as well as keep the opening
dry during decontamination.

When not attached to the HAPSITE, the Service Module should be stored with thealuminum storage plug in place. To store the Service Module in this configuration,a Pump Down procedure which turns on the Roughing Pump for 60 seconds tocreate a partial vacuum, is performed. The vacuum holds the aluminum storage
plug in place. The plug protects the Service Module from dust, debris, andmoisture, which can negatively affect the performance of the pumps in the Service
Module.
NOTE: If the HAPSITE is Attached to the Service Module, the Service Module
must first be Detached. Refer to section 15.8, Detaching the HAPSITE, on
page 15-17 before proceeding.
NOTE: The HAPSITE is considered Attached if the HAPSITE is docked on theService Module, and the Turbo Pump is running at a speed greater than
0 Hz.

15 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.10 Storing the Service Module

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NOTE: Clean any debris or dust from the black rubber o-ring using a lint-free wipe.
Wipe the top of the o-ring, following the contour to clean the entire top
exposed section. Avoid pushing dust or debris into the middle opening
leading to the pumps.
Cleaning the o-ring will help ensure that a good seal to the aluminum storage plugis achieved. The seal allows the system to maintain vacuum more effectively. See
Figure 15-29 shows the o-ring being cleaned.
Figure 15-29 Cleaning the Service Module Rubber O-ring using a Lint-free Wipe

After cleaning the rubber o-ring, make sure there are no cuts. Also look for any
visible cracking of the o-ring. If the o-ring is damaged, it may need to be replaced.
To place the Service Module in storage, the aluminum storage plug is placed on the
opening where the HAPSITE connects, as shown in Figure 15-30.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-30 Service Module Aluminum Storage Plug in PlaceHINT: Confirm the RS-232 communication cable is connected to the Service
Module and Laptop. If the RS-232 communication cable is not attached,refer to section 2.8.1, Setting Up the Service Module, on page 2-19 before
proceeding.

15 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The Service Module must be pumped down. Open the Plus IQ program.
Double-clicking on the Pump Down icon will start the pump down process, as
shown in Figure 15-31.
Figure 15-31 Service Module Pump Down Button

The prompt shown will appear to confirm pumping down the Service Module. See
Figure 15-32.

Select Yes to pump down the Service Module. A window will appear counting down
a sixty second delay while the pump down procedure completes, as shown in
Figure 15-33.
NOTE: The Pump Down procedure turns on the Roughing pump for sixty seconds
to create a partial vacuum, sealing the aluminum storage plug in place.
Figure 15-33 Pump Down Service Module Delay Screen

After the pump down is complete, place the yellow protective cover on top of theService Module aluminum storage plug, as shown in Figure 15-34.

15 - 22

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 15-32 Pump Down Service Module Confirm Window

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 15-34 Yellow Protective Cover Placed Over Aluminum Storage Plug on Service Module

To complete the Service Module storage procedure, turn off the Service Module
power switch at the back left of the instrument.

CAUTION
The Service Module should be stored in a clean and dry
area. Avoid storing the Service Module in areas which areoutside the temperature range of 40 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C).

IPN 074-472-P1C

15.11 When Power to the Service Module is Lost
In case of a sudden loss of supplied power, the Service Module will close the
HAPSITE Interconnect Plug and shut down the pumps properly. This happens
automatically in order to preserve the vacuum in the HAPSITE Mass Spectrometer
manifold and to protect the Service Module pumps from being damaged.
When power is restored, the HAPSITE and Service Module must be attached again
before the Service Module will provide proper vacuum for the HAPSITE. Refer tosection 15.7, Attaching the HAPSITE to the Service Module, on page 15-12.
NOTE: See Chapter 16, Maintenance for additional information on using theService Module to perform maintenance on the HAPSITE.

15 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

15 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 16
Maintenance16.1 Introduction
The HAPSITE is designed to require minimal service. Repairs will normally be
carried out at the factory or other INFICON Service Facilities. Preventive
maintenance includes cleaning the air filters and replacement of certain
consumables.
Additionally, the HAPSITE checks the system components each time a start up is
performed, and will notify the user if the following items need to have maintenanceperformed:
Turbo Pump usage hours (Service Module)

Roughing Pump usage hours (Service Module)

Ion Pump usage hours (HAPSITE)

NEG Pump usage hours (HAPSITE)

For Turbo Pump, Roughing Pump, and Ion Pump maintenance, service must be
performed by a qualified INFICON Service Representative. (See Chapter 18,
Customer Support.)

IPN 074-472-P1C

NEG Pump installation and removal is explained later in this chapter.

16 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.2 Safety Considerations
WARNING
When operating, the NEG Pump is hot! Do not remove
when hot or slightly warm. Always allow NEG tocompletely cool before removing. Burns may result fromhandling the hot flange and the NEG will become
unusable.

WARNING
Metal alloys within the NEG Pump may ignite if exposed
to atmospheric pressure while hot. If ignition occurs,
drop pump into a bucket of sand and cover withadditional sand. If this is not practical, set the pump on its
black plastic base on a non-flammable surface. The NEG
Pump will burn out in a few minutes.

WARNING - Risk Of Electric ShockWARNING - Risk Of Electric ShockThe cover of the HAPSITE should never be removed. No
serviceable parts inside.

16 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Whenever accessing the internal components of theService Module, always disconnect the power cord andremove the battery to reduce the danger of electricalshock.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.3 HAPSITE Symptom - Cause - Remedy Chart
Table 16-1 Diagnosing Problems - HAPSITE

Symptom

Cause

Remedy1. Filament will not turn on(Unable to turn on
filament error! on userinterface.)

1a. Remove Ionizer source andcheck to see if filament has
opened.

1a. If opened, replace ion source(see section 16.8, Replacing the
Ionizer of the Mass Spectrometer,on page 16-41), otherwise contact
Customer Support (see Chapter
18).

2. Filament shut off. (Overpressure fault.)

2a. System shuts down filament if 2a. Replace Ion Pump. Contactpressure spikes. An old Ion Pump Customer Support (see Chapter
will "burp" N2 and Ar which can18).
cause the system to shut down.
2b. System has an air leak. Turn 2b. Contact Customer Support
off carrier gas and check to see if (see Chapter 18).
mass 32 is relatively large (10 to
20% of peak 28)
2c. MDP/Turbo Pump or Roughing 2c. Check Turbo Speed in the
Pump may need servicing.
Service Module program. Service
pumps if speed is less then 1480
Hz, and there are no air leaks.
2d. NEG Pump is depleted.

IPN 074-472-P1C

3. “Electron Multiplier fault.”
message at user interface.

2d. Replace NEG Pump using
INFICON part # 930-425-P1. See
section 16.7 on page 16-21.

3a. Contact Customer Support
3a. High pressure in vacuum
system caused by the failure of the (see Chapter 18).
Ion Pump to pump Ar with a NEG
Pump installed.
3b. Short in Electron Multiplier, or 3b. Contact Customer Support
fault in high voltage power supply (see Chapter 18).

4. Poor sensitivity in Tune.

4a. Ionizer has degraded.

4a. Replace Ionizer using
INFICON part # 930-205-G1. See
section 16.8, Replacing the Ionizerof the Mass Spectrometer, on
page 16-41.

4b. Quadrupole/EM assembly has 4b. Contact Customer Support
degraded.
(see Chapter 18).

16 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 16-1 Diagnosing Problems - HAPSITE

Symptom

Cause

Remedy4c. Make sure that there is a full 4c. Replace canister with a fullInternal Standard Gas can.
unexpired Internal Standard
canister in the GC, and make sure INFICON Part # 930-433-P6
that a Carrier Gas can was notplaced into the Internal Standard
slot by mistake.
5. Communication Error HAPSITE and Laptop are notcommunicating.

5a. External crossover cable has
become disconnected.

5a. Reconnect crossover cableand reboot system if necessary.

5b. Problem with port on external 5b. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).
computer or with the HAPSITE
internal communications system.
6a. Battery is no longer providing 6a. Check battery charge. Replace
power to the instrument.
battery with a freshly charged one
or connect instrument to external
supply.
6b. External supply, Service
Module not receiving line power.

6b. Check line power.

6c. Failure with internal power
supplies.

6c. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

7. Mass spectrum drift with time.
Both in resolution and position.

7a. Thermal problem on the highvoltage Rf board.

7a. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

8. Instrument turns on but fails toboot properly.

8a. CPU or hard drive failure.

8a. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

9. “Pressure too high toread” error message at userinterfaces.

9a. High background. If
9a. System should clean itself out
components have been changed after a few hours of pumping. (Bestor instrument vented, H20 or other to leave system pumping
trace contamination could cause overnight.)
the base pressure above 1.0x10-2 Note: The pressure will decrease
above the 1.0x10-2 Pa upperPa.
pressure limit while activating an
NEG Pump. This will shut down
the filament and EM.

16 - 49b. Pressure is high. NEG Pump
depleted.

9b. Replace NEG Pump using
INFICON part # 930-425-P1. See
section 16.7, NEG Pump
Removal, Installation and
Activation, on page 16-21.

9c. Ion Pump shorted.

9c. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

IPN 074-472-P1C

6. Instrument will not turn on.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 16-1 Diagnosing Problems - HAPSITE

Symptom

Cause

Remedy9d. Check Turbo Speed in Service 9d. Contact INFICON (seeModule program. If less then 1480 Chapter 18).
Hz, Service Module pumps mayneed maintenance or the system
may have an air leak.
10. “Pressure too low toread” message at userinterfaces.

10a. Pressure is too low to read.
The system pressure gauge canonly read down to 1x10-4 Pa.

10a. Open membrane isolation
valve. This will bring the pressure
to 1-3x10-3 Pa.

10b. Ion Pump has failed to turnon.

10b. Close and open themembrane valve a few times. If
this fails to shock the Ion Pump
into starting, contact Customer
Support (see Chapter 18).

11. Sample carry-over from one
run to the next.

11a. Cold spot in the samplingsystem.

11a. Check to see if heat zones areat temperature.

12. Internal standard inbackground.

12a. Low pneumatic (carrier gas) 12a. Check carrier gas pressure,pressure at GC 10-port valve.
and replace canister if low.

13. Temperature zones read 99.8 13a. Component in the zone is hot. 13a. GCC card has a problem
controlling the temperature zone.
Contact Customer Support (seeChapter 18).

oC or higher.

IPN 074-472-P1C

13b. Zone is cold.

14. Unable to read memory chips 14a. Poor connections or
on gas canister.
damaged contact.

13b. Sensor could be bad. Contact
Customer Support (see Chapter
18).
14a. Try re-seating canister or try aknown good can. If this fails,
contact Customer Support (seeChapter 18).

14b. Processor card failure.

14b. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

15. Water enters system duringdecontamination.

15a. Dirt on the gaskets, or
improper seal. Clean gasket andcheck seals.

15a. If problem cannot becorrected, contact Customer
Support (see Chapter 18).

16. Poor Gas Chromatographic
Peaks/ Poor GC sensitivity.

16a. GC column has degraded.

16a. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

16b. Loose connections at sample 16b. Check to see if fittings andloop, concentrator or ferrules.
ferrules are properly installed.
17. Temperature zone fails to heat. 17a. Open heater or bad controller 17a. Contact Customer Support
card.
(see Chapter 18).

16 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Table 16-1 Diagnosing Problems - HAPSITE

18. Retention Time in
Chromatograph has drifted.

19. “Low Carrier Gas” error
message at the user interfaces.

Cause
18a. Unstable carrier gas flow.

18a. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).

18b. Improper GC heating.

18b. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18)

19a. Carrier gas pressure is low(pneumatic valve failure canoccur.)

19a. Replace with a fresh canisterof N2. INFICON Part Number
930-432-P6.

20. Leaking carrier or internal
standard canisters while installedin the HAPSITE AM.
21. Elevated chromatogrambaseline.

22. Higher than normal basepressure.

Remedy20a. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18).
21a. HAPSITE is contaminated.

21a. See section 16.5,
Contamination, on page 16-7.

21b. Improper baseline andthreshold settings.

21b. Set baseline and threshold in
Tune.

22a. See section 16.5,
22a. System could be
Contamination, on page 16-7.
contaminated. Check the
background in Tune. Look forexcessive amounts of water orabnormal levels of organics in the
spectrum.
22b. Slight air leak.

22b. Contact Customer Support(see Chapter 18)

23. Organic contamination in the 23a. System could bebackground of the mass spectrum. contaminated.

23a. See section 16.5.1,
Contamination of the Mass
Spectrometer, on page 16-8.

24. Wireless Problem

24a. Check to see that Wireless ison and that the computer isconfigured properly. Refer to
Chapter 4.

16 - 624a. Connection problem.

IPN 074-472-P1C

SymptomHAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.4 Required Environment for General Maintenance
The HAPSITE is designed for use in the field, away from ideal laboratory
conditions. However, when the HAPSITE is serviced, appropriate care must be
taken to assure the internal components remain uncontaminated. For example,
removing and replacing batteries can generally be performed outdoors, as long as
rain or foreign materials do not enter the battery compartment. If the HAPSITE isbeing used in a contaminated hot zone, the HAPSITE must be taken to thedecontamination area before the door is opened. Opening the front door breaks theseal of the case and the internal components cannot be decontaminated by simple
procedures. In such a situation, even changing batteries should be done in thedecontamination area.
Changing the NEG Pump or the ionizer requires the use of the Service Module.
This module is not designed for use outdoors. The Service Module should be set
up in a relatively clean indoor area with AC power available. When the vacuum
flange (where the NEG Pump is installed) is open, ensure dust, moisture, oils, orother contaminants are not permitted to enter the Mass Spectrometer manifold.

CAUTION
Do not touch the inside surfaces of the manifold withbare hands.The natural skin oils will produce aninterfering background signal on the HAPSITE’s
sensitive detection system. The use of cotton gloves isrequired when handling any part of the manifold system.

IPN 074-472-P1C

16.5 Contamination
Contamination of the HAPSITE is defined as the undesirable introduction of a
substance or compound into the instrument. This can consist of anything fromwater, to organic compounds with high or low vapor pressures, to liquids. Keep inmind that the HAPSITE will have no problem detecting trace contaminants on “New
Cleaned Components”. Most of these contaminants can be flushed from thesystem by purging the HAPSITE with clean nitrogen and elevating the temperatureof heated zones. If the contamination is severe enough, major system components
may have to be replaced. The two major sub-systems of the HAPSITE that canbecome contaminated are the Mass Spectrometer and the Gas Chromatograph.
NOTE: High activation temperatures will cause the NEG pump to emit large
amounts of unwanted compounds. This emission will diminish when thepump cools to operational temperatures.

16 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.5.1 Contamination of the Mass SpectrometerContamination of the Mass Spectrometer manifold can occur every time an internal
component is changed, or vacuum is broken. This can consist of water and/or lighthydrocarbons. These will be seen in the mass spectrum even when the isolation
valve is closed. (The source of contamination is not coming from the GC module.)
16.5.1.1 Symptoms
Symptoms of contamination are a high background of water or hydrocarbons in themass spectrum, a high baseline in the TIC plot, or a higher than normal basepressure. Contaminants on the Ion Source or the NEG Pump will be driven off asthese components are heated. Use this heat to decontaminate the instrument.
16.5.1.2 Decontamination
Decontaminate the vacuum manifold using the Service Module. Pump for a few
hours for water or light hydrocarbons contamination, or as long as 24 hours if thecontamination is heavy. Remember that various components of the vacuum
manifold will get hot and aid in driving off unwanted substances. Turn the Ion
Source filament ON and heat the NEG Pump to 400 C when decontaminating asystem. If the contamination will not go away after a full day of pumping, thesuspect component must be removed and replaced. Remember, care must be
taken when handling internal components of the vacuum system. Always use new
gloves or a clean lint free cloth to avoid contact with skin oils.

16.5.2 Contamination of the Gas Chromatograph16.5.2.1 Symptoms
Symptoms of contamination are a high background of hydrocarbons in the mass
spectrum, or a high baseline in the TIC plot.
16.5.2.2 Decontamination
Decontaminate the GC by moving the HAPSITE to an area where the air isrelatively clean or connect the transfer line to a canister of a pure gas (N2 or Air).
Flush the sampling pathway by setting up a GC method to Loopfill for 5 minutes.
Repeat this method until the source of the contamination is flushed out. Heating all
temperature zones to the maximum allowable setting will aid in the cleansing of the
GC. Some compounds may become trapped at unheated locations and might
require a longer time period to be flushed out. If the boiling point of the contaminate
is greater than the maximum temperature of the heated zones, or if a liquid sample
has been pulled into the system, the GC and Transfer Line may need to be
replaced.

16 - 8IPN 074-472-P1C

Contamination of the Gas Chromatograph (GC) can occur if hot heavy organic
gases are sampled, and then condense in the system. These will be seen in themass spectrum only when the isolation valve is opened. (Background may be highafter the isolation valve is first closed, but will drop off after a few minutes.)HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.5.3 Contamination of the Probe and Probe Line
Contamination of the Probe and Probe Line can occur when the Probe Tip actually
touches a sample or a compound "sticks" in the Probe Line.
16.5.3.1 Symptoms
Symptoms of contamination in the Probe and Probe Line include a high continuous
base line with the same or similar identification in Survey Mode. It can also be seen
as a persistent peak in Analyze (GC/MS) Mode.
16.5.3.2 Decontaminate

1 Remove the Probe from the HAPSITE.
2 Hold the Probe and Probe Line in a "U" shape.
3 Holding the Probe, pour methanol from a squeeze bottle into the Probe nut
opening until methanol is seen coming out of the Probe Line through the LEMO
connector.

WARNINGFor safety precautions, wear recommended PersonalProtective Equipment (PPE) according to the MSDS whilehandling methanol. See Figure 16-1.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-1 Pouring Methanol into Probe and Probe Line

16 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 With each end of the Probe in a separate hand, alternately move each ends of
the Probe Line up and down until methanol comes out of either end of theProbe. Repeat this a couple of times so the methanol can dissolve any
contaminants in the Probe Line. See Figure 16-2.
Figure 16-2 Moving Methanol Around in Probe and Probe Line

5 Empty the methanol remaining in the Probe Line by tipping one end of theProbe Line downward until all of the methanol drains from it. See Figure 16-3.

6 Blow out the Probe Line with Nitrogen to remove any residual methanol that
may be left in the Probe Line. See Figure 16-4.

WARNING
Point both ends of Probe away from you when blowing
out the Probe Line with Nitrogen. Continue to wear
appropriate Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) whileblowing out the Probe Line.

16 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-3 Empty Methanol from Probe and Probe Line

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 16-4 Blow Out Probe Line and Probe with N2

7 Re-attach the Probe Line to the HAPSITE.

16.5.4 Decontaminating the Outside of the Analytical Module
1 Decontamination cap and plug kit number 930-2020-G1 contains tall the plugs
and caps needed to seal the Analytical Module for decontamination. See Figure
16-5.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-5 Plugs and Caps

16 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 Install the 24 V Power electrical cap (P/N 070-1273). See Figure 16-6.
3 Install the EXT COM electrical cap (P/N 070-1273). See Figure 15-6.
Figure 16-6 24 V and EXT COM Caps

4 Install the yellow load lock cover (P/N 930-308-P1). See Figure 16-7.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-7 Yellow Load Lock Cover

16 - 12HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Install the red exhaust cap (P/N 070-338). See Figure 16-8.
6 Install the red N2 inlet cap (P/N 070-171). See Figure 15-8.
Figure 16-8 Red Exhaust and N2 Cap

7 Install the ethernet port cap. See Figure 16-9.
8 Install the silver LEMO plug (P/N 070-1040). See Figure 15-9.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-9 Ethernet Cap and Silver LEMO Plug

16 - 13

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 Install the red probe cap (P/N 059-0382). See Figure 16-10.
10 Install the brass probe nozzle cap. See Figure 15-10.
Figure 16-10 Red Probe Line Cap and Brass Probe Cap

NOTE: The outside of the probe line can be decontaminated while it is still
attached to the Analytical Module. To decontaminate the inside of theprobe line, refer to Contamination of the Probe and Probe Line, section
16.5.3 on page 16-9

CAUTIONWARNING
Make sure that you are in a well ventilated area.

WARNING
Wear appropriate PPE (Personal Protective Equipment).
Refer to the MSDS for the appropriate PPE.

11 Wipe the Analytical Module down using a soft cloth and a 10% hydrochlorite(bleach) solution (i.e., 1 part bleach to 9 parts water).

12 Use a soft cloth and warm water and wipe the Analytical Module down again.

16 - 14

IPN 074-472-P1C

All caps must be in place and the front door must be
firmly shut before decontaminating the Analytical
Module.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.6 NEG Pump Troubleshooting
If an MS Pressure Warning message is displayed on the front panel of the
HAPSITE, go to the TUNE STATUS option on the PROBES & SM page menu. See
Figure 16-11. If the MS warning is seen on the Laptop, (see Figure 16-11) checkthe System Status bar on the right side of the System Setup screen or go to theService Module Tab in the Properties menu on the Laptop in Plus IQ to check the
MS Pressure. See Figure 16-12 and Figure 15-7 on page 15-8.
Figure 16-11 MS Pressure Error

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-12 Pressure Location on HAPSITE

A MS Vacuum Pressure reading of Below Gauge Range indicates the HAPSITE
is ready to sample. If the MS Vacuum Pressure is 3E-003, order a new NEG Pump.
If the MS Vacuum Pressure is 6E-003, replace the NEG Pump.
NEG Pumps have an expected life of approximately 150 hours. If the NEG Pump
has 70 hours or less consider trying a bakeout (formerly called Reactivation) toextend the NEG Pump’s life. To check the NEG Pump hours used, go to the NEG
Status tab on the Properties menu. See section Figure 16-13.
NOTE: If the NEG Pump has more than 150 hours, a bakeout or reactivation canbe tried, though the results are likely to be limited.

16 - 15

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-13 Service Module Tab

16 - 16

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.6.1 NEG Pump Bakeout Procedure
A bakeout can be performed with or without the use of the Service Module. A
bakeout heats the NEG Pump to 700 degrees Centigrade for a specified length oftime (usually 2 hours). Refer to section 2.8, Service Module, on page 2-19 for more
information on setting up the Service Module.
16.6.1.1 Bakeout Using the Laptop
For Service Module set up instructions, refer to

1 Click on the Service Module tab of the Properties menu.
2 Click on the Service button. See Figure 16-14.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-14 Service Button on the Service Module Tab

16 - 17

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Set the Bakeout Power to 30. The Bakeout Time is usually set to 2 hours. See
Figure 16-15.
Figure 16-15 Service Window

4 Click the Bakeout NEG button.
16.6.1.2 Bakeout From Front Panel

1 Touch or using the arrow keys, highlight the HAPSITE icon. Push OK SEL.
2 Touch the HEATERS icon.
3 Touch the NEG button. Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight NEG
button. Push OK SEL.

4 Touch the NEG BAKEOUT button. Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight

IPN 074-472-P1C

NEG BAKEOUT. Push OK SEL.

16 - 18

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.6.2 Reactivating the NEG Pump
Reactivating the NEG Pump requires having the Service Module attached to the
HAPSITE for at least 22 hours. The procedure is basically the same as activatinga new NEG Pump. Refer to section 2.8, Service Module, on page 2-19 for more
information on setting up the Service Module.
16.6.2.1 Reactivation Using the Laptop

1 Click on the Service Module tab of the Properties menu.
2 Click on the Service button. See Figure 16-16.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-16 Service Button on the Service Module Tab

3 Use the Activate NEG settings below as a guideline. However, change the
HAPSITE Pumpdown Time which should be set to 180. See Figure 16-17.

16 - 19

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 16-17 Service Window

4 Click the Activate NEG button.
5 At the end of the reactivation, the program will detach the HAPSITE from theService Module as part of the process.
16.6.2.2 Reactivation Using the Front Panel

1 Touch or using the arrow keys, highlight the HAPSITE icon. Push OK SEL.
2 Touch the HEATERS icon.
3 Touch the NEG button. Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight NEG
Touch the ACTIVATE NEG button. Alternately, using the arrow keys, highlight
ACTIVATE NEG. Push OK SEL.

16 - 20

IPN 074-472-P1C

button. Push OK SEL.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.7 NEG Pump Removal, Installation and Activation
During boot-up, the HAPSITE will check system components for needed routine
maintenance and will notify the analyst if the NEG Pump has reached the end of
typical usable life. The notification will be shown on the front display of the
HAPSITE after completing the boot-up routine. Replacement of the NEG should beconsidered at that time.
NEG Pump removal, installation and activation should be performed in thefollowing order:Part 1: NEG Pump Removal, section 16.7.2 on page 16-23

Part 2: Service Module Vacuum Interconnect (VI) Valve Cleaning, section
16.7.3 on page 16-26

Part 3: Install the New NEG Pump, section 16.7.4 on page 16-29

Part 4: Leak Check of the Vacuum System, section 16.7.5 on page 16-34

Part 5: Activation of the NEG Pump, section 16.7.6 on page 16-40

NOTE: Read all instructions before starting the procedure making special note of
all cautions and warnings.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NOTE: Contact INFICON prior to performing the following procedures.

16 - 21

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.7.1 Required Tools and Equipment
Service Module (not pictured)

Laptop computer (not pictured)

New NEG Pump1/4” Allen wrenchTorque wrench set for 70 inch/pounds

Gloves (cotton or latex)

Lint free wipes

Methanol

MicroDuster® III (containing 1,1,1,2 tetrafluoroethane)

CAUTION
Refer to the MSDS for Personal Protection Equipment(PPE) guidelines, wipe all tools with methanol before
starting this procedure.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-18 Required Tools and Equipment

16 - 22

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.7.2 Part 1: NEG Pump Removal
1 This procedure requires the use of a Service Module. The HAPSITE should bephysically placed on the Service Module and attached. Refer to section 2.8,
Service Module, on page 2-19 and Chapter 15, Service Module for more
information on setting up and using the Service Module.

2 If the NEG Pump is hot from recent use, let the system cool overnight before

performing this procedure. The NEG Pump should cool to below 80 oC before
proceeding.

WARNING
Burn hazard. Do not bypass the cool down step! The NEG
Pump will react with air when it is hot. This will cause it
to become very hot and possibly create sparks.

3 Vent the HAPSITE by choosing Vent HAPSITE on the Service window of theService Module tab in the Properties window (see Figure 16-19). This starts
an automatic process which includes monitoring the cooling of the NEG Pump.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-19 Vent HAPSITE in Service Window from Service Button on Service Module Tab

16 - 23

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

WARNING
The NEG Pump becomes very hot when in operation. The
software-controlled sequence provides a cool- down
period to remove the pump provides a cool-down period
before removing. This sequencing must not be
bypassed. In addition to the danger of burns fromhandling the hot flange, the reactive metal alloys within
the pump can ignite if exposed to atmospheric pressure
while hot. If this should occur, drop the pump into abucket of sand and cover the hot NEG Pump withadditional sand. If this step is not practical, set the pumpon its black plastic base on a non-flammable surface. The
NEG Pump will burn out in a few minutes.

4 When the screen shows Vent Manifold Has Been Completed, unplug the
NEG Pump’s black cable from the inside of the front panel by loosening thelocking ring. Then pull the connector straight back.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Burn Hazard. DO NOT disconnect the NEG Pump’s black
cable before receiving the "Vent Manifold Has Been
Completed" message. Disconnecting the black cable will
also disconnect the temperature sensor. Due to thedisconnection, the temperature sensor may read that the
NEG is cold, when in fact, the NEG is still hot.

16 - 24

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 To loosen the chain clamp, turn the nut counter-clockwise until loose.
See Figure 16-20
Figure 16-20 Loosening Chain Clamp

6 Remove chain clamp.
7 Pull the NEG Pump out.
NOTE: The aluminum gasket can not be reused. Bend the old gasket to avoid
possible reuse. Place the "USED" sticker, found in the new NEG Pump
Ship Kit, on the old NEG Pump. Follow the instructions provided with
the new NEG Pump to return the used NEG Pump.

8 Continue on to section 16.7.3, Part 2: Service Module Vacuum Interconnect

IPN 074-472-P1C(VI) Valve Cleaning, on page 16-26.

16 - 25

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.7.3 Part 2: Service Module Vacuum Interconnect (VI) Valve Cleaning
WARNING
Gloves must be worn while performing all of thefollowing steps. Wear safety glasses and appropriate
PPE according to the MSDS when handling chemicals.

1 Remove the HAPSITE from the Service Module (see section 15.9, Physically
Removing the HAPSITE from the Service Module, on page 15-19).

2 On the underside of the Analytical Module remove the VI valve using the 1/4”
Allen wrench. See Figure 16-21.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-21 Removing the VI Valve16 - 26

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Wearing safety glasses and gloves, clean the o-ring on the VI valve withmethanol. See Figure 16-22.
Figure 16-22 Cleaning VI Valve O-ring

4 Clean the bottom of the manifold, where the VI valve was removed, withmethanol. See Figure 16-23.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-23 Cleaning Bottom of Manifold

16 - 27

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 Replace the VI valve into the bottom of the manifold. Hand tighten.
See Figure 16-24.
Figure 16-24 Replacing the VI Valve

6 Clean the o-ring on the Service Module with Methanol on a lint free wipe. See
Figure 16-25.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-25 Cleaning O-ring on the Service Module

16 - 28

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Place the HAPSITE on the Service Module and lock down with the black sidelatches. Refer to section 2.8.2, Placing the HAPSITE on the Service Module,on page 2-24 for additional instructions, if needed.

8 Continue on to section 16.7.4, Part 3: Install the New NEG Pump, on page
16-29.

16.7.4 Part 3: Install the New NEG Pump
WARNING
Gloves must be worn while performing all of thefollowing steps. Wear safety glasses and appropriate
PPE according to the MSDS when handling chemicals.

1 Wearing safety glasses and gloves, clean the manifold flange with methanol ona lint free wipe. See Figure 16-26.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-26 Cleaning Manifold Flange

16 - 29

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

2 Remove the new NEG Pump and aluminum gasket from the shipping
container. See Figure 16-27.
Figure 16-27 New NEG Pump and Aluminum Gasket

3 Clean the aluminum gasket with methanol on a lint free wipe. Be careful tohandle the aluminum gasket by the outer band and keep the knife-edges on
the inner ring from getting nicked. See Figure 16-28.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-28 Cleaning Aluminum Gasket

16 - 30

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Remove the new NEG Pump from the protective container. See Figure
16-29.

CAUTION
The NEG Pump is stored under a vacuum. The shelf life
is 5 years. If the vacuum is compromised, shelf life isreduced to 1 year.

5 Remove the o-ring and seating ring assembly from the new NEG Pump. See
Figure 16-29.
Figure 16-29 New NEG Pump

O-ring and Seating
Assembly

6 On the new NEG Pump, wipe inside the flange with methanol on a lint free
IPN 074-472-P1C

wipe. See Figure 16-30.
Figure 16-30 Cleaning Flange with Methanol

16 - 31

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

7 Save the rubber “O” ring assembly and container to dispose of the old NEG
Pump.

8 Place the new aluminum gasket on the new NEG Pump. See Figure 16-31.
NOTE: Inspect the manifold face, ionizer and manifold inside for nicks,
residue, and scratches.
NOTE: Write down the Serial Number of the new NEG Pump.
Figure 16-31 Aluminum Gasket on NEG Pump

9 Insert the new NEG Pump and aluminum gasket into the manifold. See
Figure 16-32.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-32 Installing New NEG Pump

16 - 32

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 Replace the chain clamp insuring that the nut points to the left. Use thetorque wrench and tighten to 70 inch /pounds or 8 Nm. See Figure 16-33.
Figure 16-33 Torquing Chain Clamp

CAUTION
Do not connect the black plug from the new NEG Pump
to the black socket at this time. This will avoid any
accidental heating of the NEG Pump.

11 Place the old NEG Pump into the protective container with the o-ring
assembly and place back in the box. See Figure 16-34.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-34 Old NEG Pump

16 - 33

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

12 Perform the Attach function by selecting the Attach button on the Service
Module tab of the Properties section. Refer to section 15.7, Attaching the
HAPSITE to the Service Module, on page 15-12.

13 Continue on to section 16.7.5, Part 4: Leak Check of the Vacuum System, on
page 16-34.

16.7.5 Part 4: Leak Check of the Vacuum System
CAUTION
Checking for leaks is very important. Air leaks will
shorten NEG Pump life.
NOTE: In this step, an aerosol can of MicroDuster® will be used to locate anyleaks. Any aerosol type "canned air" or dust cleaner will work as longas the canned air has the following component:
1,1,1,2-tetrafloroethane. Please check the label for contents. If using aduster with compounds other than 1,1,1,2- tetra fluoroethane, the range
and target masses will have to be adjusted to the major ions producedin the MS.

1 After the HAPSITE has pumped down for at least two hours, double-click on the
Plus IQ icon. See Figure 16-35.

2 Click on the Tune Icon. See Figure 16-36.
NOTE: In order to open Manual Tune, the user must have the current Access
Level set to Advanced. See Changing Access Levels, section 8.9.1 on
page 8-24.
Figure 16-36 Manual Tune Icon

16 - 34

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-35 Plus IQ Icon

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

3 Select default.tun file. See Figure 16-37.
Figure 16-37 Select "default.tun" File

4 Wait for the automated process of opening tune to complete.
5 Click on View/Sensor Status Grid. See Figure 16-38.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-38 Opening Sensor Status Grid

16 - 35

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

6 Turn off the IS Supply and Tune Feed valves by clicking on the button undereach valve. The buttons are green when the valves are open and black whenclosed. See Figure 16-39.
Figure 16-39 Sensor Status Grid

7 Close the Tune Status Panel and the Mass Calibration Status by deselecting
each. See Figure 16-40.

8 Click on the Full Scan icon in the Tune window. See Figure 16-41.
Figure 16-41 Full Scan Icon

16 - 36

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-40 Closing Tune Status Panel and Mass Calibration Status

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

9 Click the Right Mouse Button on the X-axis to access the Full Scan Range.
See Figure 16-42.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-42 Setting Full Scan Range

16 - 37

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

10 Select Custom. Type 60 in the Start Field and 90 in the End Field. This will
enable the analyst to scan for both the 69 and 83 masses. (These are thepredominant masses in a can of MicroDuster that contains
1,1,1,2-tetrafluorefloroethane, the compound being used to check for leaks.)
See Figure 16-43.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-43 Checking For Leaks

16 - 38

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

11 Spray the MicroDuster around the orifices listed below that could be the sourceof a possible leak, while checking the scan on the laptop in the tune program.
If there is a leak, the response for the 69 and 83 masses will increase. See
Figure 16-44.
The critical areas to be checked are:

The seam between the NEG Pump and the manifold.

The seam between the Service Module and Analytical Module on the
manifold side.

Figure 16-44 Spraying MicroDuster

IPN 074-472-P1C

12 After the manifold has been leak tested and no leaks found, plug the black
cable on the front of the NEG Pump into the black socket located above the
NEG Pump.

13 In the Tune window, turn the IS Supply and Tune Feed on by clicking on the
buttons which should change from the color black to the color green. See
Figure 16-39.

14 At this point, a tune check should be performed on the system. Click on the
Short Tune icon. See Figure 16-45. Refer to section 7.2, AutoTune, on page
7-2.
Figure 16-45 Short Tune Icon

15 Continue on to section 16.7.6, Part 5: Activation of the NEG Pump, on page
16-40.

16 - 39

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.7.6 Part 5: Activation of the NEG Pump
1 Click on the Service Module tab of the Properties menu.
2 Click on the Service button. See Figure 16-46.
Figure 16-46 Service Button on the Service Module Tab

3 Use the Activate NEG settings below as a guideline.

Figure 16-47 Service Window

16 - 40

IPN 074-472-P1C

 HAPSITE Pump Down Time (min) = 60
 NEG Activation Power (Watts) = 30
 Activation Time (min) = 480
 Activation Cool Down Temp (C) = 400
 Activation Cool Down Time (min) = 720
See Figure 16-47.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Select Activate NEG.
5 When prompted on the front panel, enter the Serial Number of the new NEG
Pump.

6 The NEG Pump will take approximately 18 hours to activate. The process iscompletely automated and does not require any user interaction until theprocess is complete.

7 Once the NEG Pump is activated, remove the HAPSITE from the Service
Module. (Power the HAPSITE with battery or an external power supply.)
Refer to the section 15.8, Detaching the HAPSITE, on page 15-17 for
instructions on safely removing the HAPSITE from the Service Module.

8 Repeat the leak check portion of the process. Instead of checking for a leakbetween the Analytical Module and Service Module, check the VI valve on
the bottom of the HAPSITE. This is where the Service Module physicallyattaches. (Refer to section 16.7.5 on page 16-34.)

9 If there is a leak, the leak must be sealed by repeating section 16.7.2 throughsection 16.7.4. Repeat the leak check portion in section 16.7.5 and the NEG
Pump reactivation in section 16.7.6.

16.8 Replacing the Ionizer of the Mass Spectrometer

IPN 074-472-P1C

The Ionizer is located in the mass spectrometer vacuum manifold behind the NEG
Pump, (or a blank off plate if a NEG Pump is not installed). The NEG pump must
be removed in this procedure. If a NEG Pump is installed, it can be reinstalled andre-activated. Some of the NEG Pump lifetime will be lost during this process. If a
NEG Pump has greater than 50 hours (approximately 1/2 the expected life) the
more economical choice may be to replace the pump, based on the reduced
lifetime after exposure to atmospheric pressure.

16.8.1 Required Tools and Equipment
Flat head screw driver

Ionizer removal tool

13 mm open end wrench

13 mm torque wrench.



Methanol

Lint free cloth

Powder free gloves

Replacement aluminum seal ring (if NEG Pump is to be installed)

16 - 41

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTION
If the NEG Pump is to be reinstalled, it must be removed
when it is at room temperature. If the NEG Pump has beenused within 8 hours, let it cool overnight prior to removal.

1 This procedure requires the use of a Service Module. The HAPSITE should bephysically placed on the Service Module and attached. Refer to section 2.8,
Service Module, on page 2-19 and Chapter 15, Service Module for more
information on setting up and using the Service Module.

2 If the NEG Pump is hot from recent use, let the system cool overnight before
performing this procedure. Refer to section 16.7.2, Part 1: NEG Pump
Removal, on page 16-23.

WARNING
Burn hazard. Do not bypass the cool down step! The NEG
Pump will react with air when it is hot. This will cause it
to become very hot and possibly create sparks.

3 Vent the HAPSITE by choosing Vent HAPSITE on the Service window of theService Module tab in the Properties window. This starts a process which
includes monitoring the cooling of the NEG Pump. See Figure 16-48.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-48 Vent HAPSITE from Plus IQ Software

16 - 42

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTION
The NEG pump becomes very hot when in operation. The
software-controlled sequence provides a cool down
period before removing the pump provides a cool down
period time to cool. This sequence must not be
bypassed. In addition to the danger of burns fromhandling the hot flange, the reactive metal alloys within
the pump can ignite if exposed to atmospheric pressure
while hot. If this should occur, drop the pump into abucket of sand and cover the hot NEG pump withadditional sand. If this step is not practical, set the pumpon the black plastic base on a non-flammable surface.
The NEG pump will burn out in a few minutes.

4 When the screen shows Vent Manifold Has Been Completed, unplug the
NEG Pump’s black cable from the front panel by loosening the locking ring,then pull the connector straight back.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

Burn Hazard. DO NOT disconnect the NEG Pump’s black
cable before receiving the "Vent Manifold Has Been
Completed" message. Disconnecting the black cable will
also disconnect the temperature sensor. Due to thedisconnection, the temperature sensor may read that the
NEG is cold, when in fact, the NEG is still hot.

16 - 43

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

5 To loosen the chain clamp, turn the nut counter-clockwise until loose.
See Figure 16-20.
Figure 16-49 Loosening Chain Clamp

6 Remove chain clamp.
7 Pull the NEG Pump out and place on a lint free cloth.
8 Immediately bend and discard the old aluminum seal ring.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch any part of the pump with bare hands.

9 Look inside the manifold to see the Ionizer, and a 3/16" diameter stainless steel
tube entering the manifold from the left and connecting to the small cylindricalion volume at the center of the Ionizer. See Figure 16-50. This tube transfers
the sample from the membrane isolation valve into the ion volume, and must
be detached and slid into the ion volume before the Ionizer can be removed.
IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-50 Ionizer

16 - 44

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

CAUTION
Make sure all tools are clean by wiping them withmethanol on a lint free cloth. Wear powder free gloves forthe rest of this procedure. Wear appropriate PPE
according to the MSDS guidelines.

10 Insert the forked end of the Ionizer removal tool (see Figure 16-51) behind thecollar on the stainless steel tube about 1/4" from the left side manifold wall.

11 Insure the stainless steel pin on the Ionizer removal tool is facing toward the left
manifold wall.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-51 Ion Source Removal Tool

12 Apply pressure, using the stainless steel pin as a leverage point. Slide theextension tube from the membrane isolation valve into the ion volume. The
extension tube should disengage completely from the membrane isolation
valve.
NOTE: If the extension tube does not slide easily into the ion column, loosen
the Ionizer. Then use the Ionizer removal tool to reposition the Ionizer,
which will enable the extension tube to slide into the ion volume asdisplayed in Figure 16-52.

16 - 45

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 16-52 Extension Tube Slid into the Ion Volume

13 Use the flat head screw driver to loosen the three screws which secure the
Ionizer to the quadrupole within the manifold. The screws are captive and will
not fall out.

14 Thread the Ionizer removal tool onto the stud in the center of the Ionizer. See
Figure 16-53.

15 Use a slight rocking motion pulling straight back and remove the Ionizer fromthe manifold.

16 Remove the extension tube from the old Ionizer and carefully insert into the ionvolume of the new Ionizer.

17 Thread the Ionizer removal tool onto the stud in the center of the new Ionizer,
and insert the Ionizer into the manifold. Position the Ionizer so the ceramic
filament holding block is at the bottom. When the assembler feels the fiveconnector pins registering with their respective sockets, press the Ionizer firmly
into place, and unscrew the tool.

16 - 46

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 16-53 Ionizer Removal Tool

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

18 Tighten the three securing screws with the screw driver. Tighten themalternately and gently to ensure that the Ionizer is installed straight.
NOTE: As you install and tighten the Ionizer, make sure the extension tube
remains positioned in the ion volume and is lined up with themembrane isolation valve.

19 With the forked end of the Ionizer removal tool, grab the extension tube andslide it into the membrane isolation valve so that it is not protruding into the ionvolume.

20 Install a new NEG Pump or reinstall the old NEG Pump with a new aluminumsealing ring. Perform the activation process or put the blank off flange witho-ring on the manifold.
NOTE: See section 16.7.4, Part 3: Install the New NEG Pump, on page 16-29
through section 16.7.6, Part 5: Activation of the NEG Pump, on page
16-40 for detailed information regarding NEG Pump installation.

16.9 Replacing the Headspace Sampling System Needle
Replacement of the needle in the needle assembly should be performed on an asneeded basis. The needle will need to be replaced if it is significantly deformed, if
it is broken, if the point becomes blunted, or if the holes become plugged withdebris.
Tools Required

A No. 2 Phillips screwdriver.



1/4" open end wrench or equivalent.

IPN 074-472-P1C

WARNINGThe needle tips are sharp. Be careful to avoid injury.

WARNINGBe careful to avoid burns if the surfaces are still hot.
Procedure

1 Open the top yellow cover of the HSS to expose the needle assembly.
2 Using the Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws on top of theassembly.

3 Remove the top cover of the needle assembly to expose the needle and the
1/4" connection fittings.

16 - 47

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

4 Using the 1/4" wrench, loosen both 1/4" connection fittings. Note the position of
the N and S labels, which refer to Nitrogen and Sample. See Figure 16-54.

CAUTION
Nitrogen and Sample orientation is very important toavoid pulling the sample into the HAPSITE.
Figure 16-54 Removing the Nuts

5 Once both the connection fittings have been completely loosened, pull straight
up on the needle while holding the assembly in place. Set the used needle
aside, as well as the nut and ferrules at the end of the needle.

6 Place the nut and ferrules on both parts of the needle where they will be
Figure 16-55 Needle Assembly with Nuts and Ferrules

7 Place the replacement needle back through the opening from which the usedneedle has just been removed.

8 Guide the two connections to the appropriate openings. While firmly holding
down the needle to properly seat the ferrules, snugly tighten both connection
fittings using a 1/4" wrench. See Figure 16-56.

16 - 48

IPN 074-472-P1C

re-inserted into the assembly. See Figure 16-55.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual
Figure 16-56 Holding Down the Needle while Tightening the Nuts (So Ferrules Seat Properly)

9 Now that the needle is securely in place, replace the cover and two screws.
Tighten both screws using the Phillips screwdriver.

10 The HSS is now equipped with a new needle and is ready to operate.

16.10 Battery Charger Maintenance and Troubleshooting
WARNING - Risk Of Electric Shock
Do not attempt to open the case of the Battery Charger.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside.

IPN 074-472-P1C

16.10.1 Cleaning The Battery Charger
WARNING - Risk Of Electric Shock
Disconnect the power cord and remove any batteries
from the Battery Charger before proceeding.
Clean the surfaces with a damp cloth or sponge and (if desired) a mild householdcleaner. Do not use excess water or allow water into the receptacles.
Be sure the cooling slots at the back are clean, as well as the holes in the aluminumbase-plate. Be sure the Battery Charger is dry before applying power.

16 - 49

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

16.10.2 Troubleshooting The Battery Charger
16.10.2.1 If No Indicators are IlluminatedThis indicates that AC power is not reaching the power supply within the Battery
Charger.


Check the AC outlet to be sure it is "live" by connecting some other device, suchas a lamp.



Unplug the power cord from the outlet and examine the power cord for wear or
breakage.

Disconnect the power cord from the back-panel connector and replace thefuse. The correct fuse is part number 062-0063, rated for 1.25 A, 250 V (timedelay). The slider which holds the fuse can be pried open with a small
screwdriver once the power cord has been withdrawn.

NOTE: If the battery charger’s connector protrudes from the back panel andrequires pressing a clip to open the drawer, the battery charger will containtwo fuses. Perhaps only one will be blown.
If the problem persists, contact INFICON Customer Support. See Chapter 18,
Customer Support.
16.10.2.2 If the Red Indicator is FlashingThis indicates that the Battery Charger is unable to communicate with the battery(through the center pin).

If the problem is solved, proceed to charge the battery, but suspect a problem withthe receptacle. Inspect the receptacle, especially examining the center pin for any
insulating material or for signs of looseness. If nothing seems wrong, contact
INFICON Customer Support. See Chapter 18, Customer Support.
16.10.2.3 If a Battery Does Not Accept a Charge
If a battery’s charge status does not change during the charging cycle and therespective indicator has been green, the battery may be at the end of life.
To be certain that the problem is not with the Battery Charger receptacle, try to
charge the battery in an alternate receptacle. If the problem persists, replace thebattery. If the battery should not be near the end of life, contact INFICON to discuss
other possible steps. See Chapter 18, Customer Support.

16 - 50

IPN 074-472-P1C

First, try the battery in a different receptacle. If the problem persists, contact
INFICON Customer Support. See Chapter 18, Customer Support.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 17
Glossary
17.1 Glossary
Air peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A response by the mass spectrometer tocomponents of air. The compounds in thispeak are un-retained, or uninhibited by thestandard 30 meter 1.0 m film thickness
boiling point column. This set of compounds
typically elutes 1 to 1.5 minutes from the startof analysis.
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A part of the tuning process which assuresthat the mass peaks fall at their calibrated
position on the mass scale.
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Module, also called the HAPSITE
and HAPSITE Smart Plus.
AMDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Mass Spectral Deconvolution
and Identification System Software
AMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Atomic Mass Unit) The dimension in which a
number of protons and neutrons are stated.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Analyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . That portion of a sample which comprises
compounds to be analyzed; that is,separated, identified and measured.
Atomic Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The AMU representation of the number ofprotons and neutrons in a specified atom.
AutoTune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A process that occurs when the instrument isinitially started up; it automatically performs
mass alignment, resolution adjustment andadjustment of relative intensity of the peaks.
AutoTune will take place once the heatedzones have reached the proper temperature.
Baseline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A measure of the intensity of the backgroundnoise of the mass spectrometer. This isdetermined using the Noise Check feature in
the Tune program.
Calibration Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The mean value of the measured noise level.

17 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Carrier Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The pure inorganic gas used to aid the flowof sample gas through the chromatograph foranalysis. In the HAPSITE VOC-free Nitrogenis normally used.
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The active element of the Gas
Chromatograph. The column is a long glass
capillary which is lined with a material (called
the “stationary phase”) with which theanalytes interact based on their physicalcharacteristics, slowing their flow. The
degree of this interaction, which is acharacteristic of each compound and thechemistry of the stationary phase,
progressively separates the different
compounds from one another during elution.
Computed Integration Time. . . . . . This is the amount of time (in milliseconds)
during which the signal from each of themasses in the specified mass range will begathered by the mass spectrometer. The
computation of this time incorporates the
Scan Time (sec) and the mass range.

DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital to Analog Converter. An element of
the electronic circuitry which converts the
microprocessor’s digital instructions to theanalog requirements for control of the
instrument.
DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Declaration of Contamination document thatdeclared what type of chemicals that the
instrument has been exposed to.
Electron Multiplier (EM) . . . . . . . . . The ion detector of the mass spectrometer.
Arrival of an ion causes emission of a burst ofelectrons, each of which cause more
electrons to be emitted, providing a burst of
current in response to each ion.

17 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A measure of the amount of a compound in agiven volume or weight. This is represented
as a ratio, either in mass/mass,
mass/volume, or volume/volume terms. For
example: 10 ppm/v refers to a mix in which
the specified compound is present as 1 X
10-5 parts of the whole, in volume terms.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Elution time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The time from injection of a specificcompound onto the GC until the compoundappears at the exit (same as RetentionTime).
Equilibrium Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The time allowed for a solid or liquid to heatand equilibrate volatile compounds between
the sample and associated headspace withina sample vial.
ET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed time of sample run. Used for MS
scanning.
Extra Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . These determine the number of times themass spectrometer will scan a mass in SIM
analysis before scanning the next mass.
Extra measurements effectively increase theresponse to a mass but also increases thescan time.
Filament. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A hot wire in the ionizer from which electrons
are emitted.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Filament Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This specifies the amount of time between
the start of analysis and the time which the
HAPSITE turns on the filament. Filamentdelay is a filament preserving measure whichallows components of the air peak orsolvents to pass through the mass
spectrometer before the filament is turnedon.
Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A description of how well a reference
spectrum matches an acquired spectrum inlocation and intensity of peaks.
Flow Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This setting controls the flow rate of Nitrogenthrough the Headspace Sampling System
during the Sample and Purge states.
Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Headspace Sampling System function
which is used to clean out the HSS byheating the sample block and transfer line to
80 degrees Celsius while pushing clean
nitrogen through the system (but not into the
HAPSITE). Flush is initiated bydisconnecting the transfer line from the
HAPSITE and pressing the flush switch
inside the front door of the HSS.

17 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Full Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full method allows the user to specify arange of masses to scan during analysis.
This is used when analyzing for several
compounds (typical analysis) or for analysis
of unknowns for tentative identification.
GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Chromatograph.
Global Search Parameters . . . . . . This specifies the various parameters which
will be used to identify compounds whichhave been included in the Library. These
parameters are used unless a separate set ofparameters is specified in the compound
entry of the Library and set at a higher
precedence level.
GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface.
Hand Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . The inlet probe of the HAPSITE which
comprises a heated line and a hand piecewith a display and four control keys.
HAPSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Module acronym that stands for
Hazardous Air Pollutants on Site.
Headspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The gaseous volume above a solid or liquidsample in a closed vial, from which agaseous sample is taken for analysis.

HSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headspace Sampling System. This includes
components which, when used inconjunction with the HAPSITE, allows theuser to quantify and qualify volatilecompounds in liquid and solid matrices.
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The act of sending target temperature andpressure settings to the HAPSITE or
HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System,
then allowing the instruments to achievethese settings.
Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The application of a discrete amount of gas
and/or vapor at the entrance of the gas
chromatograph column.

17 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

Heated Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The inlet line to the HAPSITE, comprising a
PEEK tube with a heating jacket,
temperature sensors and protective sheath.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Inlet State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This refers to a specification of the state of
the valves in either the HAPSITE or
HAPSITE with Headspace Sampling
System. The states of the valves control
sampling, analysis, clean-out of the
HAPSITE and Headspace Sampling System.
It can also be user specified.
Internal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A mix of known concentrations of known
compounds which are installed in the
HAPSITE. They are mixed with calibration
compounds during calibration and withsamples during analysis to validate theresponse of the HAPSITE to the target
analytes.
Ion Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . These settings in the Tune program directly
affect the intensity of mass peaks. Ion
energies are commonly used to set therelative mass intensities of the tuning ions.
Ion Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The specific space in the ionizer within which
ionization of the sample takes place.
Ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An atom or molecule which carries an electriccharge due to depletion or addition of one ormore electrons.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Ionizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The assembly of parts in the mass
spectrometer into which the sample flows
and which projects a beam of mixed ions into
the mass filter.
I.S. Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This section of the Compound Libraryidentifies the target ion of the internal
standard which will be used for quantificationof the chosen compound.
kPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilo Pascal. Unit of pressure measurement
which is equivalent to approximately 0.145
PSI.
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Crystal Display. This refers to thedisplay screen on the front panel of the
HAPSITE.
Lead In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The time which is allowed for the mass
spectrometer to stabilize before detecting a
mass during SIM analysis.

17 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A user compiled list of compounds, which
includes both analytes and internal
standards (if chosen). The Library keeps
information such as the name, target ion,concentration, retention time, relative massintensities, and compound specific searchparameters (if selected).
LL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Limit.
LMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Mouse Button.
Mass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A function of the HAPSITE which uses
Internal Standard gas to check the alignmentof masses, and also to check the relative
intensities of the tune masses.
Mass Fragment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A molecule (or ion) resulting from thebreak-up of a parent molecule.
Mass Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The effect on a mass spectrum of thedifference between the atomic weight of acompound or fragment and a whole number.
Mass spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A display of the amount of each massfragment present at the specific time, plotted
as amplitude vs. molecular weight.
MDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molecular Dispersion Pump.

Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A set of instructions for a function of the
HAPSITE.
Molecular Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The AMU representation of the total numberof protons and neutrons in a specified
molecule.
MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Spectrometer
ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . milliseconds
MSDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Safety Data Sheet
Multiplier Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The voltage applied to the multiplier in themass spectrometer, which directly effects theamplitude of signal and background noise.
NEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-evaporative getter as a vacuum source

17 - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

Membrane Isolation Valve . . . . . . . The valve which supports the Mass
Spectrometer’s inlet membrane and (whenclosed) interrupts the flow of analyte from themembrane into the Mass Spectrometer.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

NIST Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIST stands for National Institute ofStandards and Technology Mass Spectral
Library. This is a library of spectra ofcompounds which can be searched totentatively identify unknown compounds.
Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An option in the Tune program and on the
HAPSITE LCD which checks the system forbackground noise. The results of the noise
check are used to discriminate against
baseline noise during analysis.
Pascal (pa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit of pressure, equal to 1 dyne per cm2.
Equivalent to 7.5 x 10-3 Torr and1.45 x 10-4 PSI.
PEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyetheretherketone. A contamination
resistant material used for a number offittings in the HAPSITE and Headspace
Sampling System.
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The coating on the inside of the gas
chromatograph column by which organic
vapors are retained.
PPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts per billion concentration level.
PPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal Protective Equipment.
PPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts per million concentration level.

IPN 074-472-P1C

PPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts per trillion concentration level.
Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Headspace Sampling System state which
is used to remove moisture and sample fromthe system by pushing clean nitrogenthrough the Headspace Sampling System
and HAPSITE. This function is specified in
the Inlet Method in the Acquire program.
Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A description of how well an acquired
spectrum matches a reference spectrum inlocation and intensity of peaks.

17 - 7

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Recalculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An option in the Calibration section of the
Run Method screen which allows the user tocompare an analysis to the calibration curve
without changing peak integrations. Thisshould be used when the user would like tore-calibrate using the existing parameters.
The alternate choice is Search, which does
peak integration automatically based on
selected calibration curves.
Remote Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supplied to the HAPSITE and HSS
either from the Service Module (for the
HAPSITE) or external AC - 24 V(dc)converter.
Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . These settings in the Tune program affect theway the mass spectrometer resolves peaks.
Increasing the resolution narrows the peaksin that mass range, while lowering theresolution will broaden the peaks.
Retention Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The time from injection of a specificcompound onto the GC until the compoundappears at the exit (same as elution time).
Reverse Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A function of the NIST search (tentative
unknown identification) library which allows
compounds which are specified in the user
Library to be identified as part of the search.

RIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Reconstructed Ion Chromatogram) A
presentation of the chromatographic record
which extracts from the TIC and displays theintensity of the ion or ions specified.
Round Trip Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The amount of time required to complete ascan of all the masses specified in a SIM
method. This includes the number ofmasses, integration time, number of extra
measurements, lead in time, and peak width.
RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Limit.
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return material authorization document.
Returning material can not be sent backwithout this document.
RMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Mouse Button.

17 - 8IPN 074-472-P1C

RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative humidity.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual% RSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percent Relative Standard Deviation. This isa measure of the linearity (using
mathematical regression analysis) of theconcentration levels in the calibration curvefor each compound.
Sample Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The portion of the gas chromatographthrough which the inlet flow is directed andfrom which the injection is made.
Sample Vial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this situation, sample vial refers to a 40 mL
glass vial with a plastic cap and PTFE/silicon
septum.
Sample Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A section of the Headspace Sampling
System which allows insertion of a 40 mL
sample vial, and is used to heat the sample
during equilibrium.
Scan Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This method specifies the masses to bescanned by the MS, length of the run,filament delay, and scan and integration
times.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Full Scan analysis, this refers to the
cumulative time required to make a scan of
all the masses in the range specified. The
calculation of Scan Time includes theintegration time and the points/AMU.
Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber or silicone part of a sample vial. It
allows for piercing with a needle to inject
standards while retaining an ‘air tight’ seal toretain volatile compounds.
SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Ion Monitoring. Mass analysis of
one or several ion peaks without scanningthe entire spectrum.
SIM Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Ion Mode Method. This allows theuser to set up specific masses to be detectedduring an analysis. This is used for better
response to specific masses for known
compounds.

17 - 9

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

SituProbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The SituProbe Purge and Trap System is asampling accessory for the HAPSITE. It is
used for in-situ testing of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) in water. Used in
combination with the HAPSITE, the
SituProbe accessory performs water
analyses for qualitative and quantitative
results in the field. The SituProbe can be
configured for both unattended andcontinuous sampling as well as
user-initiated, manual sampling.
SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Module

Spectrum Grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This action is performed in the Run Method
program to store information about acompound, including name, retention time,and relative mass intensities for the 10
largest mass peaks. This information, when
grabbed, is stored in a grabfile.
Target Ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The specific ion mass which will be used forquantification or primary identification of acompound in the Library (also referred to as
Compound Library).

Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A measure of the amplitude of the
background noise of the mass spectrometer.
This is determined using the Noise Check
feature in the Tune program.
TIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Ion Chromatogram. A presentation of
the flow from the GC as measured by themass spectrometer, adding up the signals
from all the masses programmed andpresented as a function of time.
TMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbo Molecular Pump
Torr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit of sub-atmospheric pressure.
Equivalent to 133.3 pa.

17 - 10

IPN 074-472-P1C

Temperature Programmable . . . . . Software controlled temperature
programming that allows the user to reachtemperatures from ambient to 225 °C in acontrolled ramp.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A term (noun or verb) which generally refers
to mass spectrometer settings used to
distinguish and detect mass fragments.
Vacuum Interconnect Valve . . . . . . The two-part valve which seals the HAPSITE
manifold, when closed, and opens it to thevacuum pumps in the Service Module, when
open. The Vacuum Interconnect Valve is
powered by a motor within the Service
Module, under direction of the HAPSITE.
VSO Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Sensitive Orifice valve. This valve
uses voltage applied to the valve to control
the size of its orifice. This in turn controls theflow rate of gas through the Headspace
Sampling System and HAPSITE, whenconnected.

IPN 074-472-P1C

Y-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A cable which connects to the power supply
and enables powering of both the HAPSITE
and Headspace Sampling Systemsimultaneously from one converter.

17 - 11

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

17 - 12HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 18
Customer Support
18.1 How To Contact Customer Support
Worldwide support information regarding:Technical Support, to contact an applications engineer with questions
regarding INFICON products and applications, orSales and Customer Service, to contact the INFICON Sales office nearest you,or

Repair Service, to contact the INFICON Service Center nearest you,is available at www.inficon.com.
If you are experiencing a problem with your instrument, please have the following
information readily available:the serial number for your instrument,a description of your problem,an explanation of any corrective action that you may have already attempted,

and the exact wording of any error messages that you may have received.

To contact Customer Support, see Support at www.inficon.com.

IPN 074-472-P1C

18.2 Returning Your Instrument to INFICON
Do not return any component of your instrument to INFICON without first speaking
with a Customer Support Representative. You must obtain a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number from the Customer Support Representative.
If you deliver a package to INFICON without an RMA number, your package will beheld and you will be contacted. This will result in delays in servicing yourinstrument.
Prior to being given an RMA number, you will be required to complete a Declaration
Of Contamination (DOC) form. DOC forms must be approved by INFICON before
an RMA number is issued. INFICON may require that the instrument be sent to a
designated decontamination facility, not to the factory.

18 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

18 - 2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Chapter 19
Part Numbers
19.1 HAPSITE Smart Plus System Configuration

IPN 074-472-P1C

Figure 19-1 HAPSITE Smart Plus System Configuration

19 - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

19.2 HAPSITE Smart Plus Accessories
Service Module930-202-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100/120/230 V(ac)930-202-G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 V(dc)931-205-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headspace Sampling System932-220-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE SituProbe Sampling System

19.3 HAPSITE Smart Plus Spare Parts
059-329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Disconnect Stem for N2
068-002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charger / Service Module Power
Cord, U.S.
074-5010-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE Smart Plus Manuals CD
Cables600-1319-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Communication Cable (Crossed) Yellow Cable (12 ft)
930-246-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot Swap Cable (Battery Test Bracket)
Kits
930-021-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasket Kit
930-0221-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentrator Tube Nut and Ferrule Kit,
10 each930-0231-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Nut and Ferrule Kit, 5 each930-2020-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decon Cap Plug Kit
930-705-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Loop Tube Kit
930-206-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand Control Unit (Probe)930-249-G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentrator Cover
930-250-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Loop CoverConcentrator Tubes
930-251-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w/Heater, Tenax930-252-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w/Heater, Carbopack X (Modified)
930-716-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w/Heater, Tri-Bed Concentrator Tube Kit
930-4051-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Weather Insulating Bag

19 - 2

IPN 074-472-P1C

930-022-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Kit with Torque Wrench Kit

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

930-4061-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery
Line Insulation
931-405-P2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thin Probe Insulation
931-408-P2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Probe Insulation
NIST
930-4071-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIST Version Upgrade to NIST '05
930-4081-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIST '05 (with AMDIS)
930-4141-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VX Conversion Tubes, 10 each
930-4551-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backpack, HAPSPACKShipping Cases
930-464-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE
932-403-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE SituProbe(replaces SPS-1062-G1)
930-4131-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE Accessory Case
930-469-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V(ac) - 24V(dc) HAPSITE Power Supply
930-470-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charger

19.4 HAPSITE Smart Plus Consumables
NEG Pumps
930-242-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installed and Activated at Factory

IPN 074-472-P1C

930-425-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Pump
Carrier Gas Canisters
930-432-P6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 each
930-432-P12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 each
930-432-P24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 each
Extended Life Carrier Gas Canisters
930-720-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Life Carrier Gas Deployment Kit(110 liter)
930-4611-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Life Carrier Gas (110 liter cylinder)

19 - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Internal Standard Canisters
930-433-P6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canister, Internal Standard Gas, 6 each
930-433-P12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canister, Internal Standard Gas, 12 each
930-433-P24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canister, Internal Standard Gas, 24 each
Combo Pack Canisters
930-477-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Combo Pack (4 Carrier Gas and2 Internal Standard)071-747 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Standard Concentrator / Air(5 analytes) in Methanol 1.2 mL
071-760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE Chemical Standards Kit, 12 part(for training/practice)930-205-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ionizer With Magnet

19.5 Headspace Spare Parts
070-1204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Vials, Case of 100
931-702-G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vial Needle Guide,10 each
Syringes
070-1205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mL Gastight (not supplied with needle),
each070-1206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 µL Gastight w/Removable Needle, each070-1224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mL Luer Lock, each (not supplied withneedle)070-1207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement 10 µL Needle for Syringe(070-1206), each931-402-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Needle, Headspace
071-748 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance/IS Standard Headspace(4 analytes) in Methanol 1.2 mL
930-4151-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VX Conversion Pads (Headspace), 10 sets
931-406-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping Case, HeadspaceLine Insulation
931-405-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thin
931-408-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy
600-1131-P30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Power Cable

19 - 4

IPN 074-472-P1C

070-1223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 µL w/Fixed Needle, 6 each

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

19.6 Service Module Spare Parts
068-002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charger / Service Module Power
Cord, U.S.
930-0211-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Wrench Kit
930-465-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping Case, Service Module
600-1001-P15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 Cable (15 ft)

19.7 HAPSITE SituProbe Spare Parts
940-700-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SituProbe Vessel and Plugs
933-700-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collection Tube Replacement Kit
931-401-P2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Line
Line Insulation
931-405-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thin
931-408-P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy
600-1131-P30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Power Cable

IPN 074-472-P1C

932-220-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAPSITE SituProbe Accessory (6 ft),
Replacement

19 - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

19 - 6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Appendix A
HAPSITE Target Compounds
A.1 Compounds In Order Of Elution
Name
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
Bromomethane
Chloroethane
Acetone
1,1-Dichloroethylene
Methylene Chloride
Carbon Disulfide
trans-1,2-Dichloroethylene
1,1-Dichloroethane
Vinyl Acetate
2-Butanone
cis-1,2-Dichloroethylene
Chloroform

IPN 074-472-P1C

1,3,5Tris(trifluoromethyl)benzene

1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
BenzeneCarbon Tetrachloride
1,2-Dichloropropane
Bromodichloromethane
Trichloroethenecis-1,3-Dichloropropene
4-Methyl-2-Pentanone
trans-1,3-Dichloropropene
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Toluene2-Hexanone
Dibromochloromethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Chlorobenzene
Bromopentafluorobenzene
Ethyl Benzene
Bromoformm-Xylenep-Xylene
Styreneo-Xylene
1,1,2,2-TetrachloroethaneInternal Standards

Formulak

CH3Cl
CH2=CHCl
CH3Br
CH3CH2Cl
CH3COCH3
CCl2=CH2
CH2Cl2CS2
CClH=CHCl
CHCl2CH3
CH3COOC(H)CH2
CH3COCH2CH3
CClH=CClH
CHCl3
C6H3(CF3)3
CClH2CClH2
CCl3CH3
C6H6
CCl4
CH2ClCHClCH3
BrCl2CH
ClCH=CCl2
CClH=CCClH2(H)CH3COCH2CH(CH3)CH3
CClH=C(H)CClH2
CHCl2CH2Cl
C6H5CH3
CH3CO(CH2)3CH3
Br2ClCH
Cl2C=CCl2
C6H5ClC6BrF5
CH3CH2C6H5
CHBr3
C6H4(CH3)2
C6H4(CH3)2
C6H5CH=CH2
C6H4(CH3)2
CHCl2CHCl2
Note 1:
Note 2:

a
a
b
b
c
c

d
d

e
e

f
f
g
g

h
h

i
i
i
j
j

Quantion
AMU
0.08
50
0.11
62
0.17
96
0.19
64
0.27
43,58
0.37
98
0.39
86
0.46
76
0.51
96
0.57
65
0.57
43,86
0.63
43,58
0.73
96
0.78
83
0.96
Note 1
0.98
64
1.07
97
1.22
78
1.26
117
1.51
63
1.59
83
1.61
130
2.08
75
2.11
43,58
2.44
75
2.56
97
2.8
91
3.08
43,58
3.16
127
4.02
129
5.07
122
5.59
Note 2
5.91
91
6.24
173
6.35
106
6.35
106
7.25
104
7.52
91
7.52
83

I.S.
AMU
50
50
9
69
50
99
99
69
69
69
50
69
99
69
69
99
69
125
69
69
99
69
69
69
99
79
79
117
167
117
79
167
117
117
117
79
79

CAS #
74-87-3
75-01-4
74-83-975-00-3
67-64-1
75-35-4
75-09-2
75-15-0
540-59-0
75-34-3
108-05-4
78-93-3
540-59-0
67-66-3
729-81-7
107-06-2
71-55-6
71-43-2
56-23-5
78-87-5
75-27-4
79-01-6
542-75-6
108-10-1
542-75-6
79-00-5
108-88-3
591-78-6
124-48-1
127-18-4
108-90-7
344-4-7
100-41-4
75-25-2
1330-20-7
1330-20-7
100-42-5
1330-20-7
79-34-5

69, 75, 99, 125
79, 117, 167

A-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

IPN 074-472-P1C

This page is intentionally blank.

A-2

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Appendix B
Calibrating Gas Mixtures
B.1 Acquisition, Preparation, and Handling
WARNING
Failure to calibrate the instrument may lead to inaccurate
identification and quantification of compounds being
sampled.

WARNING
When using chemicals, wear appropriate PPE according
to MSDS and take recommended precautions (fumehood, etc.)

IPN 074-472-P1C

The HAPSITE (or any GCMS instrument) must be calibrated at one or moreconcentration levels of the organic compound(s) of interest for quantitative analysisof these target compounds. In the case of the HAPSITE, the target compounds
must be supplied to the instrument as a gaseous mixture of known volume/volume
composition (mole/mole % or ppmv levels in air or nitrogen) and at atmosphericpressure.
There are a number of important factors to consider where attention to detail is
important in acquiring, preparing, and handling gaseous standard calibration
mixtures. These can be organized in three groups:

1 How to establish the desired concentrations of the required compounds. See
section B.1.1 on page B-2.

2 Correct delivery of the mix to the inlet of the HAPSITE. See section B.1.2 on
page B-3.

3 Gas cylinder safety, contamination checks and corrective
steps in the equipment. See section B.1.3 on page B-6.

B-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

B.1.1 How to Establish the Desired Concentrations
There are two basic ways to obtain several concentrations of a given mix ofcompounds. The most obvious is to buy the compounds, premixed to specification,in cylinders containing the several concentrations desired. The second is to buy amaster cylinder of the compounds at the highest concentration needed, and diluteto the lower concentrations required. Each of these options is discussed below.
B.1.1.1 Using Cylinders Charged with Each Concentration
To perform a calibration, have the known gas mixtures on hand. A gas supplier(such as Scott Specialty Gases1) can provide a choice of cylinder sizes with thecompounds of interest mixed in a suitable matrix at the requisite concentrations.
The matrix (or balance gas) for the mixture should be specified as "VOC-free
Nitrogen" or "VOC-free Air", to minimize the level of background VOC's in thecalibration mix.
The concentrations for calibration of the various target compounds will probably be
defined in the method being followed. The method may specify, for example, 0.1
ppm, 1 ppm, and 10 ppm of each compound. Calibrate the HAPSITE to bracket theconcentrations at which the target compounds will occur in samples.
The mixtures received will be tagged with the precise value of the concentration ofeach compound as delivered; these will be approximately the concentrations
ordered. The concentration supplied will generally be within ±10% tolerance; thisis termed the blend accuracy.

The selected gas supplier should be able to advise about the reactivity of thecompounds needed, and the materials of cylinder construction to provide the best
long term stability of the concentration. The supplier will recommend the use ofstainless steel regulators with stainless diaphragms. To minimize stagnant volumes
where VOCs can accumulate, the regulator body should be designed withminimum internal dead-volume. Use 1 " diameter gauges, or eliminate the gauges
altogether. The regulators and the tubing following should be rated for high purity,
mildly corrosive (or corrosive) service if any halogenated VOC's are to bedelivered.
NOTE: A regulator/transfer line system must be well purged with pure nitrogen or
air to remove any residual VOCs prior to use with a cylinder containing alower concentration mix.

1.Scott Specialty Gases: (215) 766-8861

B-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

The precise values are the ones to be used in the course of building the calibration
libraries, and are accurate to +2 -20 %, depending on the target concentrationlevels and the certification methods used; this is termed the analytical accuracy.
The certified concentrations in each cylinder mixture will generally be stable atroom temperature conditions for about six months.

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Transfer fittings should be of the stainless steel Swagelok2 type, and transfer lines
should be clean, stainless steel or nickel 1/8 inch tubing. Teflon tubing should be
avoided due to its permeability. Ideally, regulators and transfer lines should beheat-traced to maintain above ambient temperatures (35-55 °C) and to reduce
adsorption of the higher boiling VOC's.
B.1.1.2 Diluting the Gas On SIte
The comments above, concerning hardware, relate as well to the case of dilution
systems. Guidelines to verify acceptable performance of suitable dynamic gas
mixing/dilution systems are suggested in the Federal Register (vol. 59, No. 148,
Aug. 3, 1994 Proposed Rules, 40 CFR Part 51 Method 205),
Systems conforming to the Method 205 suggestions are available commerciallyfrom Environics3 (Series 2014 Computerized VOC Gas Dilution System) andAlltech4 (GB-2 Gas Blender).
The materials in the flow stream must be inert to the VOC compounds to be used,and heat-traced to prevent condensation and accumulation of any VOC's in theflow channels. A good gas mixing system minimizes future outlay in certified
cylinder gas standard mixes. This allows a lab to require only the cylinders at thehighest calibration concentration levels. Lower concentrations (by as much as afactor of 1000) can be prepared by serial dilution (with VOC-free Nitrogen or air) of
these cylinder mixes to the desired calibration levels with the gas mixing system.
This is probably the most economic route for labs which must frequently do multiconcentration re-calibrations for known VOC mixtures.

B.1.2 Correct Delivery of the Mix to the Inlet of the HAPSITE

IPN 074-472-P1C

The HAPSITE is designed to draw in samples which are at atmospheric pressure.
Internal Standards gas is mixed with the sample in a ratio which is dependent on
the flow rate of the sample gas and the suction of the pump.

WARNING
Connecting the inlet of the Hand Control Unit to a sample
at a pressure above or below atmospheric will cause themixing ratio of the Internal Standards to be incorrect, so
the resultant calibration will be invalid.

2.Swagelock (Crawford Fitting Company): (216) 248-4600
3.Environics: (203) 429-5040
4.Alltech: (800) 255-8324

B-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

There are two basic approaches to assuring that the calibration mix is at
atmospheric pressure: a free flow of gas or capture of the gas mixture in an inert
sample bag.
B.1.2.1 Free Flow of Gas
The free flow of gas from the regulator of a pressure cylinder is reduced toatmospheric pressure when the impedance to flow is small. This can be achievedby placing a sampling tee at the point where the line becomes large in diameter.
The connection of the HAPSITE sample probe inlet should be at right angles to thedirection of gas flow with 1/8" stainless steel Swagelok fittings.

WARNINGThe excess vent flow (overflow) from this sampling tee(in the gas flow direction) should exit through stainlesssteel fittings of at least 1/4" size and a short vent line to a
fume hood or other exhaust system.
The smaller "leg" of the sampling tee is coupled to the HAPSITE. The total flow to
the sampling tee should be approximately 1 liter/min. to allow sufficient excess overthe HAPSITE sampling flow rate which is approximately 200 cc/min. and to prevent
external air from being drawn back into the vent "leg" of the sampling tee which
would alter the concentrations delivered from the cylinder or mixer.

Ultra clean Tedlar sample bags, dedicated to a given VOC compoundmix/concentration level, will be the most economic option for regular calibration(more than once a week) and eliminates the waste of certified gas mix out of thesampling tee vent. The dedicated Tedlar bag can be filled directly from theassociated gas cylinder or gas mixing system effluent.

WARNING
Regulate the gas delivery to avoid overfilling the bag. The
bags are not designed to be pressurized.
Alternatively, a bag can be filled by delivery of a set volume of the diluent gas (viaa mass flow meter), then adding a set volume of the certified cylinder VOC gas mix,
followed by mixing to homogeneity in the bag to obtain the proper dilution. A 12-liter
Tedlar bag will allow about 60 HAPSITE samplings of the contents between refills.
The use of properly filled Tedlar bags inherently assures that the gaseous contents
are at atmospheric pressure for sampling. A properly filled Tedlar bag will haveplenty of flex left in the bag walls so that the bag can be easily kneaded to mix the

B-4

IPN 074-472-P1C

B.1.2.2 Inert Sample Bag

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manualcontents. The bag should not be filled to the point where the bag appears like a firm
"air pillow", as the bag would then be at above atmospheric pressure, and could
not be sampled accurately by the HAPSITE. In addition, this would lead to eventual
leakage along the bag seams, destroying the integrity. The use of straight throughon-off valves on the Tedlar bags (such as on 231 -XX series bags by SKC5, Inc.)
should minimize any flow restriction variation in gas delivery to the HAPSITE andare preferred.
Clean Tedlar bags to be filled with a certified gas mix should be filled once with thegas mix and allowed to stand several minutes for preconditioning, then evacuatedwith a transfer line and a diaphragm vacuum pump and refilled again with the mix.
Fittings on the Tedlar bags are typically 3/16" diameter; the inlet systems for the
HAPSITE are 1/8" diameter. Connection of the Hand Control Unit (or the HeatedLine) to the Tedlar bag can be made with a stainless steel Swagelok type adapter,
3/16" to 1/8". The recommended parts for this adapter include:
3/16" to 1/8" Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . (Swagelok part# SS-300-R-2)
3/16" Teflon Ferrule Set . . . . . . . . . . (Swagelok part# T-300-Set)
1/8" Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Swagelok part# S-S-202-1)
1/8" Ferrule Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Swagelok part# SS-200-Set)

IPN 074-472-P1C

The 3/16" O.D. tube on the Tedlar bag valve will slip into and out of the 3/16" nuton the adapter, which can be easily finger tightened to seal leak free on the Teflon
ferrule set. Care should be taken to not completely unscrew the 3/16" nut from theadapter each time a Tedlar bag is removed, to prevent dropped and lost nuts andferrules. The 1/8" end of the adapter is a swaged connection to the 1/8" male
Swagelok fitting on the end of the HAPSITE Hand Control Unit, so wrenches will
be required to make a leak free connection here.
The Tedlar bag valve should be open only during the HAPSITE sample taking cycle
to save gas usage.

5.SKC: (800) 752-8472

B-5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

B.1.3 Gas Cylinder Safety, Contamination Checks, and Corrective StepsWARNING
Safety of operations should always take precedence inthe working environment. Gas cylinders should beproperly affixed to lab benches with clamps, or chained
to the wall for safety. A safety certified gas cylinder cartshould be available in the vicinity of where the cylinders
are normally used, for moving them and replacing empty
cylinders. Gas cylinders should never be transportedwith the regulator attached!
Tedlar bags may be cleaned for reuse, or replaced with new bags. To clean a Tedlarbag for use with different VOC's or concentrations, partially fill with VOC-free N2 or
VOC-free air, heat it to 40-50 °C by wrapping the bag with an electric blanket forseveral minutes, then evacuate the bag contents through the open valve with aclean transfer line to a diaphragm vacuum pump. This operation should be
repeated 3 times for a normal cleaning. Then the bag may be stored filled with VOC
free N2 or VOC-free air until needed.

This is especially important for concentrations below 1 ppmv and for VOC's oflimited stability in the Tedlar sample bags. Depending on the compounds (and theirconcentrations) that were previously present in the bags, and if the bags are tocontain less than 1 ppmv standard gas mixes, pre-analyze the bag (after thecleaning process above) while the bag is still filled with the VOC-free N2, orVOC-free air, using the HAPSITE. The detection of any target compounds in the
bag should necessitate recleaning or replacement with a bag known to be "clean".
A supply of clean Tedlar bags can be useful for quick standards preparation bydirect liquid injection of VOC's not regularly analyzed into an N2 or air matrix in thebags. This allows a more convenient and rapid alternative to gaseous cylinder
mixes in such uses as new applications development or verification of unknown
VOCs by component spiking. This should be qualified by saying that accurate gas
standard preparation by direct liquid injection is only recommended at levels
greater than 5 ppmv, because the minimum liquid volume deliverable by syringe at
an acceptable accuracy and precision is about 0.5 L. This corresponds toapproximately 10 ppmv in a 12 liter Tedlar bag, or approximately 3 ppmv in a 40
liter Tedlar bag. Larger Tedlar bags are available but convenience in regular
handling and the possibility of target compound adsorption on the larger interior
surface area may be matters of concern.

B-6

IPN 074-472-P1C

To protect the concentration integrity in the bag, care should be taken to purge andrefill any standard gas mix after two weeks. Keep the standard gas mix at room
temperature between samplings with the bag valve securely closed,

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Appendix C
Shipping the HAPSITE and Consumables
C.1 Introduction
The HAPSITE instrument and its Service Module are designed to be easy to shipfor use at remote locations. The instruments can be reshipped in the cardboard
boxes (with the same cut-foam inserts) you received them in. These will probably
not suffice for frequent shipping. A heavy-duty fitted shipping case for the HAPSITE
is available from INFICON as part number 930-464-P1. The case for the Service
Module is part number 930-465-P1. Protected by these cases, the instruments willsurvive handling by most airline, air freight, and trucking handlers.
While there is room for the necessary cables in each case, additional boxing must
be done for certain accessories and consumables, as detailed below.

CAUTIONThe batteries should be removed from the HAPSITE andthe Service Module before shipping, as their weight,
under the shock-loads of shipment, will damage therespective instrument.
Batteries will require their own packaging for shipment. The Laptop, if required at
the remote site, should be hand-carried.

IPN 074-472-P1C

NEG Pumps can easily be shipped in the box in which they are received. A NEG
pump installed in the HAPSITE will not be damaged by shipment.

C.2 Shipping the Canisters
WARNING
When shipping canisters, follow DOT regulations for
packaging, labeling, and methods in which hazardous
materials can be shipped.
The canisters of carrier gas and internal standard gas are pressurized to 700 kPa(100 psig) or more. The canisters are approved by the Department ofTransportation (DOT), but they are considered hazardous cargo because of thepressure. They are permitted to be transported on passenger aircraft, but not in thepassenger compartment, nor checked as luggage, nor in luggage. The labeling of

C-1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

the cartons and the paperwork required are exacting and can be tedious, so theeasiest approach is to contact INFICON and order the required gases to be
shipped directly to the site.

WARNING
Do not ship canisters installed in the HAPSITE; they are
considered hazardous
If personal gases are chosen to be shipped, the original cartons can be used tosave time. If new cartons must be used, refer to the old shipping packages for therequired labeling.
The regulations governing shipments of hazardous goods are found in the DOT
portion of the Code of Federal Regulations: Part 171, 172 and 173 of 49 C.F.R.
The gas canisters, pressurized, are classified as hazardous materials under
Section 172.101. When shipped from INFICON, they meet all the packaging
requirements set forth in Section 173.
Federal Express, UPS, and the passenger airlines are forbidden to accept suchcargo unless it is accompanied with the required "Shipper's Declaration forDangerous Goods" in four copies. Both FedEx and UPS have their own version
and will provide instructions. The generic version, for use with airlines, is shown
after page C-3, and for instructions on filling out the form, see below.
In filling out the form, it is important to be precise. In the "Transport Details" box,
firmly cross out the term "Cargo Aircraft Only". To the right of the box, cross out theterm "Radioactive".



Nitrogen, Compressed, UN 1066, orCompressed Gases, n. o. s., UN 1956 respectively(Bromo-pentafluorobenzene, Nitrogen)

The "Class or Division" is 2.2. "Packing Group" and "Subsidiary Risk" are left blank.
"Quantity and Type of Packing" for a single six-pack would read:
6 DOT 2M Canisters in Fiberboard Box X 0.04 Kg.
For two six-packs in a single larger box (which must carry the green diamond andother placarding), this would read 12 DOT 2M Canisters in 2 Fiberboard Boxes X
0.08 Kg (Overpack Used). The Kg number refers to the total mass of the gas, notthe gross weight.
In the "Packing Inst." column write 200. The "Authorization" column is left blank.
The signature section is very important; fill it out completely.

C-2

IPN 074-472-P1C

The "Proper Shipping Name" and "UN or ID NO." are either:

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

The "Shipper's Declaration for Dangerous Goods" is a "Style F83R" from Labelmaster in Chicago; their phone number is 800 621-5808. They are carbon-lessfour-part forms and may be available from local stationary suppliers. The form, andall its copies, must have red markings along the borders; black and white copies
will not be accepted.
Although the airline will carry the box of canisters in the same cargo hold as the
goods you check as baggage, they will not accept hazardous materials at thecheck-in counter. Take the box of canisters with the form filled out to the desk ofyour airline at the air freight terminal at your airport. They will be able to accept it
and get it onto the flight.

C.3 Empty Canisters
It is important to remember that it is the pressure of the gas in the canisters whichis considered hazardous. The gases themselves are basically nitrogen, which is a
simple asphyxiant. (The amount of the organic Internal Standards compounds is 50
ppm and 100 ppm).
To discard the canisters, simply discharge them outdoors by inserting any small
point into the valve. Once they are empty, they can be disposed of as aluminum
scrap.

WARNING

IPN 074-472-P1C

When discharging the canisters, point them away frompeople and stand upwind of the discharge. Wheneverpossible discharge canisters in vent hoods.
If the empty canisters cannot be recycled or disposed, they may be shipped backto their point of origin for disposal:
Be certain that they are empty (less than 30 psi) then package them in a plain
cardboard box, without any green diamond label. Mark the box as "Empty
Canisters for Destruction". Ship them, prepaid, toScott Specialty Gases
2330 Hamilton BoulevardSouth Plainfield NJ 07080

C-3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Index
Symbols% RSD 17-9

Begin Time 11-31
blend accuracy B-2

AC

IPN 074-472-P1C

AC to DC power converter 2-10
airleak 16-3, 16-5
samples 1-7
alignment 17-1
AMDIS 6-7, 7-1, 8-3, 9-1, 9-30, 12-4, 17-1
analyzing data 9-30
hits 9-29
library 6-3, 9-30, 11-36
AMU 17-1
analysis type
Performance Check 11-38
RI Calibr. Data + Internal Std. 11-38
RI Calibration Data 11-37
Simple 11-37
analyte 1-6, 12-4, 17-1
analyte response 14-2
analytical accuracy B-2
Analytical Module 1-1
argon 1-9
atmospheric pressure 1-8
atomic weight 17-1
Autotune 17-1
Long 7-2
Short 7-2

B
Backflush 11-20
background 14-9, 14-10
background subtraction 9-12
backpack 2-52
adjustment 2-52
baseline 17-1
batteries 2-47, 15-1, 15-4
charger 2-48
amber indicator 2-50
green indicator 2-50
no charge 16-50
no indicators 16-50
off indicator 2-50
red indicator 2-50, 16-50
HAPSITE 2-10
shipping C-1
Battery Icon 3-51

Calibrate function 12-12
calibration
curve 14-13, 17-1
mix 13-4, B-1, B-4
mixes 14-11
points 14-13
Calibration Display file 12-9calibration mix 13-4
calibration report 12-4
canisters
empty C-3
shipping C-1
carrier gas 17-2
Carrier Gas Icon 3-51
carryover 14-9, 14-10, 14-14
Chromatogram Peak Width 11-40
cleaning 14-14
Co-elution 9-17
Collection Mode
Full Scan 11-6
SIM 11-6
column 1-5, 17-2
COM1 communications 8-20
communication
RS232 15-5
RS485 15-5
w/laptop 8-13
compounds A-1
computer 1-10, 15-5
Communications 8-2
Disk Drive 8-2
Hard Disk 8-2
Operating System 8-2
Processor 8-2
RAM 8-2
CONC Button 3-54
ConcCooldown 11-20
concentration 12-1, 17-2
concentration vs response 14-13
concentrator 14-8
Concentrator in Laptop Mode 5-15
Concentrator in Portable Mode 3-25
concentrator tube 6-1
ConcFill 14-10
consumables 13-4

Index - 1

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

D
DAC 17-2
dataexport 9-37
data file 10-3, 10-12
default name 11-46
extensions 9-3
name 11-46
data file extension*.acq 9-3*.hpz 9-3
data review 9-1, 10-7
export 9-37
library search 9-24
peaks found 9-29
range 9-15
reports 9-36
Declaration Of Contamination 18-1
decontamination 16-7
Deconvolution Level 11-41
default methods 8-8
default.tun 11-25
Desorb 11-21
diaphragm
pump 1-8, 1-9
dry purge 14-7
Dwell 11-32
Time 11-30

Eelectron multiplier 1-8, 17-2
Elimination Rules 11-44
elution time 17-3
End Mass 11-30
End Time 11-31
equilibrium time 17-3
Event Log File 10-3, 10-11
exhaust 2-7

Index - 2F
filament 17-3
delay 11-23, 17-3
file extension*.hps 9-3
file transfer 10-12
file types
data files 10-3, 10-12
event log files 10-3, 10-11
Method file 11-1
method files 10-1, 10-10
report files 10-12
Tune files 10-12
FLUSH mode 14-9
Foreflush 11-19
foreline 15-1, 15-4
vent valve 15-1, 15-4
full method 17-4
Full Scan 6-1, 6-7
method file 11-7G
gas
canister C-2
mixture calibration B-2
pressure check carrier 16-5
vent pressure 15-3
gas canister 2-8
internal standard 2-9
nitrogen 2-9
gas chromatograph 1-6
control 1-10
gas cylinders B-6
GC/MS 6-7
GPS Icon 3-57

H
hand control unit 17-4
probe 1-1
hazardous materials C-2
Headspace 17-4
headspace 14-6, 14-7
Headspace method 11-12
Headspace Sampling System in Laptop
Mode 5-19
Headspace Sampling System in Portable
Mode 3-67
headspace sampling system, see HSS
heated line 17-4
heated valves 14-6
heated zones 14-5
heaters 11-9

IPN 074-472-P1C

contamination 14-9, 14-10, 16-7
gas chromatograph 16-8
probe 16-9
symptoms of 16-8
curve statistics 12-4
Customer Support
Customer Service 18-1
Repair Service 18-1
Return Material Authorization 18-1
Sales 18-1
Service Center 18-1
Technical Support 18-1
customize data filenames 11-46

IPN 074-472-P1C

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

Heaters Icon 3-52
helium 1-9
Help Icon 3-42
High Mass 11-38
Hot Swap Cable 2-53
HSPurge 11-21
HSS 1-2, 2-13, 5-19, 17-4
AC to CD Power 2-14
battery 2-19
battery charging 13-19
battery replace 13-17
calibration standard 13-9
carryover contamination 13-14
cleaning the wells 13-15
consumables 13-4
cycling vials 13-13
dimensions 13-3
equilibrium stabilization time 13-3
flow pressure 17-3
flush 17-3
indicators 13-3
measurement 13-13
mounting requirement 13-3
needle 2-14
needle replacement 2-14, 16-47
nitrogen flow pressure 11-24
operating conditions 13-3
oven 13-3
power 13-3
purge 17-7
quantitation limit 13-3
sample 11-21
sensitivity 6-1
transfer line 2-14
vials 13-7
weight 13-3
wells 13-11
y-cable 2-14hydrocarbons 16-8

I
I.S. Reference 17-5
Info Icon 3-43
initialization 17-4
injection 1-6, 17-4
inletmethod file 11-7
Inlet Component 11-16
Inlet Stateavailable 11-19
concentrator 11-20
HSS 11-21

inlet state 11-16, 11-17, 17-5
custom valve state 11-20
integration time 17-2
interconnect plug 15-17
interfaces 1-10
internal standard 1-5, 17-5, B-3
Internal Standard Icon 3-52
ion 17-5
beam 1-7
energy 17-5
source filament 16-8
target 17-10
volume 1-7, 17-5
ion detector 1-7
ion pump usage 16-1
ionization 1-7
ionized molecules 1-7
ionizer 1-7, 1-8, 17-5Kkrypton 1-9

L
laptop mode 5-1
LCD 17-5
lead-acid gel cells 15-3
leak check 16-34
library 6-3, 6-4, 11-39, 12-1, 17-6
choices 11-39
of mass spectra 1-8
Search file 11-7
Line Purge 11-19
liquid sample 16-8
log file 10-11

Mmain processor 1-10
manifold 15-3
vent valve 15-3
manual tune 7-9, 7-25, 10-4
mass
calibration 17-6
defect 17-6
fragment 17-6
peak display 7-17
selector 1-7
spectral data 12-1
mass spectrometer 1-6, 1-7, 16-7
ionizer replacement 16-41
manifold 16-7
mass spectrum 17-6
Mass Width 11-32

Index - 3

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating ManualN
NEG
activation 16-40
bakeout 16-17
install 16-29
leak check 16-34
pump 1-8, 16-4
activation 16-7
safety 16-2
usage 16-1
reactivating 16-19
removal 16-23
troubleshooting 16-15
NEG Button 3-53
Net Button 3-59
NIST 6-7, 7-1, 8-3, 12-4, 13-1
analyzing data 9-33
header information 9-26
hits 9-29
library 9-1, 17-7
library search 9-24, 11-1

Index - 4

Nitrogen 13-4, 14-4, 14-10
Canister 13-18
noble gases 1-9
noise check 17-7
Noise Thresholding Level 11-40

Ooil, vacuum pump 15-3
open loop 14-8
organic
compounds 1-6
gas flow 1-5
gases 1-5, 16-8
oven 1-5

P
partition coefficient 14-1
partitioning 14-1
Peak Shape 11-41
phase 17-7
pneumatic system 16-8
polar VOCs 14-2
polarity 14-2
Portable Mode 3-1
PreDesorb 11-21
preventive maintenance 16-1
programmable DC 1-9
pump
ion pump 1-9
operations 15-1
speeds 1-9
purge and trap 14-1
purity 17-7Q
quadrupole 1-7, 1-8
Qualitative 11-36
identification 9-26
Quantitation
sequence 11-7
Quantitative 11-36
analysis 12-1
library 11-41
method 11-42

Rradio frequency voltage 1-7
range 9-15
recalculate 17-8
Reject Bin 11-41

IPN 074-472-P1C

MDP/turbo pump 15-3, 15-4
accl 15-4
norm 15-4
speed 15-4
Membrane Interface Mass Spectrometry
6-1
membrane isolation valve 1-6, 17-6
methanol 14-11, 16-27
method 17-6
creation 11-4, 11-50
development 11-3, 12-11
sequencing 11-53
wizard 11-2
Method Editor
Inlet component 11-16
Inlet States 11-19
Inlet States for Concentrator 11-20
Inlet States for HSS 11-21
Method file 10-1, 10-10, 11-1
methods, default 8-8
MIMS 6-1
Minimum Match Factor 11-38
mix, calibration 13-4
mobile phase 1-5
Mode of Analysis
GC/MS 11-6
Survey 11-6
molecular weight 17-6
MS checkup 7-1
MS pressure 14-11
multiplier voltage 17-6

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

remotemode 5-1
power 17-8
repair 16-1
Report 10-12
calibration 12-4
printing 11-25
Qualitative 9-37
Quantitative 9-37
Summary 9-37
reports 9-36
resolution 11-39, 17-8
response factor 12-1, 12-4
retention time 1-5, 12-1, 17-8
reverse search 17-8
Review Results 3-32
reviewing data 9-1
RIC 17-8
display 9-20
plots 9-20
roughing pump 15-1
round trip
time 17-8

IPN 074-472-P1CS
samplebag B-4, B-6
loop 1-6, 2-31, 5-10, 6-1, 17-9
probe 14-6, 14-7
purging 14-6
vial 17-9
well 17-9
sampling methods 6-1
scan 1-8
method 17-9
time 17-9
Selected Ion Method file 11-8
Selected Ion Monitoring 6-1
Selecting a New Method on Laptop 5-7
sensitivity 6-1, 6-7, 11-39
highest 11-7
septum 17-9
service 16-1
ship kit 2-1, 2-3
shipping C-1
canisters C-1
HAPSITE C-1
signal to noise ratio 11-30
SIM 1-8, 6-1, 6-7, 11-6, 11-30, 17-9
GC/MS method 11-7
method 17-9
Survey 11-34

SituProbe 1-2, 17-10
inlet states 11-21
method 11-13
nitrogen flow pressure 11-25
SituProbe Flow Pres 14-7
SituProbe Flow Pressure 14-11
SituProbe in Laptop Mode 5-25
SituProbe in Portable Mode 3-73
SM 1-1, 1-9, 2-19, 15-1
attach to HAPSITE 15-12
batteries 15-3
charger 15-4
charge indicator 15-4
communications 2-23, 8-20, 15-5
components 1-4
detach 2-26
detaching from HAPSITE 15-17
manifold 15-4
power loss 15-23
power supply 15-5
roughing pump 15-4
roughing pump usage 16-1
software 15-7
storage 15-20, 15-21
turbopump 15-1
turbopump usage 16-1
vent 2-23
VI Valve cleaning 16-26
software 1-10
SmartIQ 8-1
versions 8-29
soil testing 13-1
solubility 14-2
spectrometercontamination of 16-8
control 1-9
spectrumgrab 17-10
spiking techniques 14-11
SPLoopFill 14-7
sputter ion pump 1-9
standard mix 14-13
standards preparation 12-10
Standby 11-20
Start Mass 11-30
stationary phase 1-5
summary 11-49
Supelco 13-4
surrogates 13-9
Survey 6-1
method 6-1, 6-3, 6-7
Survey Mode 1-7, 5-2, 6-1
System Parameters 3-50

Index - 5

HAPSITE Smart Plus Operating Manual

T

W

Targetlibrary 6-4
Tedlar bag B-4, B-6
temperature
ramp 11-22
Tenax concentrator 11-24
threshold 17-10
TIC 17-10
Timed Mode 11-34
Total Ion Chromatograph 1-5transfer line insulation 2-14
Tri-bed concentrator 5-15, 11-24
Trigger Mode 11-34
Tune 7-1, 17-11
Autotune 7-1
calibration file 11-7
files 10-12
Manual 7-1
manual 7-25
Report 7-4, 7-5
Tune Status Icon 3-55
turbopump 1-8

water
testing 13-1
vapor 15-4
water level 14-7
wireless
communication 4-8
IP address 4-9
power 4-7
range 4-6
wizard 11-2

X
xenon 1-9

Z
zirconium alloy 1-9
Zoom 9-17

U
user access
Advanced 8-23
level 8-23
Normal 8-23

vacuum interconnect valve 1-4, 15-1, 15-4,
17-11
vacuum pump oil 15-3
Valve States 11-17
vapor pressure 14-2
vent gas pressure 15-3
VI valve 16-26
vials
loading 13-7
sample 13-4
VOC-free Air B-2
volatile compounds 6-7
volatiles 13-1

Index - 6

IPN 074-472-P1C

V